1. 天神相应显示巴利原文
1. Devatāsaṃyuttaṃ
1. 《渡暴流经》的解释显示巴利原文
1. Oghataraṇasuttavaṇṇanā
此处所说的“相应阿含”,由有偈品、因缘品、蕴品、六处品、大品组成,共分五品。就经数而言——显示巴利原文
Tattha saṃyuttāgamo nāma sagāthāvaggo, nidānavaggo, khandhakavaggo, saḷāyatanavaggo, mahāvaggoti pañcavaggo hoti. Suttato –
七千部经,与七百部经,
及六十二部经,这就是相应部的集成。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Satta suttasahassāni, satta suttasatāni ca; Dvāsaṭṭhi ceva suttāni, eso saṃyuttasaṅgaho’’.
若以诵分来衡量,则有一百个诵分。其中,诸品以“有偈品”为首;诸经以《渡暴流经》为首。而此经以“如是我闻”等为开端的缘起,乃是尊者阿难在第一次大结集时所宣说。然而,第一次大结集的详细情形,已于《吉祥悦意》——《长部》的注释书——的开篇部分详加阐述,故此处应依彼处所详述的方式予以理解。显示巴利原文
Bhāṇavārato bhāṇavārasataṃ hoti. Tassa vaggesu sagāthāvaggo ādi, suttesu oghataraṇasuttaṃ. Tassāpi ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādikaṃ āyasmatā ānandena paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikāle vuttaṃ nidānamādi. Sā panesā paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti sumaṅgalavilāsiniyā dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāya ādimhi vitthāritā, tasmā sā tattha vitthāritanayeneva veditabbā.
1 1. 现在,对于这段以“如是我闻”等为开端的缘起,我们来作词类分析:“evaṃ”是不变词。“me”等是名词。在“住于舍卫城”一句中,“vi”是前缀,“harati”是动词——首先应依此方式了知词类的划分。显示巴利原文
1. Yaṃ panetaṃ ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādikaṃ nidānaṃ, tattha evanti nipātapadaṃ. Metiādīni nāmapadāni. Sāvatthiyaṃ viharatīti ettha vīti upasaggapadaṃ, haratīti ākhyātapadanti iminā tāva nayena padavibhāgo veditabbo.
从义理上分析,evaṃ一词首先具有多种不同的含义,如譬喻、教导、随喜、呵责、领受话语、方式、所示、确认等。此词确实出现在这些情境中:在“既已得此人身,便应广行众善”(《法句》53)等句中,用作譬喻。在“你应如此前进,应如此后退”等(《增支部》4.122)句中,用作教导。在“世尊,正是如此!善逝,正是如此!”等(《增支部》3.66)句中,用作随喜。在“那个卑劣的女人,便是如此在一切处所称赞那位秃头沙门”等(《相应部》1.187)句中,用作呵责。在“是的,尊者!”那些比丘如此回应世尊等(《中部》1.1)句中,用作领受话语。在“尊者,我便是如此理解世尊所宣说的法”等(《中部》1.398)句中,用作方式的表达。在“来,年轻人!你前往沙门阿难处,抵达后,请以我的话问候沙门阿难是否轻安、无恙、康健有力、安稳自在:‘多德亚之子须跋年轻人问候尊者阿难是否轻安、无恙、康健有力、安稳自在。’并作如是说:‘善哉,愿尊者阿难出于悲悯,前往多德亚之子须跋年轻人的住处。’”等(《长部》1.445)句中,用作所示。在“迦摩罗人啊,你们如何思惟?这些法是善的,还是……显示巴利原文
Atthato pana evaṃsaddo tāva upamūpadesa-sampahaṃsana-garahaṇa-vacanasampaṭiggahākāranidassanāvadhāraṇādi-anekatthappabhedo. Tathā hesa – ‘‘evaṃ jātena maccena, kattabbaṃ kusalaṃ bahu’’nti (dha. pa. 53) evamādīsu upamāyaṃ āgato. ‘‘Evaṃ te abhikkamitabbaṃ , evaṃ te paṭikkamitabba’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. 4.122) upadese. ‘‘Evametaṃ bhagavā, evametaṃ sugatā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 3.66) sampahaṃsane. ‘‘Evamevaṃ panāyaṃ vasalī yasmiṃ vā tasmiṃ vā tassa muṇḍakassa samaṇakassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.187) garahaṇe. ‘‘Evaṃ, bhanteti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosu’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.1) vacanasampaṭiggahe. ‘‘Evaṃ byā kho ahaṃ, bhante, bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.398) ākāre . ‘‘Ehi tvaṃ māṇavaka, yena samaṇo ānando tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā mama vacanena samaṇaṃ ānandaṃ appābādhaṃ appātaṅkaṃ lahuṭṭhānaṃ balaṃ phāsuvihāraṃ puccha – ‘subho māṇavo todeyyaputto bhavantaṃ ānandaṃ appābādhaṃ appātaṅkaṃ lahuṭṭhānaṃ balaṃ phāsuvihāraṃ pucchatī’ti. Evañca vadehi – ‘sādhu kira bhavaṃ ānando yena subhassa māṇavassa todeyyaputtassa nivesanaṃ, tenupasaṅkamatu anukampaṃ upādāyā’ti’’ādīsu (dī. ni. 1.445) nidassane. ‘‘Taṃ kiṃ maññatha kālāmā, ime dhammā kusalā vā akusalā vāti? Akusalā, bhante. Sāvajjā vā anavajjā vāti? Sāvajjā, bhante. Viññugarahitā vā viññuppasatthā vāti? Viññugarahitā, bhante. Samattā samādinnā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti vā no vā, kathaṃ vo ettha hotīti? Samattā, bhante, samādinnā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti, evaṃ no ettha hotī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 3.66) avadhāraṇe. Svāyamidha ākāranidassanāvadhāraṇesu daṭṭhabbo.
此处,以表方式的“evaṃ”一词阐明此义:世尊的话语,具足种种理趣,源自种种意乐,义理与文辞圆满,有种种神变,说法与证悟甚深,能随顺一切众生各自的语言传入耳中——有谁能以一切方式完全了知呢?然而,我(阿难)以一切心力生起欲闻之心后,也仅以一种方式听闻,即“如是我闻,我也以一种方式听闻”。显示巴利原文
Tattha ākāratthena evaṃsaddena etamatthaṃ dīpeti – nānānayanipuṇaṃ anekajjhāsayasamuṭṭhānaṃ atthabyañjanasampannaṃ vividhapāṭihāriyaṃ dhammatthadesanā paṭivedhagambhīraṃ sabbasattānaṃ sakasakabhāsānurūpato sotapathamāgacchantaṃ tassa bhagavato vacanaṃ sabbappakārena ko samattho viññātuṃ? Sabbathāmena pana sotukāmataṃ janetvāpi evaṃ me sutaṃ, mayāpi ekenākārena sutanti.
就举例的意义而言——为了表明“我并非自生者,此法并非我所亲证”,从而将自己排除,他说道“如是我闻,我也如是听闻”,以此举例开示即将宣说的整部经。显示巴利原文
Nidassanatthena – ‘‘nāhaṃ sayambhū, na mayā idaṃ sacchikata’’nti attānaṃ parimocento – ‘‘evaṃ me sutaṃ, mayāpi evaṃ suta’’nti idāni vattabbaṃ sakalasuttaṃ nidasseti.
以确定的意义而言——正如世尊所确定:“诸比丘,我声闻比丘中,多闻第一者,即此阿难;具慧者、具念者、具坚忍者、侍者第一者,即此阿难”(《增支部》1.220-223),又如法将(舍利弗尊者)如此称赞:“具寿阿难是义理善巧者、法善巧者、文辞善巧者、语法善巧者、前后贯通善巧者”(《增支部》5.169)。为显示与这些称赞相应的、自己那卓越的忆持力,令众生生起欲闻之心,他说:“如是我闻。”而其中的义理或文辞无减无增,正是如此,不应视为其他。显示巴利原文
Avadhāraṇatthena – ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ bahussutānaṃ yadidaṃ ānando, gatimantānaṃ, satimantānaṃ, dhitimantānaṃ, upaṭṭhākānaṃ yadidaṃ ānando’’ti (a. ni. 1.220-223) evaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘āyasmā ānando atthakusalo dhammakusalo byañjanakusalo niruttikusalo pubbāparakusalo’’ti (a. ni. 5.169) evaṃ dhammasenāpatinā ca pasatthabhāvānurūpaṃ attano dhāraṇabalaṃ dassento sattānaṃ sotukāmataṃ janeti – ‘‘evaṃ me sutaṃ, tañca kho atthato vā byañjanato vā anūnamanadhikaṃ, evameva na aññathā daṭṭhabba’’nti.
“me”一词用于三种意义。正如“以偈颂唱诵所得的食物,不应被我食用”(《经集》81)等句中,表“被我”;“尊者,恳请世尊为我简要说法”(《相应部》4.88)等句中,表“为我”;“诸比丘,你们应成为我法的继承者”(《中部》1.29)等句中,表“我的”。而在此处,它可通于“被我听闻”与“我的听闻”二义。显示巴利原文
Mesaddo tīsu atthesu dissati. Tathā hissa – ‘‘gāthābhigītaṃ me abhojaneyya’’ntiādīsu (su. ni. 81) mayāti attho. ‘‘Sādhu me, bhante, bhagavā saṃkhittena dhammaṃ desetū ’’ tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.88) mayhanti attho. ‘‘Dhammadāyādā me, bhikkhave, bhavathā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.29) mamāti attho. Idha pana ‘‘mayā suta’’nti ca ‘‘mama suta’’nti ca atthadvaye yujjati.
“sutaṃ”中的“suta”一词,有带前缀与不带前缀的用法,具行走、闻名、湿润、积聚、勤修、耳所识、随耳门了知等众多不同意义。例如,在“为军队所追逐的人”等句中,意为“行走的”;在“对已闻之法正观察的人”(《自说》11)等句中,意为“法已流布闻名的”;在“有漏泄者对有漏泄者”(《波逸提》657)等句中,意为“湿润的、泄出的”;在“你们已积聚无量福德”(《小诵》7.12)等句中,意为“已积集的”;在“那些专心勤修禅那的智者”(《法句》181)等句中,意为“精勤于禅那的”;在“所见、所闻、所觉”(《中部》1.241)等句中,意为“被耳所识知的”;在“持闻者、闻法积集者”(《中部》1.339)等句中,意为“持守随耳门通道而了知的法的人”。然而在此处,它指“随耳门通道而领受了的”或“领受”。因为当“me”释为“被我”时,整句即“被我如此听闻,即随耳门通道而领受了的”;当“me”释为“我的”时,整句即“我的如此听闻,即随耳门通道的领受”。显示巴利原文
Sutanti ayaṃ sutasaddo saupasaggo anupasaggo ca gamana-vissuta-kilinnaupacitānuyoga-sotaviññeyya-sotadvārānusāraviññātādianekatthappabhedo. Tathā hissa – ‘‘senāya pasuto’’tiādīsu gacchantoti attho. ‘‘Sutadhammassa passato’’tiādīsu (udā. 11) vissutadhammassāti attho. ‘‘Avassutā avassutassā’’tiādīsu (pāci. 657) kilinnākilinnassāti attho. ‘‘Tumhehi puññaṃ pasutaṃ anappaka’’ntiādīsu (khu. pā. 7.12) upacitanti attho. ‘‘Ye jhānapasutā dhīrā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 181) jhānānuyuttāti attho. ‘‘Diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ muta’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.241) sotaviññeyyanti attho. ‘‘Sutadharo sutasannicayo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.339) sotadvārānusāraviññātadharoti attho. Idha panassa sotadvārānusārena upadhāritanti vā upadhāraṇanti vā attho. Me-saddassa hi mayāti atthe sati – ‘‘evaṃ mayā sutaṃ, sotadvārānusārena upadhārita’’nti yujjati. Mamāti atthe sati – ‘‘evaṃ mama sutaṃ, sotadvārānusārena upadhāraṇa’’nti yujjati.
因此,在这三个词中:“evaṃ”指示耳识等识的作用;“me”指示具足彼识的补特伽罗;“sutaṃ”则通过否定未听闻的状态,指示无减、无增、无颠倒的执取。同样地,“evaṃ”彰显随耳门通道而转起的识路,以种种方式缘于所缘而转起的情形;“me”是自我的标示;“sutaṃ”是法的标示。在此,其略义为:“通过以种种方式缘于所缘而转起的识路,我并未做任何他事,唯成办了此事——此法已被听闻。”显示巴利原文
Evametesu tīsu padesu evanti sotaviññāṇādiviññāṇakiccanidassanaṃ. Meti vuttaviññāṇasamaṅgipuggalanidassanaṃ. Sutanti assavanabhāvapaṭikkhepato anūnānadhikāviparītaggahaṇanidassanaṃ. Tathā evanti tassa sotadvārānusārena pavattāya viññāṇavīthiyā nānappakārena ārammaṇe pavattibhāvappakāsanaṃ. Meti attappakāsanaṃ. Sutanti dhammappakāsanaṃ. Ayañhettha saṅkhepo – ‘‘nānappakārena ārammaṇe pavattāya viññāṇavīthiyā mayā na aññaṃ kataṃ, idaṃ pana kataṃ, ayaṃ dhammo suto’’ti.
同样,「evaṃ」指明所说之事;「me」指明补特伽罗;「sutaṃ」指明补特伽罗之所为。其意即为——「我将要开示的那部经,是我这样听闻的。」显示巴利原文
Tathā evanti niddisitabbappakāsanaṃ. Meti puggalappakāsanaṃ. Sutanti puggalakiccappakāsanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘yaṃ suttaṃ niddisissāmi, taṃ mayā evaṃ suta’’nti.
同样,「evaṃ」是对心相续——它以种种方式转起,执取种种义理与文句——的诸种方式的指明,因为「evaṃ」即是方式的安立。「me」是对作者的指明。「sutaṃ」是对境的指明。至此,凭借以种种方式转起的心相续,具足此相续者于作者与境上完成了执取的决定。显示巴利原文
Tathā evanti yassa cittasantānassa nānākārappavattiyā nānatthabyañjanagahaṇaṃ hoti, tassa nānākāraniddeso . Evanti hi ayaṃ ākārapaññatti. Meti kattuniddeso. Sutanti visayaniddeso. Ettāvatā nānākārappavattena cittasantānena taṃsamaṅgino kattuvisaye gahaṇasanniṭṭhānaṃ kataṃ hoti.
或者亦可如此理解:「evaṃ」是对补特伽罗作用的指明;「sutaṃ」是对识的作用的指明;「me」则是对兼具这两种作用的补特伽罗的指明。在此,略而言之:「此法,是被具足听闻作用之识的补特伽罗——即依于识而得『听闻』作用的称谓者——所听闻的。」显示巴利原文
Atha vā evanti puggalakiccaniddeso. Sutanti viññāṇakiccaniddeso. Meti ubhayakiccayuttapuggalaniddeso. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepo – ‘‘mayā savanakiccaviññāṇasamaṅginā puggalena viññāṇavasena laddhasavanakiccavohārena suta’’nti.
就此而言,从真实义、胜义谛的角度来看,“evam”与“me”是不存在的施设。因为在胜义上,又有什么可被指称为“evam”或“me”呢?而“sutaṃ”则是存在的施设,因为通过耳根所领受的法,在胜义上是存在的。同样地,“evam”与“me”是依此、他们而安立的依凭施设;“sutaṃ”则是通过与所见等的对照而安立的比对施设。显示巴利原文
Tattha evanti ca meti ca saccikaṭṭhaparamatthavasena avijjamānapaññatti. Kiñhettha taṃ paramatthato atthi, yaṃ evanti vā meti vā niddesaṃ labhetha. Sutanti vijjamānapaññatti. Yañhi taṃ ettha sotena upaladdhaṃ, taṃ paramatthato vijjamānanti. Tathā evanti ca meti ca taṃ taṃ upādāya vattabbato upādāpaññatti. Sutanti diṭṭhādīni upanidhāya vattabbato upanidhāpaññatti.
在此,“evam”一词表明了不迷乱,因为迷乱之人无法通达种种义理。而“sutaṃ”一词则表明对所闻之法的不忘失,若所闻之法忘失,此人过后便不会承认“这是我听闻的”。由此,因不迷乱而成就慧,因不忘失而成就念。其中,以慧为先导的念,有能力抉择文句;以念为先导的慧,有能力通达义理。由于兼具这两种能力,他便能守护具足义理与文句的法库,从而成就“法藏官”的身份。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca evanti vacanena asammohaṃ dīpeti. Na hi sammūḷho nānappakārapaṭivedhasamattho hoti. Sutanti vacanena sutassa asammosaṃ dīpeti. Yassa hi sutaṃ sammuṭṭhaṃ hoti, na so kālantarena mayā sutanti paṭijānāti. Iccassa asammohena paññāsiddhi, asammosena pana satisiddhi. Tattha paññāpubbaṅgamāya satiyā byañjanāvadhāraṇasamatthatā, satipubbaṅgamāya paññāya atthapaṭivedhasamatthatā . Tadubhayasamatthatāyogena atthabyañjanasampannassa dhammakosassa anupālanasamatthato dhammabhaṇḍāgārikattasiddhi.
另一种解释:“evam”一词表明如理作意,因为不如理作意之人,无法通达种种义理。“sutaṃ”一词则表明心不散乱,因为心散乱之人便无有听闻。确实,心散乱之人,即使对他宣说一切成就,他也会说“我没听到,请再说一遍”。在这里,如理作意成办自身的正誓愿与过去所行的福业,因为不如理誓愿、或过去未行福业之人,不可能有如理作意。不散乱之心,则成办对正法的听闻与对善士的亲近。因为心散乱者无法听闻,而若人不亲近善士,亦不可能有所听闻。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – evanti vacanena yoniso manasikāraṃ dīpeti, ayoniso manasikaroto hi nānappakārapaṭivedhābhāvato. Sutanti vacanena avikkhepaṃ dīpeti vikkhittacittassa savanābhāvato. Tathā hi vikkhittacitto puggalo sabbasampattiyā vuccamānopi ‘‘na mayā sutaṃ, puna bhaṇathā’’ti bhaṇati. Yoniso manasikārena cettha attasammāpaṇidhiṃ pubbe ca katapuññataṃ sādheti, sammā appaṇihitattassa pubbe akatapuññassa vā tadabhāvato. Avikkhepena saddhammassavanaṃ sappurisūpanissayañca sādheti. Na hi vikkhittacitto sotuṃ sakkoti, na ca sappurise anupanissayamānassa savanaṃ atthīti.
复有另一种解说:如上所言,“'evaṃ'是对彼心相续以种种方式转起、执取种种义理及文句的种种方式的说明”。然而,如此善美的行相,并非不如理誓愿者或过去未曾积集福德者所能拥有。因此,借着“evaṃ”这一善美行相,他显示了自己后两种轮的成就;借着“sutaṃ”与听闻相结合,则显示了前两种轮的成就。因为,若住在不适宜之处,或无善士可亲近,听闻即不会发生。如此,由于后两种轮成就,内心清净得以建立;由于前两种轮成就,加行清净得以建立。又因内心清净,成就了证悟上的通达;因加行清净,成就了教法上的通达。这样,一个加行与内心皆清净、教理与证悟皆具足的人,其所说之语,恰似曙光之于日出、如理作意之于善业,堪为世尊言教的前导。因此,在适当处安立起因,方才说出“如是我闻”等开篇之语。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – yasmā ‘‘evanti yassa cittasantānassa nānākārappavattiyā nānatthabyañjanaggahaṇaṃ hoti, tassa nānākāraniddeso’’ti vuttaṃ, so ca evaṃ bhaddako ākāro na sammā appaṇihitattano pubbe akatapuññassa vā hoti, tasmā evanti iminā bhaddakena ākārena pacchimacakkadvayasampattimattano dīpeti. Sutanti savanayogena purimacakkadvayasampattiṃ. Na hi appatirūpadese vasato sappurisūpanissayavirahitassa vā savanaṃ atthi. Iccassa pacchimacakkadvayasiddhiyā āsayasuddhi siddhā hoti, purimacakkadvayasiddhiyā payogasuddhi, tāya ca āsayasuddhiyā adhigamabyattisiddhi, payogasuddhiyā āgamabyattisiddhi. Iti payogāsayasuddhassa āgamādhigamasampannassa vacanaṃ aruṇuggaṃ viya sūriyassa udayato, yoniso manasikāro viya ca kusalakammassa, arahati bhagavato vacanassa pubbaṅgamaṃ bhavitunti ṭhāne nidānaṃ ṭhapento evaṃ me sutantiādimāha.
复有另一种解说:借着“evaṃ”这一显示种种通达的语词,他显示了自己成就义无碍解与辩无碍解;借着“sutaṃ”这一显示通达所闻差别的语词,显示了他成就法无碍解与词无碍解。当他说出“evaṃ”这一指明如理作意的语词时,即是在表明:“这些法,已被我以心善加审察、以正见如实通达。”当他说出“sutaṃ”这一指明与听闻相结合的语词时,即是在表明:“我多闻这些法,忆持这些法,并以言语反复熟练这些法。”由此两者,他显示了义理与文句的圆满,从而令人对听闻生起殷重心。因为,对于义理与文句皆圆满的法,若不带着殷重心去听闻,便会被隔绝于广大利益之外;是故,生起殷重心后,即应恭敬闻法。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – evanti iminā nānappakārapaṭivedhadīpakena vacanena attano atthapaṭibhānapaṭisambhidāsampattisabbhāvaṃ dīpeti. Sutanti iminā sotabbabhedapaṭivedhadīpakena dhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāsampattisabbhāvaṃ. Evanti ca idaṃ yoniso manasikāradīpakavacanaṃ bhāsamāno – ‘‘ete mayā dhammā manasānupekkhitā diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhā’’ti dīpeti. Sutanti idaṃ savanayogadīpakavacanaṃ bhāsamāno – ‘‘bahū mayā dhammā sutā dhātā vacasā paricitā’’ti dīpeti. Tadubhayenapi atthabyañjanapāripūriṃ dīpento savane ādaraṃ janeti. Atthabyañjanaparipuṇṇañhi dhammaṃ ādarena assuṇanto mahatā hitā paribāhiro hotīti ādaraṃ janetvā sakkaccaṃ dhammo sotabboti.
而通过“如是我闻”这整句话,阿难尊者未将如来所宣说的法归于自己,由此超越了非善士之地;他承认自己的声闻身份,由此进入了善士之地。同样,他令心从非法中出离,安住于正法。他表明:“这纯粹只是我之所闻,是彼世尊之语”,以此舍离对自我的执取,指明导师,归入胜者之教,并确立法的准则。显示巴利原文
Evaṃme sutanti iminā pana sakalena vacanena āyasmā ānando tathāgatappaveditaṃ dhammaṃ attano adahanto asappurisabhūmiṃ atikkamati, sāvakattaṃ paṭijānanto sappurisabhūmiṃ okkamati. Tathā asaddhammā cittaṃ vuṭṭhāpeti, saddhamme cittaṃ patiṭṭhāpeti. ‘‘Kevalaṃ sutamevetaṃ mayā, tasseva pana bhagavato vacana’’nti dīpento attānaṃ parimoceti, satthāraṃ apadisati, jinavacanaṃ appeti, dhammanettiṃ patiṭṭhāpeti.
再者,以‘如是我闻’这句话,他否认这是自己所创,进而开显前语,表明:“这是我当面从彼世尊处所领受的。世尊具备四无畏、无碍解智,拥有十力,安住于自信之处,能作狮子吼,是一切众生中之最上者,是法主、法王、法之依止、法灯、法之皈依处、最胜法轮转者,是正自觉者。对于此语中的义理、法义、文句、音节,不应有任何疑惑或犹豫。”如此,他消除了一切天与人对此法的疑惑,令他们于法成就净信。因此如是说:显示巴利原文
Apica ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’nti attanā uppāditabhāvaṃ appaṭijānanto purimavacanaṃ vivaranto – ‘‘sammukhā paṭiggahitamidaṃ mayā tassa bhagavato catuvesārajjavisāradassa dasabaladharassa āsabhaṭṭhānaṭṭhāyino sīhanādanādino sabbasattuttamassa dhammissarassa dhammarājassa dhammādhipatino dhammadīpassa dhammasaraṇassa saddhammavaracakkavattino sammāsambuddhassa vacanaṃ, na ettha atthe vā dhamme vā pade vā byañjane vā kaṅkhā vā vimati vā kattabbā’’ti sabbadevamanussānaṃ imasmiṃ dhamme assaddhiyaṃ vināseti, saddhāsampadaṃ uppādetīti. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
他令不信者于教法中灭除不信,令信者增长信心;
乔达摩的声闻弟子在说‘如是我闻’时,正是如此。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Vināsayati assaddhaṃ, saddhaṃ vaḍḍheti sāsane; Evaṃ me sutamiccevaṃ, vadaṃ gotamasāvako’’ti.
「一」是计数的限定说明。「时」是限定范围的说明。「一时」则是未作限定、不明确指出具体时间的表述。其中,「时」这个词——显示巴利原文
Ekanti gaṇanaparicchedaniddeso. Samayanti paricchinnaniddeso. Ekaṃ samayanti aniyamitaparidīpanaṃ. Tattha samayasaddo –
在集合、刹那、时间、聚集、原因、见解等含义中,都可见到。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Samavāye khaṇe kāle, samūhe hetudiṭṭhisu; Paṭilābhe pahāne ca, paṭivedhe ca dissati’’.
例如,在“或许明天我们也能把握时机,适时前往拜访”等这类经文中,“时”意指“会合”。在“诸比丘!确实唯有一刹那与一时机,是为修学梵行而存在”等经文中,它指“刹那”。在“酷热时节、燠热时节”等句中,它指“时节”。在“于大林中的大集会”等句中,它指“集会”。在“跋陀利!那时你未能领会那个时机:世尊正住在舍卫城,而世尊也将这样知道我——‘那位名叫跋陀利的比丘,在导师的教法中修行尚未圆满’。跋陀利!这便成了你未能领会的另一个时机”等经文中,它指“原因”。在“那时,游方者优伽诃摩那——沙门蒙地咖之子,穿着三叶衣,住在末利夫人园的单堂社里,以‘沙马亚巴瓦达咖’之见而著称”等经文中,它指“见解”。显示巴利原文
Tathā hissa ‘‘appeva nāma svepi upasaṅkameyyāma kālañca samayañca upādāyā’’ti evamādīsu (dī. ni. 1.447) samavāyo attho. ‘‘Ekova kho, bhikkhave, khaṇo ca samayo ca brahmacariyavāsāyā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.29) khaṇo. ‘‘Uṇhasamayo pariḷāhasamayo’’tiādīsu (pāci. 358) kālo. ‘‘Mahāsamayo pavanasmi’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.332) samūho. ‘‘Samayopi kho te, bhaddāli, appaṭividdho ahosi, bhagavā kho sāvatthiyaṃ viharati, bhagavāpi maṃ jānissati – ‘bhaddāli, nāma bhikkhu satthusāsane sikkhāya aparipūrakārī’ti. Ayampi kho te , bhaddāli, samayo appaṭividdho ahosī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.135) hetu. ‘‘Tena kho pana samayena uggāhamāno paribbājako samaṇamuṇḍikāputto samayappavādake tindukācīre ekasālake mallikāya ārāme paṭivasatī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.260) diṭṭhi.
“既关乎此世现前的利益,也关乎后世未来的利益;
「因为透彻地通达了义理,坚毅者就被称作智者。」(Atthābhisamayā dhīro, paṇḍitoti pavuccatī)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Diṭṭhe dhamme ca yo attho, yo cattho samparāyiko; Atthābhisamayā dhīro, paṇḍitoti pavuccatī’’ti. –
在“……等句中,abhisamaya 指‘获得’(paṭilābha);在‘sammā mānābhisamayā antamakāsi dukkhassā’等句中,指‘断除’(pahāna);在‘dukkhassa pīḷanaṭṭho saṅkhataṭṭho santāpaṭṭho vipariṇāmaṭṭho abhisamayaṭṭho’等句中,指‘通达’(paṭivedha)。然而,此处是指‘时’(kāla)。因此,以‘一时’表明:在年、季、月、半月、夜、日、上午、中午、下午、初夜、中夜、后夜、须臾等这些属于时间差别分类的时段中,选取某一个特定的时间。”},{显示巴利原文
Ādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.129) paṭilābho. ‘‘Sammā mānābhisamayā antamakāsi dukkhassā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.28) pahānaṃ. ‘‘Dukkhassa pīḷanaṭṭho saṅkhataṭṭho santāpaṭṭho vipariṇāmaṭṭho abhisamayaṭṭho’’tiādīsu (paṭi. ma. 2.8) paṭivedho. Idha panassa kālo attho. Tena saṃvacchara-utu-māsaḍḍhamāsa-ratti-diva-pubbaṇha-majjhanhika-sāyanha-paṭhamamajjhimapacchimayāma-muhuttādīsu kālappabhedabhūtesu samayesu ekaṃ samayanti dīpeti.
其中,虽然在这些年等时段中,无论哪一部经是在哪一年、哪一季、哪一月、哪半月、哪夜分或哪日分宣说的,长老都能凭智慧完全了知、完全确定。然而,如果说明成“如是我闻,在某年、在某季、在某月、在某半月、在某夜分、在某日分”,人们就不容易记住,也不容易诵出或教人诵出,而且还会变得很冗长。因此,他只用一词把那含义概括起来,说成“一时”。显示巴利原文
Tattha kiñcāpi etesu saṃvaccharādīsu samayesu yaṃ yaṃ suttaṃ yasmiṃ yasmiṃ saṃvacchare utumhi māse pakkhe rattibhāge divasabhāge vā vuttaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ therassa suviditaṃ suvavatthāpitaṃ paññāya. Yasmā pana ‘‘evaṃ me sutaṃ asukasaṃvacchare asukautumhi asukamāse asukapakkhe asukarattibhāge asukadivasabhāge vā’’ti evaṃ vutte na sakkā sukhena dhāretuṃ vā uddisituṃ vā uddisāpetuṃ vā, bahu ca vattabbaṃ hoti, tasmā ekeneva padena tamatthaṃ samodhānetvā ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti āha.
再者,世尊在人间与天界中极为显著、具有多种时间差别的那些时——如入胎时、诞生时、生起警惧时、出家时、修苦行时、降魔时、正觉时、现法乐住时、说法时、般涅槃时等。在这些时中,此处所指的是‘说法时’。而且,在智作用时与悲作用时之中,这是悲作用时;在自利行道时与利他行道时之中,这是利他行道时;在集会众应作的二事之中,这是说法时;在说法时与修行时之中,这是说法时。从这些时中,于某一特定之时而说‘一时’。显示巴利原文
Ye vā ime gabbhokkantisamayo jātisamayo saṃvegasamayo abhinikkhamanasamayo dukkarakārikasamayo māravijayasamayo abhisambodhisamayo diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārasamayo desanāsamayo parinibbānasamayoti evamādayo bhagavato devamanussesu ativiya suppakāsā anekakālappabhedā eva samayā. Tesu samayesu desanāsamayasaṅkhātaṃ ekaṃ samayanti dīpeti. Yo cāyaṃ ñāṇakaruṇākiccasamayesu karuṇākiccasamayo, attahitaparahitapaṭipattisamayesu parahitapaṭipattisamayo , sannipatitānaṃ karaṇīyadvayasamayesu dhammikathāsamayo, desanāpaṭipattisamayesu desanāsamayo, tesupi samayesu aññataraṃ sandhāya ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti āha.
那么,为何这里不像在阿毗达摩中用依格“yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacara”表示,不像其他经文处用依格“yasmiṃ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi”表示,也不像律藏中用工具格“tena samayena buddho bhagavā”表示,却用宾格“ekaṃ samayaṃ”来表示呢?因为彼处皆有相应的含义,而此处另含他义。阿毗达摩及那些经文中存在“所依义”与“由状态显状态相之义”。“samaya”一词有“所依”义,即“时”义和“集会”义。在那里,所说的触等诸法,正是凭借那名为“刹那集会之因”的“时”之状态,来彰显其自相。因此,为了彰显彼义,彼处便使用了依格。显示巴利原文
Kasmā panettha yathā abhidhamme ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacara’’nti ca ito aññesu suttapadesu ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehī’’ti ca bhummavacanena niddeso kato, vinaye ca ‘‘tena samayena buddho bhagavā’’ti karaṇavacanena, tathā akatvā ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti upayogavacanena niddeso katoti. Tattha tathā, idha ca aññathā atthasambhavato. Tattha hi abhidhamme ito aññesu suttapadesu ca adhikaraṇattho bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇattho ca sambhavati. Adhikaraṇañhi kālattho samūhattho ca samayo, tattha vuttānaṃ phassādidhammānaṃ khaṇasamavāyahetusaṅkhātassa ca samayassa bhāvena tesaṃ bhāvo lakkhīyati. Tasmā tadatthajotanatthaṃ tattha bhummavacananiddeso kato.
而律藏中,则有“因义”与“工具义”存在。因为那制戒之时,即使如舍利弗等也难以了知。世尊便以彼时为因、以彼时为工具,为制立学处并观察制戒之因,而住于各处。因此,为了彰显彼义,律藏中便使用了工具格。显示巴利原文
Vinaye ca hetuattho karaṇattho ca sambhavati. Yo hi so sikkhāpadapaññattisamayo sāriputtādīhipi dubbiññeyyo, tena samayena hetubhūtena karaṇabhūtena ca sikkhāpadāni paññāpayanto sikkhāpadapaññattihetuñca apekkhamāno bhagavā tattha tattha vihāsi. Tasmā tadatthajotanatthaṃ tattha karaṇavacanena niddeso kato.
然而,在此处以及同类情形中,则有“纯粹相属”之义存在。因为世尊在宣说此经或他经的那个时刻,乃全然安住于悲住之中。因此,为了彰显彼义,此处便使用了宾格。显示巴利原文
Idha pana aññasmiṃ ca evaṃjātike accantasaṃyogattho sambhavati. Yañhi samayaṃ bhagavā imaṃ aññaṃ vā suttantaṃ desesi, accantameva taṃ samayaṃ karuṇāvihārena vihāsi. Tasmā tadatthajotanatthaṃ idha upayogavacananiddeso katoti.
因此,这样说:显示巴利原文
Tenetaṃ vuccati –
“考虑到种种含义,‘时’在别处以依格和工具格表示,在此处则以宾格。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Taṃ taṃ atthamapekkhitvā, bhummena karaṇena ca; Aññatra samayo vutto, upayogena so idhā’’ti.
然而,古师们解释说:“‘tasmiṃ samaye’‘tena samayena’或‘ekaṃ samayaṃ’这些说法,仅是言辞上的差别,在任何情况下,其意义皆是依格。因此,即便说为‘ekaṃ samayaṃ’,也应当理解作‘ekasmiṃ samaye’的意义。”显示巴利原文
Porāṇā pana vaṇṇayanti – ‘‘tasmiṃ samaye’’ti vā ‘‘tena samayenā’’ti vā ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti vā abhilāpamattabhedo esa, sabbattha bhummameva atthoti. Tasmā ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti vuttepi ‘‘ekasmiṃ samaye’’ti attho veditabbo.
“Bhagavā”意为尊贵者。因为在世间,人们称尊贵者为“bhagavā”。而这位世尊由于具足一切功德、最为殊胜,是一切有情的无上尊贵者,因此应知为“Bhagavā”。古师们也曾说:显示巴利原文
Bhagavāti garu. Garuṃ hi loke ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vadanti. Ayañca sabbaguṇavisiṭṭhatāya sabbasattānaṃ garu, tasmā ‘‘bhagavā’’ti veditabbo. Porāṇehipi vuttaṃ –
‘世尊(Bhagavā)一词最殊胜,世尊一词最无上;
他具足尊贵、值得恭敬,以此故称世尊。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Bhagavāti vacanaṃ seṭṭhaṃ, bhagavāti vacanamuttamaṃ; Garu gāravayutto so, bhagavā tena vuccatī’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.142);
具足吉祥,具足摧破,具足相应,具足诸分;
具足受供养,已离诸行,于诸有中为世尊,故称世尊。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Bhagyavā bhaggavā yutto, bhagehi ca vibhattavā; Bhattavā vantagamano, bhavesu bhagavā tato’’ti. –
应依此偈颂,详细了知此词之义。其详释已载于《清净道论》(1.144)的佛随念论中。显示巴利原文
Imissā gāthāya vasenassa padassa vitthārato attho veditabbo. So ca visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.144) buddhānussatiniddese vuttoyeva.
至此,以“如是我闻”一语,显示所闻之法,令世尊的法身现前。由此安慰那些因不能亲见导师而心生厌倦的人:“这并非导师灭度后所留的教法,这法就是你们的导师。”以“一时,世尊”一语,显示彼时世尊已不现前,以此证明色身的般涅槃。以此警醒那些耽著于寿命骄慢的人:“如此教导圣法、具足十力、身如金刚聚合的世尊,尚且入般涅槃,我等又怎能对生命存有希望呢?”并激发他对正法的精进。其中,“如是”指示说法成就,“我闻”指示声闻成就,“一时”指示时成就,“世尊”指示说法者成就。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā cettha evaṃ me sutanti vacanena yathāsutaṃ dhammaṃ dassento bhagavato dhammasarīraṃ paccakkhaṃ karoti. Tena ‘‘nayidaṃ atikkantasatthukaṃ pāvacanaṃ, ayaṃ vo satthā’’ti satthu adassanena ukkaṇṭhitaṃ janaṃ samassāseti. Ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavāti vacanena tasmiṃ samaye bhagavato avijjamānabhāvaṃ dassento rūpakāyaparinibbānaṃ sādheti. Tena ‘‘evaṃvidhassa nāma ariyadhammassa desako dasabaladharo vajirasaṅghātasamānakāyo sopi bhagavā parinibbuto, kena aññena jīvite āsā janetabbā’’ti jīvitamadamattaṃ janaṃ saṃvejeti, saddhamme cassa ussāhaṃ janeti. Evanti ca bhaṇanto desanāsampattiṃ niddisati. Me sutanti sāvakasampattiṃ. Ekaṃ samayanti kālasampattiṃ. Bhagavāti desakasampattiṃ.
“在舍卫城”:指在那座名为舍卫城的城市中。此处的“舍卫城”是表示邻近的处格。“住”:是通称,表明具备天住、梵住、圣住等诸住中的某一种威仪。而在这里,则特指在行、住、坐、卧四种威仪中,与某一种威仪相应。因此,无论是站着、走着、坐着还是躺卧,世尊都可理解为“住”。因为他以一种威仪来中止前一种威仪所带来的疲劳,使身体保持不散乱而持续运转,所以称为“住”。显示巴利原文
Sāvatthiyanti evaṃnāmake nagare. Samīpatthe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ. Viharatīti avisesena iriyāpathadibbabrahmaariyavihāresu aññataravihārasamaṅgīparidīpanametaṃ. Idha pana ṭhānagamananisajjāsayanappabhedesu iriyāpathesu aññatarairiyāpathasamāyogaparidīpanaṃ , tena ṭhitopi gacchantopi nisinnopi sayānopi bhagavā viharaticceva veditabbo. So hi ekaṃ iriyāpathabādhanaṃ aññena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā aparipatantaṃ attabhāvaṃ harati pavatteti, tasmā ‘‘viharatī’’ti vuccati.
“在祇园”:指在祇陀王子的树林中。因为那片树林是由他种植、培育并守护的,所以称为“祇园”。在祇园中。“在给孤独园”:指在那个由给孤独居士布施了五十四亿金钱,奉献给以佛陀为首的比丘僧团,因而得名“给孤独园”的园林中。这是简要说明,详细的解释可参见《破除犹豫》(中部注)的《一切漏经注释》。显示巴利原文
Jetavaneti jetassa rājakumārassa vane. Tañhi tena ropitaṃ saṃvaḍḍhitaṃ paripālitaṃ ahosi, tasmā ‘‘jetavana’’nti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ. Tasmiṃ jetavane. Anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāmeti anāthapiṇḍikena gahapatinā catupaññāsahiraññakoṭipariccāgena buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa niyyātitattā ‘‘anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāmo’’ti saṅkhaṃ gate ārāme. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana papañcasūdaniyā majjhimaṭṭhakathāya sabbāsavasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.14) vutto.
有人或许会问:如果世尊住在舍卫城,就不应该说“在祇园”;如果住在祇园,就不应该说“在舍卫城”。因为不可能在同一时间住于两处。然而,不应如此理解。显示巴利原文
Tattha siyā – yadi tāva bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati, ‘‘jetavane’’ti na vattabbaṃ. Atha tattha viharati, ‘‘sāvatthiya’’nti na vattabbaṃ. Na hi sakkā ubhayattha ekaṃ samayaṃ viharitunti. Na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
难道我们没有说过,“舍卫城”用的是表示邻近的处格吗?因此,正如在恒河、耶牟那河附近活动的牛群,被称为“在恒河活动,在耶牟那河活动”,这里也是如此:祇园位于舍卫城附近,世尊在那里安住,故说“住在舍卫城祇园”。之所以提及舍卫城,是为了指明行境村落;而后面的部分,则是为了指明适合出家人居住的住所。显示巴利原文
Nanu avocumha ‘‘samīpatthe bhummavacana’’nti. Tasmā yathā gaṅgāyamunādīnaṃ samīpe goyūthāni carantāni ‘‘gaṅgāyaṃ caranti, yamunāyaṃ carantī’’ti vuccati, evamidhāpi yadidaṃ sāvatthiyā samīpe jetavanaṃ, tattha viharanto vuccati ‘‘sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane’’ti. Gocaragāmanidassanatthaṃ hissa sāvatthivacanaṃ, pabbajitānurūpanivāsaṭṭhānanidassanatthaṃ sesavacanaṃ.
“一位天神”:意谓就名字与种姓而言不为人知的一位天神。然而,在“尊者!世尊是否记得,曾为某位知名、具有大威力的夜叉简要开示了灭尽爱欲的解脱?”这句话中,即便是身为天主的帝释天,也被称为“某位”。而“天神”一词,是天神与天女的通称。在此处,它指的是一位天神,且属于色界天中的某一位。显示巴利原文
Aññatarā devatāti nāmagottavasena apākaṭā ekā devatāti attho. ‘‘Abhijānāti no, bhante, bhagavā ahu ñātaññatarassa mahesakkhassa yakkhassa saṃkhittena taṇhāsaṅkhayavimuttiṃ bhāsitā’’ti ettha pana abhiññāto sakkopi devarājā ‘‘aññataro’’ti vutto. ‘‘Devatā’’ti ca idaṃ devānampi devadhītānampi sādhāraṇavacanaṃ. Imasmiṃ panatthe devo adhippeto, so ca kho rūpāvacarānaṃ devānaṃ aññataro.
“在深夜”这一表达中,“abhikkanta”一词有耗尽、美好、美丽、随喜等多种意思。例如,在“尊者!夜已深,初夜分已过,比丘僧团久坐于此,请世尊为比丘们诵别解脱戒”(《增支部》8.20;《小品》383)这类句子中,它表示“耗尽”。而在“此人是这四种人中最为殊胜、最为微妙者”(《增支部》4.100)等句子中,它则表示“美好”。显示巴利原文
Abhikkantāya rattiyāti ettha abhikkanta-saddo khayasundarābhirūpaabbhānumodanādīsu dissati . Tattha ‘‘abhikkantā, bhante, ratti, nikkhanto paṭhamo yāmo , ciranisinno bhikkhusaṅgho, uddisatu, bhante, bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ pātimokkha’’nti evamādīsu (a. ni. 8.20; cūḷava. 383) khaye dissati. ‘‘Ayaṃ imesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā’’ti evamādīsu (a. ni. 4.100) sundare.
是谁以神通与名声而闪耀,礼敬我足,
以殊胜的容貌普照一切方向?
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ko me vandati pādāni, iddhiyā yasasā jalaṃ; Abhikkantena vaṇṇena, sabbā obhāsayaṃ disā’’ti. –
在诸如“谁礼敬我足,以神通和名声闪耀,以殊胜的光彩,照亮一切方向?”(《维曼纳瓦特》857)这些例子中,表示“美丽”。在诸如“太殊胜了,乔达摩!太殊胜了,乔达摩!”(《波罗夷》15)这些例子中,表示“随喜”。而在这里,它是指“耗尽”。所以,“夜已深”也就是说“当夜已将尽”。应该知道,这位天子是在中夜分刚过时到来的。因为据说诸天有这样的惯例:他们凡是来亲近佛陀或佛弟子,必定是在中夜分刚过之时才来。显示巴利原文
Evamādīsu (vi. va. 857) abhirūpe. ‘‘Abhikkantaṃ bho gotama, abhikkantaṃ bho gotamā’’ti evamādīsu (pārā. 15) abbhānumodane. Idha pana khaye. Tena abhikkantāya rattiyā, parikkhīṇāya rattiyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tatthāyaṃ devaputto majjhimayāmasamanantare āgatoti veditabbo. Niyāmo hi kiresa devatānaṃ yadidaṃ buddhānaṃ vā buddhasāvakānaṃ vā upaṭṭhānaṃ āgacchantā majjhimayāmasamanantareyeva āgacchanti.
“abhikkantavaṇṇā”(容色殊妙)这一复合词中,“abhikkanta”一词在此处是“美丽”的意思,而“vaṇṇa”一词则有肤色、赞叹、族姓阶层、原因、形状、量度、色处等多种含义。例如“世尊具有金色之身”(《经集》553)等处,是指肤色;“居士,你这些沙门的功德,是何时汇集起来的呢?”(《中部》2.77)等处,是指赞叹;“乔达摩尊者,有四种姓”(《长部》3.115)等处,是指族姓阶层;“那么,是什么原因而被称为香身呢?”(《相应部》1.234)等处,是指原因;“化现出巨大的象王形相”(《相应部》1.138)等处,是指形状;“钵有三种量度”(《律藏·波罗夷》602)等处,是指尺寸;在“色、香、味、食素”等处,则是指色处。而在此处,应理解为肤色。因此,“abhikkantavaṇṇā”即是指肤色极美、容色可意、光彩悦目。诸天神来到人间时,会舍弃自己原本的肤色与神通,化作粗重的身体,显现出更为殊胜的肤色与神通,就如同前去观戏的人精心装扮自身一般。其中,欲界的显示巴利原文
Abhikkantavaṇṇāti idha abhikkanta-saddo abhirūpe, vaṇṇa-saddo pana chavithuti-kulavagga-kāraṇa-saṇṭhānappamāṇa-rūpāyatanādīsu dissati. Tattha ‘‘suvaṇṇavaṇṇosi bhagavā’’ti evamādīsu (su. ni. 553) chaviyā. ‘‘Kadā saññūḷhā pana te, gahapati, ime samaṇassa vaṇṇā’’ti evamādīsu (ma. ni. 2.77) thutiyaṃ. ‘‘Cattārome, bho gotama, vaṇṇā’’ti evamādīsu (dī. ni. 3.115) kulavagge. ‘‘Atha kena nu vaṇṇena, gandhathenoti vuccatī’’ti evamādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.234) kāraṇe. ‘‘Mahantaṃ hatthirājavaṇṇaṃ abhinimminitvā’’ti evamādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.138) saṇṭhāne. ‘‘Tayo pattassa vaṇṇā’’ti evamādīsu (pārā. 602) pamāṇe. ‘‘Vaṇṇo gandho raso ojā’’ti evamādīsu rūpāyatane. So idha chaviyā daṭṭhabbo. Tena abhikkantavaṇṇā abhirūpacchavi, iṭṭhavaṇṇā manāpavaṇṇāti vuttaṃ hoti. Devatā hi manussalokaṃ āgacchamānā pakativaṇṇaṃ pakatiiddhiṃ jahitvā oḷārikaṃ attabhāvaṃ katvā atirekavaṇṇaṃ atirekaiddhiṃ māpetvā naṭasamajjādīni gacchantā manussā viya abhisaṅkhatena kāyena āgacchanti. Tattha kāmāvacarā anabhisaṅkhatenapi āgantuṃ sakkonti, rūpāvacarā pana na sakkonti. Tesañhi atisukhumo attabhāvo, na tena iriyāpathakappanaṃ hoti. Tasmā ayaṃ devaputto abhisaṅkhateneva āgato. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘abhikkantavaṇṇā’’ti.
“kevalakappaṃ”(全遍)这一复合词中,“kevala”一词有无余、多数、不杂、不越、坚固、离系等多种含义。例如在“完全圆满清净的梵行”(《律藏·波罗夷》1)等句中,表示“无余”义;在“全羯陵伽与摩揭陀人,携着大量硬食软食前来”(《大品》43)等句中,表示“多数”义;在“纯是苦蕴的集起”(《分别论》225)等句中,表示“不杂”义;在“这位具寿大概只是出于信心而已”(《大品》244)等句中,表示“不越”义;在“尊者,阿那律具寿的同住比丘巴希耶,坚定地致力于分裂僧团”(《增支部》4.243)等句中,表示“坚固”义;在“被称为全离者、住于圆满者、最上士”(《相应部》3.57)等句中,表示“离系”义。而在此处,采用的是“无余”义。显示巴利原文
Kevalakappanti ettha kevala-saddo anavasesa-yebhuyyābyāmissānatirekadaḷhatthavisaṃyogādianekattho. Tathā hissa ‘‘kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ parisuddhaṃ brahmacariya’’nti evamādīsu (pārā. 1) anavasesatthamattho. ‘‘Kevalakappā ca aṅgamagadhā pahūtaṃ khādanīyabhojanīyaṃ ādāya upasaṅkamissantī’’ti evamādīsu (mahāva. 43) yebhuyyatā. ‘‘Kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hotī’’ti evamādīsu (vibha. 225) abyāmissatā. ‘‘Kevalaṃ saddhāmattakaṃ nūna ayamāyasmā’’ti evamādīsu (mahāva. 244) anatirekatā. ‘‘Āyasmato, bhante, anuruddhassa bāhiyo nāma saddhivihāriko kevalakappaṃ saṅghabhedāya ṭhito’’ti evamādīsu (a. ni. 4.243) daḷhatthatā. ‘‘Kevalī vusitavā uttamapurisoti vuccatī’’ti evamādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.57) visaṃyogo attho. Idha panassa anavasesattho adhippeto.
而“kappa”一词,则有信解、称说、时间、施设、裁截、分别、极少、周遍等多种含义。例如在“乔达摩尊者所言,应如其为阿拉汉、正自觉者那般,为人所信解”(《中部》1.387)等句中,表示“信解”义;在“诸比丘,我允许用五种沙门的方式享用果实”(《小品》250)等句中,表示“称说”义;在“我常恒地如此安住”(《中部》1.387)等句中,表示“时间”义;在“这位具寿名为劫波”等句中,表示“施设”义;在“修剪须发”(《律藏》1094, 1101)等句中,表示“裁截”义;在“允许二指量的分别”(《小品》446)等句中,表示“分别”义;在“有极少的机会可以躺下”(《增支部》8.80)等句中,表示“极少”义;在“周遍地照耀全竹林”(《相应部》1.94)等句中,表示“周遍”义。而在此处,采用的是“周遍”义。因此,“kevalakappaṃ jetavanaṃ”(全祇园)这一句,应理解为:“周遍无余地遍满周边的祇园”。显示巴利原文
Kappa-saddo panāyaṃ abhisaddahana-vohāra-kāla-paññatti-chedana-vikappa-lesasamantabhāvādianekattho. Tathā hissa ‘‘okappaniyametaṃ bhoto gotamassa, yathā taṃ arahato sammāsambuddhassā’’ti evamādīsu (ma. ni. 1.387) abhisaddahanamattho. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pañcahi samaṇakappehi phalaṃ paribhuñjitu’’nti evamādīsu (cūḷava. 250) vohāro. ‘‘Yena sudaṃ niccakappaṃ viharāmī’’ti evamādīsu (ma. ni. 1.387) kālo. ‘‘Iccāyasmā kappo’’ti evamādīsu paññatti. ‘‘Alaṅkato kappitakesamassū’’ti evamādīsu (vi. va. 1094, 1101) chedanaṃ. ‘‘Kappati dvaṅgulakappo’’ti evamādīsu (cūḷava. 446) vikappo. ‘‘Ātthi kappo nipajjitu’’nti evamādīsu (a. ni. 8.80) leso. ‘‘Kevalakappaṃ veḷuvanaṃ obhāsetvā’’ti evamādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.94) samantabhāvo. Idha panassa samantabhāvattho adhippeto. Tasmā kevalakappaṃ jetavananti ettha ‘‘anavasesaṃ samantato jetavana’’nti evamattho daṭṭhabbo.
“obhāsetvā”(照耀)的意思是:以衣饰、容颜与身体所发出的光明,遍满一切,犹如日月,令一切成为一片光明、一片闪耀。显示巴利原文
Obhāsetvāti vatthālaṅkārasarīrasamuṭṭhitāya ābhāya pharitvā, candimā viya sūriyo viya ca ekobhāsaṃ ekapajjotaṃ karitvāti attho.
“Yena”(此处为表示处所的具格)一词,在“Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami”中,应这样理解其含义:“于世尊所在之处,他前往那里”。或者也可理解为:“他以世尊值得人天亲近的那种原因而前往”。世尊因何原因值得亲近呢?因为众生怀着想证得种种殊胜功德、享受殊胜果报的愿望,犹如鸟儿总是飞往果实累累的大树一样。“Upasaṅkami”(前往),即“已经去到”。“Upasaṅkamitvā”(前往后),表示到达动作的完成。或者说,这样前往之后,他又走到更靠近世尊、称为“近边”的位置。显示巴利原文
Yenāti bhummatthe karaṇavacanaṃ. Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti tasmā ‘‘yattha bhagavā, tattha upasaṅkamī’’ti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Yena vā kāraṇena bhagavā devamanussehi upasaṅkamitabbo, tena kāraṇena upasaṅkamīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Kena ca kāraṇena bhagavā upasaṅkamitabbo? Nānappakāraguṇavisesādhigamādhippāyena, sāduphalūpabhogādhippāyena dijagaṇehi niccaphalitamahārukkho viya. Upasaṅkamīti ca gatāti vuttaṃ hoti. Upasaṅkamitvāti upasaṅkamanapariyosānadīpanaṃ. Atha vā evaṃ gatā tato āsannataraṃ ṭhānaṃ bhagavato samīpasaṅkhātaṃ gantvātipi vuttaṃ hoti.
随后,那位天神为了询问自己来到世间最上士跟前亲近的缘由,将十指并拢、闪耀光泽的合掌置于头顶,立于一旁。“Ekamantaṃ”(于一边),是一个表示状态的抽象名词,如同“日月不均等地运行”(《增支部》4.70)等句的用法。因此,应当这样理解其含义:“她以那样的方式站立,从而成就了所谓‘立于一旁’的站姿。”或者,这是用业格来表示处格的含义。“Aṭṭhāsi”(站立),即做出站立的姿态。凡有智慧的天神或人,在前往应受尊敬者的处所后,由于熟知座次礼仪,都会立于一旁。这位天神也是如此,因此她立于一旁。显示巴利原文
Idāni yenatthena loke aggapuggalassa upaṭṭhānaṃ āgatā, taṃ pucchitukāmā dasanakhasamodhānasamujjalaṃ añjuliṃ sirasi patiṭṭhapetvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantanti bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso – ‘‘visamaṃ candimasūriyā parivattantī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.70) viya. Tasmā yathā ṭhitā ekamantaṃ ṭhitā hoti, tathā aṭṭhāsīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Bhummatthe vā etaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Aṭṭhāsīti ṭhānaṃ kappesi. Paṇḍitā hi devamanussā garuṭṭhāniyaṃ upasaṅkamitvā āsanakusalatāya ekamantaṃ tiṭṭhanti, ayañca devo tesaṃ aññataro, tasmā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi.
那么,如何站立才算是“立于一面”呢?应当避开六种位置上的过失。这六种是:过远、过近、上风处、高处、正对面、正后方。若立得过远,想要说话时便须高声;若立得过近,则会造成身体碰触;若立于上风处,身中的气味会熏恼对方;若立在高处,则显露不恭敬的态度;若立在正对面,想要对视时,眼光便不得不直接与对方相接;若立在正后方,想要回望时,便不得不伸颈张望。因此,这位天人也避开了这六种位置上的过失而安立,所以经文才记作“立于一面”。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ ṭhito pana ekamantaṃ ṭhito hotīti? Cha ṭhānadose vajjetvā. Seyyathidaṃ – atidūraṃ, accāsannaṃ, uparivātaṃ , unnatappadesaṃ, atisammukhaṃ, atipacchāti. Atidūre ṭhito hi sace kathetukāmo hoti, uccāsaddena kathetabbaṃ hoti. Accāsanne ṭhito saṅghaṭṭanaṃ karoti. Uparivāte ṭhito sarīragandhena bādhati. Unnatappadese ṭhito agāravaṃ pakāseti. Atisammukhā ṭhito sace daṭṭhukāmo hoti, cakkhunā cakkhuṃ āhacca daṭṭhabbaṃ hoti. Atipacchā ṭhito sace daṭṭhukāmo hoti, gīvaṃ pasāretvā daṭṭhabbaṃ hoti. Tasmā ayampi ete cha ṭhānadose vajjetvā aṭṭhāsi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsī’’ti.
“说了这话”即指她说了这番话。“究竟如何”是询问原因。因为世尊已度脱瀑流一事,在十千世界界中已是众所周知,所以这位天女对此并无疑惑。然而,她并不知道世尊是依何缘由而被称为“已度脱者”,因此她为了询问那个原因,才这样问道。显示巴利原文
Etadavocāti etaṃ avoca. Kathaṃ nūti kāraṇapucchā. Bhagavato hi tiṇṇoghabhāvo dasasahassilokadhātuyā pākaṭo, tenimissā devatāya tattha kaṅkhā natthi, iminā pana kāraṇena ‘‘tiṇṇo’’ti na jānāti, tena sā taṃ kāraṇaṃ pucchamānā evamāha.
“贤友”是天神间表达亲切的称呼用词,本意是“无苦者”。如果这样理解,那便与“贤友,当桩与桩在你心脏处相撞时,那时你将了知:‘我在地狱中被煎熬了千年’”这句经文相违。因为地狱有情绝不可能是无苦的。虽然他们并非无苦,但这只是依循约定俗成的惯用语来称呼的。据说,在最初劫初之时,人们原本无苦而充满快乐,那时便有了这个称呼;后来到了后世,不论有苦还是无苦,出于言语习惯,这个称呼仍被沿用,这就好比一处既无莲花也无水的池塘,人们依然习惯称它为“池塘”一样。显示巴利原文
Mārisāti devatānaṃ piyasamudācāravacanametaṃ. Niddukkhāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘yadā kho te, mārisa, saṅkunā saṅku hadaye samāgaccheyya, atha naṃ tvaṃ jāneyyāsi ‘vassasahassaṃ me niraye paccamānassā’’’ti (ma. ni. 1.512) idaṃ virujjhati. Na hi nerayikasatto niddukkho nāma hoti. Kiñcāpi na niddukkho, ruḷhīsaddena pana evaṃ vuccati. Pubbe kira paṭhamakappikānaṃ niddukkhānaṃ sukhasamappitānaṃ esa vohāro, aparabhāge dukkhaṃ hotu vā mā vā, ruḷhīsaddena ayaṃ vohāro vuccateva nippadumāpi nirudakāpi vā pokkharaṇī pokkharaṇī viya.
在「度脱瀑流」(Oghamatarī)一词中,瀑流共有四种:欲瀑流、有瀑流、见瀑流、无明瀑流。其中,对五种欲乐对象所起的欲贪,名为欲瀑流;对色界、无色界生存地所起的欲贪以及对禅那的喜着,名为有瀑流;六十二种邪见,名为见瀑流;对四圣谛的无知,名为无明瀑流。于此,欲瀑流生起于八种与贪俱起的心识中;有瀑流生起于四种不与邪见相应的贪俱心识中;见瀑流生起于四种与邪见相应的心识中;无明瀑流则生起于一切不善心中。显示巴利原文
Oghamatarīti ettha cattāro oghā, kāmogho bhavogho diṭṭhogho avijjoghoti. Tattha pañcasu kāmaguṇesu chandarāgo kāmogho nāma. Rūpārūpabhavesu chandarāgo jhānanikanti ca bhavogho nāma. Dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo diṭṭhogho nāma. Catūsu saccesu aññāṇaṃ avijjogho nāma. Tattha kāmogho aṭṭhasu lobhasahagatesu cittuppādesu uppajjati, bhavogho catūsu diṭṭhigatavippayuttalobhasahagatesu cittuppādesu uppajjati, diṭṭhogho catūsu diṭṭhigatasampayuttesu cittuppādesu uppajjati, avijjogho sabbākusalesu uppajjati.
而且,这所有的瀑流,由于兼具「冲走」之义与「堆聚」之义,故应被理解为「瀑流」。「冲走」之义,即向下牵引、令其沉没之义。此瀑流会将随己所欲的众生向下拖拽,令他们只能投生地狱等恶趣;又或障碍他们向上达至涅槃,而令其在三有、四生、五道、七识住、九众生居中流转,此即其义。至于「堆聚」之义,即广大之义。因为此烦恼之堆聚确实极为浩大,它从无间地狱开始,一直向上遍满、扩展至有顶天,这说的即是对五种欲乐的贪染。对其余诸瀑流,也同此理。故从堆聚之义而言,这亦是瀑流。而「已度越」(atarī)这一句,意即问:「贤友,您是以何因由度越此四瀑流的呢?」显示巴利原文
Sabbopi cesa avahananaṭṭhena rāsaṭṭhena ca oghoti veditabbo. Avahananaṭṭhenāti adhogamanaṭṭhena. Ayañhi attano vasaṃ gate satte adho gameti, nirayādibhedāya duggatiyaṃyeva nibbatteti, uparibhāvaṃ vā nibbānaṃ gantuṃ adento adho tīsu bhavesu catūsu yonīsu pañcasu gatīsu sattasu viññāṇaṭṭhitīsu navasu sattāvāsesu ca gametītipi attho. Rāsaṭṭhenāti mahantaṭṭhena. Mahā heso kilesarāsi avīcito paṭṭhāya yāva bhavaggā patthaṭo, yadidaṃ pañcasu kāmaguṇesu chandarāgo nāma. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Evamayaṃ rāsaṭṭhenāpi oghoti veditabbo. Atarīti imaṃ catubbidhampi oghaṃ kena nu tvaṃ, mārisa, kāraṇena tiṇṇoti pucchati.
那时,世尊为了解答她的问题,便说起了「我实不立住、不挣扎……」的开示。此处「不立住」即不停止、不固定之意;「不挣扎」即不奋力向前游进,也就是不刻意用功之意。世尊如此将答案以隐秘、含蓄的方式作了开示。那位天神听后,心中便生出疑念:「通常,那些度越外在瀑流的人,都是要站在该站之处,在该奋力游进之处努力向前,方得度越;而这一位却说,对于这从无间地狱直到有顶天周遍弥漫的烦恼瀑流、烦恼堆积,我是不立住、不挣扎便度越了。这究竟是怎么回事?又是如何做到的?」她陷入疑网之中,未能领会世尊这段开示的含义。显示巴利原文
Athassā bhagavā pañhaṃ vissajjento appatiṭṭhaṃ khvāhantiādimāha. Tattha appatiṭṭhanti appatiṭṭhahanto. Anāyūhanti anāyūhanto, avāyamantoti attho. Iti bhagavā gūḷhaṃ paṭicchannaṃ katvā pañhaṃ kathesi. Devatāpi naṃ sutvā ‘‘bāhirakaṃ tāva oghaṃ tarantā nāma ṭhātabbaṭṭhāne tiṭṭhantā taritabbaṭṭhāne āyūhantā taranti, ayaṃ pana avīcito yāva bhavaggā patthaṭaṃ kilesoghaṃ kilesarāsiṃ appatiṭṭhahanto anāyūhanto atarinti āha. Kiṃ nu kho etaṃ? Kathaṃ nu kho eta’’nti? Vimatiṃ pakkhantā pañhassa atthaṃ na aññāsi.
难道世尊是为了让众生如是不解,才圆满诸波罗蜜、证得一切知智的吗?并非为此而证得。实际上,世尊有两种教说——「以折伏为方式」和「以摄受为方式」。其中,对于那些自认为有智慧、对不懂的事也自以为懂的人,就像那五百位婆罗门出家众一样,世尊为了折伏他们的慢心,就如《根本法门经》等那样,为他们开示无法理解的法。这就叫做「以折伏为方式」的教说。对此也曾有这样的话:‘阿难,我通过折伏来宣讲,通过斥退来宣讲,真正有价值的东西才会确立。’ 而对于那些正直、愿意修学的人,世尊则令法易解,如同《期望经》那样去开示,并且这样安慰他们:‘帝沙,你要欢喜!帝沙,你要欢喜!我有教诫,我有摄受,我有教导!’ 这就叫做「以摄受为方式」的教说。显示巴利原文
Kiṃ pana bhagavatā yathā sattā na jānanti, evaṃ kathanatthāya pāramiyo pūretvā sabbaññutā paṭividdhāti? Na etadatthāya paṭividdhā. Dve pana bhagavato desanā niggahamukhena ca anuggahamukhena ca. Tattha ye paṇḍitamānino honti aññātepi ñātasaññino pañcasatā brāhmaṇapabbajitā viya, tesaṃ mānaniggahatthaṃ yathā na jānanti, evaṃ mūlapariyāyādisadisaṃ dhammaṃ deseti. Ayaṃ niggahamukhena desanā. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘niggayha niggayhāhaṃ, ānanda, vakkhāmi, pavayha pavayha, ānanda, vakkhāmi, yo sāro, so ṭhassatī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.196). Ye pana ujukā sikkhākāmā, tesaṃ suviññeyyaṃ katvā ākaṅkheyyasuttādisadisaṃ dhammaṃ deseti, ‘‘abhirama, tissa, abhirama, tissa, ahamovādena ahamanuggahena ahamanusāsaniyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.84) ca ne samassāseti. Ayaṃ anuggahamukhena desanā.
然而,这位天子为慢心所僵固,自认是智者。据说他先前这样想:“我知道瀑流,也知道如来已度越瀑流的状态,只是不知道‘他是由于什么原因而度越的’这一小点。因此,对我而言,已知的很多,未知的极少;而那未知的部分,我只要听他说出来就能明白。世尊所说的,难道还会有我不懂的意思吗?”那时,导师心想:“这个人就像一块被污染的布料,无法染上颜色。如果他不舍弃这种慢心,就没有能力接受教法。我先折伏他的慢心,然后再对怀着谦下之心来提问的他详细阐明。”于是,导师把答案隐藏起来而作了开示。那位天子的慢心就这样被挫败了,他接着进一步提问就表明了这一点。他进一步提问的含义是:“贤者,您是如何不立住、不挣扎而度越瀑流的呢?就像我所了解的那样,请您为我讲述吧。”显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana devaputto mānatthaddho paṇḍitamānī, evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ahaṃ oghaṃ jānāmi, tathāgatassa oghatiṇṇabhāvaṃ jānāmi, ‘‘iminā pana kāraṇena tiṇṇo’’ti ettakamattaṃ na jānāmi. Iti mayhaṃ ñātameva bahu, appaṃ aññātaṃ, tamahaṃ kathitamattameva jānissāmi. Kiñhi nāma taṃ bhagavā vadeyya, yassāhaṃ atthaṃ na jāneyyanti. Atha satthā ‘‘ayaṃ kiliṭṭhavatthaṃ viya raṅgajātaṃ abhabbo imaṃ mānaṃ appahāya desanaṃ sampaṭicchituṃ, mānaniggahaṃ tāvassa katvā puna nīcacittena pucchantassa pakāsessāmī’’ti paṭicchannaṃ katvā pañhaṃ kathesi. Sopi nihatamāno ahosi, sā cassa nihatamānatā uttaripañhapucchaneneva veditabbā. Tassa pana pañhapucchanassa ayamattho – kathaṃ pana tvaṃ, mārisa, appatiṭṭhaṃ anāyūhaṃ oghamatari, yathāhaṃ jānāmi, evaṃ me kathehīti.
这时,世尊为他开讲,以“当我不立住时……”等作为开头。其中,「当我不立住时」的意思就是“在那个时刻,我”。“su”只是一个无实义的语助词,在这里和其他所有词句中的用法都一样。
「我就沉没」的意思是:当试图隐伏地度越时,就会沉没在那里。
「就被冲走」的意思是:无法站住,就会被冲走。
如此,世尊看到了站住和用力挣扎两者的过患,所以既不站住,也不用力挣扎,就这样度越了瀑流。世尊便以这种方式回答了问题。天神也对此有所了悟,但还不够清晰。为了使它更清晰,注释者展示了七组关于“沉没”与“被冲走”的双重解释:
因为,依靠诸烦恼而停滞安住,就称为「沉没」;依靠诸造作而奋力前冲,就称为「被冲走」。
或者,依靠渴爱与邪见而停滞安住,称为「沉没」;依靠其余烦恼及诸造作而奋力前冲,称为「被冲走」。
或者,依靠渴爱而停滞安住,称为「沉没」;依靠邪见而奋力前冲,称为「被冲走」。
或者,依靠常见而停滞安住,称为「沉没」;依靠断灭见而奋力前冲,称为「被冲走」。因为倾向于停滞、执取的心理,就是“有见”;倾向于过度奔驰、执取的心理,就是“非有见”。
或者,依靠昏沉而停滞安住,称为「沉没」;依靠掉举而奋力前冲,称为「被冲走」。
同样地,依靠耽著欲乐这种实践而停滞安住,称为「沉没」;依靠自我折磨这种实践而奋力前冲,称为「被冲走」。
依靠一切不善的造作而停滞安住,称为「沉没」;依靠一切世间善的造作而奋力前冲,称为「被冲走」。
对此也曾有这样的话:‘纯陀,无论哪些不善法,它们都是向下走的;无论哪些善法,它们都是向上走的。’显示巴利原文
Athassa bhagavā kathento yadāsvāhantiādimāha. Tattha yadā svāhanti yasmiṃ kāle ahaṃ. Sukāro nipātamattaṃ. Yathā ca ettha, evaṃ sabbapadesu. Saṃsīdāmīti paṭicchannaṃ katvā ataranto tattheva osīdāmi. Nibbuyhāmīti ṭhātuṃ asakkonto ativattāmi. Iti ṭhāne ca vāyāme ca dosaṃ disvā atiṭṭhanto avāyamanto oghamatarinti evaṃ bhagavatā pañho kathito. Devatāyapi paṭividdho, na pana pākaṭo, tassa pākaṭīkaraṇatthaṃ satta dukā dassitā. Kilesavasena hi santiṭṭhanto saṃsīdati nāma, abhisaṅkhāravasena āyūhanto nibbuyhati nāma. Taṇhādiṭṭhīhi vā santiṭṭhanto saṃsīdati nāma, avasesakilesānañceva abhisaṅkhārānañca vasena āyūhanto nibbuyhati nāma. Taṇhāvasena vā santiṭṭhanto saṃsīdati nāma, diṭṭhivasena āyūhanto nibbuyhati nāma. Sassatadiṭṭhiyā vā santiṭṭhanto saṃsīdati nāma, ucchedadiṭṭhiyā āyūhanto nibbuyhati nāma. Olīyanābhinivesā hi bhavadiṭṭhi, atidhāvanābhinivesā vibhavadiṭṭhi . Līnavasena vā santiṭṭhanto saṃsīdati nāma, uddhaccavasena āyūhanto nibbuyhati nāma. Tathā kāmasukhallikānuyogavasena santiṭṭhanto saṃsīdati nāma, attakilamathānuyogavasena āyūhanto nibbuyhati nāma. Sabbākusalābhisaṅkhāravasena santiṭṭhanto saṃsīdati nāma, sabbalokiyakusalābhisaṅkhāravasena āyūhanto nibbuyhati nāma. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘seyyathāpi, cunda, ye keci akusalā dhammā, sabbe te adhobhāgaṅgamanīyā, ye keci kusalā dhammā, sabbe te uparibhāgaṅgamanīyā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.86).
这位天神听闻了问题的解答后,便安立于入流果,心中充满喜悦与净信。为了表达这种喜悦与净信,他诵出了“确实已经很久了……”这首偈颂。
其中,“已久”意为经过了很长的时间。据说这位天神往昔曾见过迦叶正自觉者,然而从那位佛陀般涅槃之后,在这段期间内,他再未见过其他佛陀,所以今日得见世尊,才有感而发。难道这位天神此前真的从未见过世尊吗?其实无论见或未见,但就这一次见面来说,这样说都是合适的。
“婆罗门”是指已去除罪恶、诸漏已尽的婆罗门。“已般涅槃”是指以烦恼的涅槃而寂灭的人。“在世间”是指在众生世间。“渴爱”是指对于色等所缘,由于附着、遍著等原因而被称为“visattikā”的贪爱。整句偈颂的意思是:不站立、不挣扎地度越了、已度越、已超脱那渴爱瀑流的、诸漏已尽的婆罗门——确实已经很久了,我今天才得以见到。显示巴利原文
Imaṃ pañhavissajjanaṃ sutvāva devatā sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāya tuṭṭhā pasannā attano tuṭṭhiñca pasādañca pakāsayantī cirassaṃ vatāti gāthamāha. Tattha cirassanti cirassa kālassa accayenāti attho. Ayaṃ kira devatā kassapasammāsambuddhaṃ disvā tassa parinibbānato paṭṭhāya antarā aññaṃ buddhaṃ na diṭṭhapubbā, tasmā ajja bhagavantaṃ disvā evamāha. Kiṃ panimāya devatāya ito pubbe satthā na diṭṭhapubboti. Diṭṭhapubbo vā hotu adiṭṭhapubbo vā, dassanaṃ upādāya evaṃ vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Brāhmaṇanti bāhitapāpaṃ khīṇāsavabrāhmaṇaṃ. Parinibbutanti kilesanibbānena nibbutaṃ. Loketi sattaloke. Visattikanti rūpādīsu ārammaṇesu āsattavisattatādīhi kāraṇehi visattikā vuccati taṇhā, taṃ visattikaṃ appatiṭṭhamānaṃ anāyūhamānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ nittiṇṇaṃ uttiṇṇaṃ cirassaṃ vata khīṇāsavabrāhmaṇaṃ passāmīti attho.
“导师表示认同”的意思是,世尊从内心随喜了那位天女的话,与她心意相应。“隐没”的意思是,她舍弃了化现的身体,安住于自己原本由业所结生的身体中;得到了满足、获得了立足之处后,她用香与花供养了具足十力者,然后返回了自己的天宫。显示巴利原文
Samanuñño satthā ahosīti tassā devatāya vacanaṃ citteneva samanumodi, ekajjhāsayo ahosi. Antaradhāyīti abhisaṅkhatakāyaṃ jahitvā attano pakatiupādiṇṇakakāyasmiṃyeva ṭhatvā laddhāsā laddhapatiṭṭhā hutvā dasabalaṃ gandhehi ca mālehi ca pūjetvā attano bhavanaṃyeva agamāsīti.
2. 《度脱经》的注释解释。显示巴利原文
2. Nimokkhasuttavaṇṇanā
2 现在,从第二部经开始,我们将略去那些开头就已出现、意义明白的内容,只对其中意义不明显的地方进行注释。
“你知否”意为“你知道……吗?”(jānāsi nu)。
“度脱”等词,是对于道等殊胜法的称呼。因为通过道,众生从烦恼的束缚中脱离出来,所以“道”被称为众生的“度脱”。在证得果位的刹那,众生从那些烦恼的束缚中被释放出来,所以“果”被称为众生的“解脱”。证得涅槃之后,众生从一切苦中远离,所以“涅槃”被称为“远离”。或者,所有这些名称也可以直接用来指称涅槃本身。因为证得涅槃后,众生从一切苦中脱离、被释放、得远离,所以涅槃本身就被称为“度脱”、“解脱”、“远离”。
“我实知”意为“我的确知道”。其中的“kho”是强调词,表示“我确实知道”。如来这样说的意思是:‘我正是为了了知众生的度脱等,才圆满三十波罗蜜、通达一切知智的’,由此发出狮子吼。据说这部经就叫做《佛陀狮子吼经》。显示巴利原文
2. Idāni dutiyasuttato paṭṭhāya paṭhamamāgatañca uttānatthañca pahāya yaṃ yaṃ anuttānaṃ, taṃ tadeva vaṇṇayissāma. Jānāsi noti jānāsi nu. Nimokkhantiādīni maggādīnaṃ nāmāni . Maggena hi sattā kilesabandhanato nimuccanti, tasmā maggo sattānaṃ nimokkhoti vutto. Phalakkhaṇe pana te kilesabandhanato pamuttā, tasmā phalaṃ sattānaṃ pamokkhoti vuttaṃ. Nibbānaṃ patvā sattānaṃ sabbadukkhaṃ viviccati, tasmā nibbānaṃ vivekoti vuttaṃ. Sabbāni vā etāni nibbānasseva nāmāni. Nibbānañhi patvā sattā sabbadukkhato nimuccanti pamuccanti viviccanti, tasmā tadeva ‘‘nimokkho pamokkho viveko’’ti vuttaṃ. Jānāmi khvāhanti jānāmi kho ahaṃ. Avadhāraṇattho khokāro . Ahaṃ jānāmiyeva. Sattānaṃ nimokkhādijānanatthameva hi mayā samatiṃsa pāramiyo pūretvā sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ paṭividdhanti sīhanādaṃ nadati. Buddhasīhanādaṃ nāma kira etaṃ suttaṃ.
「喜与有的灭尽」:指以喜为根源的业有的灭尽。或者,也可解释为「喜的灭尽」与「有的灭尽」。在第一种解释中,由于提到「喜有」,便以三种业行造作的方式涵盖了行蕴;而由想蕴与识蕴,则涵盖了与它们相应的两个蕴。由于这三个蕴已被涵盖,与之相应的受蕴也自然被涵盖。如此,基于无执取的四无色蕴的止息,便说明了有余涅槃。「诸受的灭尽与寂止」:指有执取的诸受的灭尽与寂止。其中,由于提到了「受」,与之相应的三个蕴便同时被涵盖;依于其依处与所缘,色蕴也被涵盖。这样,基于有执取的五蕴的止息,便说明了无余涅槃。在第二种解释中,通过提到「喜」,涵盖的是行蕴;通过提到「有」,涵盖的是称为「再生有」的色蕴;通过想等本身,则涵盖了三个蕴。由此可知,是基于这五蕴的止息来说明涅槃。而四部众中的婆提迦长老偏爱这种解释。如此,世尊以涅槃为核心结束说法。显示巴利原文
Nandībhavaparikkhayāti nandīmūlakassa kammabhavassa parikkhayena. Nandiyā ca bhavassa cātipi vaṭṭati. Tattha hi purimanaye nandībhavena tividhakammābhisaṅkhāravasena saṅkhārakkhandho gahito, saññāviññāṇehi taṃsampayuttā ca dve khandhā. Tehi pana tīhi khandhehi sampayuttā vedanā tesaṃ gahaṇena gahitāvāti anupādiṇṇakānaṃ catunnaṃ arūpakkhandhānaṃ appavattivasena saupādisesaṃ nibbānaṃ kathitaṃ hoti. Vedanānaṃ nirodhā upasamāti upādiṇṇakavedanānaṃ nirodhena ca upasamena ca. Tattha vedanāgahaṇena taṃsampayuttā tayo khandhā gahitāva honti, tesaṃ vatthārammaṇavasena rūpakkhandhopi. Evaṃ imesaṃ upādiṇṇakānaṃ pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ appavattivasena anupādisesaṃ nibbānaṃ kathitaṃ hoti. Dutiyanaye pana nandiggahaṇena saṅkhārakkhandho gahito, bhavaggahaṇena upapattibhavasaṅkhāto rūpakkhandho, saññādīhi sarūpeneva tayo khandhā. Evaṃ imesaṃ pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ appavattivasena nibbānaṃ kathitaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ. Imameva ca nayaṃ catunikāyikabhaṇḍikatthero roceti. Iti nibbānavaseneva bhagavā desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesīti.
第三经:《牵引经注》显示巴利原文
3. Upanīyasuttavaṇṇanā
3 「被带近」:指衰败、坏灭,或前往,即逐渐地趋近死亡的意思。或者,如同牛群被牧人带走一样,生命被老死带向死亡,这就是它的含义。「生命」:指命根。「小」:指有限、少许。它的「小」应从两种方式理解:体性上的小,与刹那上的小。就体性上的小来说,因为经中说:「比丘们!无论何人活得长久,他活上百岁,或略多于百岁。」故称为小。就刹那上的小而言,从究竟义来看,众生的生命极其短暂,仅仅是一个心识生起的时间而已。如同车轮在转动时,也只是轮辋的一个部分在转动,停住时也是同样的一个部分停住;同样地,众生的生命只是一念心刹那,当那个心识刚刚灭去时,众生便被称作已灭。正如所说:在过去的心识刹那,他曾活过,现在未活,未来未活;在未来心识刹那,他将活,现在未活,过去未活;在现在心识刹那,他正活着,过去未活,未来未活。显示巴利原文
3. Tatiye upanīyatīti parikkhīyati nirujjhati, upagacchati vā, anupubbena maraṇaṃ upetīti attho. Yathā vā gopālena gogaṇo nīyati, evaṃ jarāya maraṇasantikaṃ upanīyatīti attho. Jīvitanti jīvitindriyaṃ. Appanti parittaṃ thokaṃ. Tassa dvīhākārehi parittatā veditabbā sarasaparittatāya ca khaṇaparittatāya ca. Sarasaparittatāyapi hi ‘‘yo, bhikkhave, ciraṃ jīvati, so vassasataṃ appaṃ vā bhiyyo’’ti (dī. ni. 2.7; saṃ. ni. 2.143) vacanato parittaṃ. Khaṇaparittatāyapi. Paramatthato hi atiparitto sattānaṃ jīvitakkhaṇo ekacittappavattimattoyeva . Yathā nāma rathacakkaṃ pavattamānampi ekeneva nemippadesena pavattati, tiṭṭhamānampi ekeneva tiṭṭhati, evamevaṃ ekacittakkhaṇikaṃ sattānaṃ jīvitaṃ, tasmiṃ citte niruddhamatte satto niruddhoti vuccati. Yathāha – atīte cittakkhaṇe jīvittha na jīvati na jīvissati, anāgate cittakkhaṇe jīvissati na jīvati na jīvittha, paccuppanne cittakkhaṇe jīvati na jīvittha na jīvissati.
生命与有身,以及一切的乐与苦,
与一心相应,刹那疾速流转。
凡此,或死或住,彼已灭者,
一切诸蕴悉皆相似,逝已不复结生。
“不以未生而称为生”:一个人并非因那些尚未生起的未来生命阶段而名为“生”,而是以现在正经历的这期生命而活着。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Jīvitaṃ attabhāvo ca, sukhadukkhā ca kevalā; Ekacittasamāyuttā, lahuso vattate khaṇo. ‘‘Ye niruddhā marantassa, tiṭṭhamānassa vā idha; Sabbepi sadisā khandhā, gatā appaṭisandhikā. ‘‘Anibbattena na jāto, paccuppannena jīvati;
“心灭而世间死”:当心识坏灭时,此世间即名为“死”。从究竟义上说,这不过是一种概念上的“施设”而已。(《大义释》10)显示巴利原文
Cittabhaṅgā mato loko, paññatti paramatthiyā’’ti. (mahāni. 10);
“已老迈的”:指的是步入老年阶段,或因衰老而临近死亡。“没有救护”:意思是没有任何能成为真正的救护、庇护或皈依。“此怖畏”:指三种怖畏——命根即将走向死亡、寿命极为短促,以及已老迈者全无救护。这是怖畏的对象及产生怖畏的原因。“善哉,能带来乐的诸福”:意为智者应当行诸福德,因为这些福德能带来安乐、给予安乐。这位天神以广说色界禅那为基础,将修习前的心念、之后的心念及解脱时的心念总括一处,以复数词称之为“诸福”。同时,也将禅那的滋味、对禅那的喜爱及禅那之乐包含其中,故说它们是“能带来乐的”。据说,这位天神因自身在长寿处的梵天界重生,当她看见下方欲界天中那些寿短处的众生不断地死没、结生,犹如大雨倾盆般密集,心中便生起感慨:“唉!若这些众生能修习禅那且不退失,于命终之后,便可在梵天界安住长达一劫、二劫、四劫、八劫、十六劫、三十二劫乃至六十四劫之久。”她正是因此才说了这番话。显示巴利原文
Jarūpanītassāti jaraṃ upagatassa, jarāya vā maraṇasantikaṃ upanītassa. Na santi tāṇāti tāṇaṃ leṇaṃ saraṇaṃ bhavituṃ samatthā nāma keci natthi. Etaṃ bhayanti etaṃ jīvitindriyassa maraṇūpagamanaṃ, āyuparittatā, jarūpanītassa tāṇābhāvoti tividhaṃ bhayaṃ bhayavatthu bhayakāraṇanti attho. Puññāni kayirātha sukhāvahānīti viññū puriso sukhāvahāni sukhadāyakāni puññāni kareyya. Iti devatā rūpāvacarajjhānaṃ sandhāya pubbacetanaṃ aparacetanaṃ muñcacetanañca gahetvā bahuvacanavasena ‘‘puññānī’’ti āha. Jhānassādaṃ jhānanikantiṃ jhānasukhañca gahetvā ‘‘sukhāvahānī’’ti āha. Tassā kira devatāya sayaṃ dīghāyukaṭṭhāne brahmaloke nibbattattā heṭṭhā kāmāvacaradevesu parittāyukaṭṭhāne cavamāne upapajjamāne ca thullaphusitake vuṭṭhipātasadise satte disvā etadahosi ‘‘ahovatime sattā jhānaṃ bhāvetvā aparihīnajjhānā kālaṃ katvā brahmaloke ekakappa-dvekappa-catukappa-aṭṭhakappa-soḷasakappa-dvattiṃsakappa-catusaṭṭhikappappamāṇaṃ addhānaṃ tiṭṭheyyu’’nti. Tasmā evamāha.
那时,世尊心想:“这位天神所说仅是流转之说,不能导向出离。”为了向她开示还灭的道理,世尊便说了第二首偈颂。于此,“世间味”有两种:就异门而言与就非异门而言。就异门而言,三界内的整个轮回即是世间味;就非异门而言,四种资具(食物、衣服、住处、医药)即是世间味。在此偈中,以异门之世间味为主;当然,非异门之世间味——即四种资具,就其范畴而言也含摄其中。“期望寂止”:意思是期望、希求、渴望那名为涅槃的究竟寂静。显示巴利原文
Atha bhagavā – ‘‘ayaṃ devatā aniyyānikaṃ vaṭṭakathaṃ kathetī’’ti vivaṭṭamassā dassento dutiyaṃ gāthamāha. Tattha lokāmisanti dve lokāmisā pariyāyena ca nippariyāyena ca. Pariyāyena tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ lokāmisaṃ, nippariyāyena cattāro paccayā. Idha pariyāyalokāmisaṃ adhippetaṃ. Nippariyāyalokāmisampi vaṭṭatiyeva. Santipekkhoti nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ accantasantiṃ pekkhanto icchanto patthayantoti.
第四、《逝去经》的注释显示巴利原文
4. Accentisuttavaṇṇanā
4 第四偈颂中:“逝去”意为超越、度过。“时”指饭前等各个时段。“催赶夜晚”是说流逝的夜晚催促着人迅速趋近死亡,将其急速送往终点。“年岁聚”的“聚”指少年、中年、老年三个阶段年岁的积聚,即“堆”或“积集”之义。因为“聚”字在不同经典中含义有别:如在“诸比丘,我允许将未染之衣作双层僧伽梨”句中,“聚”字指“层”;在“应期望获得百倍功德果报”句中,“聚”字表“殊胜利益”;在“肠端,即肠间膜”句中,“聚”字指“部分”或“种类”;在“应当制作众多花鬘”句中,“聚”字表“堆”、“众多”;而在“五种欲聚”里,“聚”字则是“束缚”、“系缚”义。然就此偈而言,承上文的“堆”或“积集”之义,故“年岁聚”应理解为年年积累的生命岁月。“依次舍离”是指这些积聚的年岁依次舍弃此人。即当此人进入中年时,少年岁月便舍他而去;进入老年时,少年与中年的岁月皆舍他而去;到了临命终那一刹那,一切年岁悉皆舍离。显示巴利原文
4. Catutthe accentīti atikkamanti. Kālāti purebhattādayo kālā. Tarayanti rattiyoti rattiyo atikkamamānā puggalaṃ maraṇūpagamanāya tarayanti sīghaṃ sīghaṃ gamayanti. Vayoguṇāti paṭhamamajjhimapacchimavayānaṃ guṇā, rāsayoti attho. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ahatānaṃ vatthānaṃ diguṇaṃ saṅghāṭi’’nti (mahāva. 348) ettha hi paṭalaṭṭho guṇaṭṭho. ‘‘Sataguṇā dakkhiṇā pāṭikaṅkhitabbā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.379) ettha ānisaṃsaṭṭho. ‘‘Antaṃ antaguṇa’’nti ettha koṭṭhāsaṭṭho. ‘‘Kayirā mālāguṇe bahū’’ti (dha. pa. 53) ettha rāsaṭṭho. ‘‘Pañca kāmaguṇā’’ti ettha bandhanaṭṭho. Idha pana rāsaṭṭho guṇaṭṭho. Tasmā vayoguṇāti vayorāsayo veditabbā. Anupubbaṃjahantīti anupaṭipāṭiyā puggalaṃ jahanti. Majjhimavaye ṭhitaṃ hi paṭhamavayo jahati, pacchimavaye ṭhitaṃ dve paṭhamamajjhimā jahanti, maraṇakkhaṇe pana tayopi vayā jahanteva. Etaṃ bhayanti etaṃ kālānaṃ atikkamanaṃ, rattidivānaṃ taritabhāvo, vayoguṇānaṃ jahanabhāvoti tividhaṃ bhayaṃ. Sesaṃ purimasadisamevāti.
《斩断多少经》注释显示巴利原文
5. Katichindasuttavaṇṇanā
5 第五偈中,「斩断多少」意为正在斩断的人应当斩断多少?其余各句也是如此。在此,「斩断」与「舍弃」在意义上本是一回事,但这位天神为使偈颂格律优美而避用重复字词,故有此问。「度多少结」意为已度过多少种结,即已超越了多少结。「应斩断五」是指正在斩断的人应斩断五下分结。「应舍弃五」是指正在舍弃的人应舍弃五上分结。在这里,斩断与舍弃在意义上仍是一回事,而世尊是随顺天神问话的措辞而作答。或者可以这样理解:如同脚被绳缚的鸟,五下分结有向下拖拽之势,故说不来道应当斩断它们;又像手攀抓树枝,五上分结有向上牵提之势,故说阿拉汉道应当舍弃它们。「更应修五」是指为了斩断、舍弃这些结,应进一步修习更为殊胜之法,即应修习信等五根。「已度五结」是说已超越了五种结,即贪结、嗔结、痴结、慢结、见结。「名为度瀑流者」是指被称为渡过四种瀑流的人。此偈中所阐述的五根,通于世出世间。显示巴利原文
5. Pañcame kati chindeti chindanto kati chindeyya. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Ettha ca ‘‘chinde jahe’’ti atthato ekaṃ. Gāthābandhassa pana maṭṭhabhāvatthaṃ ayaṃ devatā saddapunaruttiṃ vajjayantī evamāha. Kati saṅgātigoti kati saṅge atigato, atikkantoti attho. Saṅgātikotipi pāṭho, ayameva attho. Pañca chindeti chindanto pañca orambhāgiyasaṃyojanāni chindeyya. Pañca jaheti jahanto pañcuddhambhāgiyasaṃyojanāni jaheyya. Idhāpi chindanañca jahanañca atthato ekameva, bhagavā pana devatāya āropitavacanānurūpeneva evamāha. Atha vā pādesu baddhapāsasakuṇo viya pañcorambhāgiyasaṃyojanāni heṭṭhā ākaḍḍhamānākārāni honti, tāni anāgāmimaggena chindeyyāti vadati. Hatthehi gahitarukkhasākhā viya pañcuddhambhāgiyasaṃyojanāni upari ākaḍḍhamānākārāni honti, tāni arahattamaggena jaheyyāti vadati. Pañca cuttari bhāvayeti etesaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ chindanatthāya ceva pahānatthāya ca uttari atirekaṃ visesaṃ bhāvento saddhāpañcamāni indriyāni bhāveyyāti attho. Pañca saṅgātigoti rāgasaṅgo dosasaṅgo mohasaṅgo mānasaṅgo diṭṭhisaṅgoti ime pañca saṅge atikkanto. Oghatiṇṇoti vuccatīti caturoghatiṇṇoti kathīyati. Imāya pana gāthāya pañcindriyāni lokiyalokuttarāni kathitānīti.
《觉醒经》注释显示巴利原文
6. Jāgarasuttavaṇṇanā
6 第六偈中,「于觉醒者」是指那些觉醒的人。而在解答的偈颂里,当信等五根处于觉醒时,五种盖便被称为「沉睡」。为什么呢?因为一个被五盖控制的人,无论身处何地,或坐或立,哪怕一直挨到天亮,由于他内心放逸、被不善法所占据,仍然被称为「沉睡者」。如此,当五种盖沉睡时,五根便被称为「觉醒」。为什么呢?因为一个具足五根的人,无论身处何地,即便卧着入睡,由于他内心不放逸、具足善法,他仍然被称为「觉醒者」。正是通过这五种盖,人们去执取、抓取、执着烦恼的尘垢,因为前分的欲贪等五盖是后分不善法的缘;而通过五根,则得以清净。应这样来理解此义。这里所阐述的五根,同样通于世出世间。显示巴利原文
6. Chaṭṭhe jāgaratanti jāgarantānaṃ. Pañca jāgaratanti vissajjanagāthāyaṃ pana saddhādīsu pañcasu indriyesu jāgarantesu pañca nīvaraṇā suttā nāma. Kasmā? Yasmā taṃsamaṅgīpuggalo yattha katthaci nisinno vā ṭhito vā aruṇaṃ uṭṭhapentopi pamādatāya akusalasamaṅgitāya sutto nāma hoti. Evaṃ suttesu pañcasu nīvaraṇesu pañcindriyāni jāgarāni nāma. Kasmā ? Yasmā taṃsamaṅgīpuggalo yattha katthaci nipajjitvā niddāyantopi appamādatāya kusalasamaṅgitāya jāgaro nāma hoti. Pañcahi pana nīvaraṇeheva kilesarajaṃ ādiyati gaṇhāti parāmasati. Purimā hi kāmacchandādayo pacchimānaṃ paccayā hontīti pañcahi indriyehi parisujjhatīti ayamattho veditabbo. Idhāpi pañcindriyāni lokiyalokuttarāneva kathitānīti.
《未通达经》注释显示巴利原文
7. Appaṭividitasuttavaṇṇanā
7 第七经中,「诸法」是指四圣谛法。「未通达」是指未以智慧彻知通达。「在外道论中」是指在六十二种恶见的论说中。这些论说是相对于此地之外的其他外道们的言论,故称「外道论」。「被引向」是说他们既随各自法尔的习性而自行走去,也会被他人牵引着走。其中,自己主动执取常见等见解,叫做「自行走去」;听闻他人的言语而执取那些见解,叫做「被牵引」。「这是他们觉醒的时候了」:对那些众生而言,现在正是他们应从愚痴大梦中觉醒的时刻了。因为觉者已出现于世,法已宣说,僧团已善修,这道路如此贤善,而广大众生却仍在生死轮回中沉睡不觉,天神因此说道。「正自觉者」是指以正确之因、如理之道而觉悟的人。觉者有四种:一切知佛、独觉佛、四谛觉者和多闻觉者。其中,圆满了三十种波罗蜜而证得正等觉者,称为一切知佛;经过百劫又两个阿僧祇的时间圆满波罗蜜、证得独自觉悟者,称为独觉佛;其余的诸漏尽者,称为四谛觉者;广学多闻者,称为多闻觉者。在此处意义中,当以前三种觉者为适用。「以正智了知」显示巴利原文
7. Sattame dhammāti catusaccadhammā. Appaṭividitāti ñāṇena appaṭividdhā. Paravādesūti dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhigatavādesu. Te hi ito paresaṃ titthiyānaṃ vādattā paravādā nāma. Nīyareti attano dhammatāyapi gacchanti, parenapi nīyanti. Tattha sayameva sassatādīni gaṇhantā gacchanti nāma, parassa vacanena tāni gaṇhantā nīyanti nāma. Kālo tesaṃ pabujjhitunti tesaṃ puggalānaṃ pabujjhituṃ ayaṃ kālo. Lokasmiñhi buddho uppanno, dhammo desiyati, saṅgho suppaṭipanno, paṭipadā bhaddikā, ime ca pana mahājanā vaṭṭe suttā nappabujjhantīti devatā āha. Sambuddhāti sammā hetunā kāraṇena buddhā. Cattāro hi buddhā – sabbaññubuddho, paccekabuddho, catusaccabuddho, sutabuddhoti. Tattha samatiṃsapāramiyo pūretvā sammāsambodhiṃ patto sabbaññubuddho nāma. Kappasatasahassādhikāni dve asaṅkhyeyyāni pāramiyo pūretvā sayambhutaṃ patto paccekabuddho nāma. Avasesā khīṇāsavā catusaccabuddhā nāma. Bahussuto sutabuddho nāma. Imasmiṃ atthe tayopi purimā vaṭṭanti. Sammadaññāti sammā hetunā kāraṇena jānitvā. Caranti visame samanti visame vā lokasannivāse visame vā sattanikāye visame vā kilesajāte samaṃ carantīti.
第八经 《善忘失经》的注释显示巴利原文
8. Susammuṭṭhasuttavaṇṇanā
8 在第八经中,“善忘失”(susammuṭṭhā)是因智慧未通达而称为善忘失。犹如有人耕了两块田,仅在一块播了种,收获了许多谷物;对于那块未播种的田,并无收获,他反而说“我的谷物损失了很多”。这其实是将未曾得到的说成“损失”。同样,此处也只是将未曾通达的称为“善忘失”。“不忘失”(asammuṭṭhā)则因智慧已通达而称为“不失”。其余的解释与前面那篇经的注释相同。显示巴利原文
8. Aṭṭhame susammuṭṭhāti paññāya appaṭividdhabhāveneva sunaṭṭhā. Yathā hi dve khettāni kasitvā, ekaṃ vapitvā, bahudhaññaṃ adhigatassa avāpitakhettato aladdhaṃ sandhāya ‘‘bahuṃ me dhaññaṃ naṭṭha’’nti vadanto aladdhameva ‘‘naṭṭha’’nti vadati, evamidhāpi appaṭividitāva susammuṭṭhā nāma. Asammuṭṭhāti paññāya paṭividdhabhāveneva anaṭṭhā. Sesaṃ purimasadisamevāti.
第九经 《贪慢经》的注释显示巴利原文
9. Mānakāmasuttavaṇṇanā
9 在第九经中,“贪慢者”(mānakāmassa)是指喜爱、希求慢的人。“调伏”(damo):对于这类补特伽罗,并没有属于定资粮的调伏。如在“以真实调御,具足调伏,达于吠陀终际,行梵行已立”(《相应部》1.195)这一段中,所说的调伏是指根律仪。在“若以真实、调伏、施舍、忍耐,更有其他”(《相应部》1.246;《经集》191)这一段中,所说的调伏是指慧。在“以布施、调伏、自制、真实语故而有福,有福的增长”(《相应部》4.365)这一段中,所说的调伏是指布萨羯磨。在“富楼那!汝能以此调伏之寂静具足,住于输那波兰多地方否?”(《相应部》4.88;《中部》3.396)这一段中,所说的调伏是指安忍。然而,在现在这部经中,“调伏”是定资粮类诸法的名称。因此才说:“在不定的状态下,没有牟那。”这里的“牟那”(mona)是指四道智,因为它能“知”(munāti),故称牟那,意思就是了知四圣谛法。“死域”(maccudheyyassa)是指三界轮回,它是死王的领域,所以称为死域。显示巴利原文
9. Navame mānakāmassāti mānaṃ kāmentassa icchantassa. Damoti evarūpassa puggalassa samādhipakkhiko damo natthīti vadati. ‘‘Saccena danto damasā upeto, vedantagū vusitabrahmacariyo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.195) ettha hi indriyasaṃvaro damoti vutto. ‘‘Yadi saccā damā cāgā, khantyā bhiyyodha vijjatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 191) ettha paññā. ‘‘Dānena damena saṃyamena saccavajjena atthi puññaṃ, atthi puññassa āgamo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.365) ettha uposathakammaṃ. ‘‘Sakkhissasi kho tvaṃ, puṇṇa, iminā damūpasamena samannāgato sunāparantasmiṃ janapade viharitu’’nti (saṃ. ni. 4.88; ma. ni. 3.396) ettha adhivāsanakhanti. Imasmiṃ pana sutte damoti samādhipakkhikadhammānaṃ etaṃ nāmaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘na monamatthi asamāhitassā’’ti. Tattha monanti catumaggañāṇaṃ, tañhi munātīti monaṃ, catusaccadhamme jānātīti attho. Maccudheyyassāti tebhūmakavaṭṭassa. Tañhi maccuno patiṭṭhānaṭṭhena maccudheyyanti vuccati. Pāranti tasseva pāraṃ nibbānaṃ. Tareyyāti paṭivijjheyya pāpuṇeyya vā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – eko araññe viharanto pamatto puggalo maccudheyyassa pāraṃ na tareyya na paṭivijjheyya na pāpuṇeyyāti.
“舍离慢”(mānaṃ pahāyā):以阿拉汉道断除了九种慢。“善得定”(susamāhitatta):通过近行定和安止定而成为善得定者。“善心”(sucetaso):因与智相应而拥有善妙之心。与智不相应的心不能称为“善心”,因此这里的意思是“成就与智相应的善心之后”。“于一切处解脱”(sabbadhi vippamutta):于一切蕴、处等中成为解脱者之后。“能度越”(tareyyā):此处是指证悟的度越,即在超越三界轮回、通达涅槃时,他能度越。如此,在这首偈颂中便宣说了三学。是怎么宣说的呢?“慢”能破坏戒,因此通过“舍离慢”这句,宣说了增上戒学;通过“善得定”这句,宣说了增上心学;在“善心”这个词中,以“心”来显示慧,因此通过这句,宣说了增上慧学。而所谓的增上戒,是在戒存在时才有的;增上心,是在心存在时才有的;增上慧,是在慧存在时才有的。所以应当知道,五戒、十戒这些是“戒”,而巴帝摩卡律仪才名为“增上戒”。八等至是“心”,作为观之基础的禅那是“慧”。显示巴利原文
Mānaṃ pahāyāti arahattamaggena navavidhamānaṃ pajahitvā. Susamāhitattoti upacārappanāsamādhīhi suṭṭhu samāhitatto. Sucetasoti ñāṇasampayuttatāya sundaracitto. Ñāṇavippayuttacittena hi sucetasoti na vuccati, tasmā ñāṇasampayuttena sucetaso hutvāti attho. Sabbadhi vippamuttoti sabbesu khandhāyatanādīsu vippamutto hutvā. Tareyyāti ettha tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ samatikkamanto nibbānaṃ paṭivijjhanto taratīti paṭivedhataraṇaṃ nāma vuttaṃ. Iti imāya gāthāya tisso sikkhā kathitā honti. Kathaṃ – māno nāmāyaṃ sīlabhedano, tasmā ‘‘mānaṃ pahāyā’’ti iminā adhisīlasikkhā kathitā hoti. ‘‘Susamāhitatto’’ti iminā adhicittasikkhā. ‘‘Sucetaso’’ti ettha cittena paññā dassitā, tasmā iminā adhipaññāsikkhā kathitā. Adhisīlañca nāma sīle sati hoti, adhicittaṃ citte sati, adhipaññā paññāya sati. Tasmā sīlaṃ nāma pañcapi dasapi sīlāni, pātimokkhasaṃvaro adhisīlaṃ nāmāti veditabbaṃ. Aṭṭha samāpattiyo cittaṃ, vipassanāpādakajjhānaṃ adhicittaṃ. Kammassakatañāṇaṃ paññā, vipassanā adhipaññā. Anuppannepi hi buddhuppāde pavattatīti pañcasīlaṃ dasasīlaṃ sīlameva, pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ buddhuppādeyeva pavattatīti adhisīlaṃ. Cittapaññāsupi eseva nayo. Apica nibbānaṃ patthayantena samādinnaṃ pañcasīlampi dasasīlampi adhisīlameva. Samāpannā aṭṭha samāpattiyopi adhicittameva. Sabbampi vā lokiyasīlaṃ sīlameva, lokuttaraṃ adhisīlaṃ. Cittapaññāsupi eseva nayoti. Iti imāya gāthāya samodhānetvā tisso sikkhā sakalasāsanaṃ kathitaṃ hotīti.
第十、阿兰若经注显示巴利原文
10. Araññasuttavaṇṇanā
10 在第十经中,“寂静者”(santānaṃ):指烦恼已经平息的人,或者也指智者。因为在诸如“智者确实与善士一同宣说”、“远方的智者会显耀”等语句中,智者也称为“寂静者”。“梵行者”(brahmacārīnaṃ):指行持最殊胜道的人,也就是安住于道梵行住的人。“以什么缘故肤色清净”:这位天神问,是何原因使得他们的皮肤色泽变得如此清净?她为什么这样问呢?据说,这位居住在林丛中的地居天神,会见到那些住在林野的比丘们,午后从乞食回来之后,走进森林,在夜间和白天的坐处取来根本业处后安坐。当他们如此安坐时,心中便生起强力的心一境性。由于这种力量,与他们不相符的相续便止息了,相符的相续随之生起,心变得明净。心明净时,血液也明净,由心而生起的所造色便变得清净,面容的光泽就像从蒂上脱落的棕榈果一样。天神见到后心想:‘通常来说,这种身体光泽只有那些得到甘美丰足的饮食、触感舒适的衣物床铺、适宜气候的舒适感,以及住在三重檐等宫殿里,并享有华鬘、香、涂香等的人才会有。可是这些比丘乞食回来,吃的是混在一起的杂饭,他们……’显示巴利原文
10. Dasame santānanti santakilesānaṃ, paṇḍitānaṃ vā. ‘‘Santo have sabbhi pavedayanti (jā. 2.21.413), dūre santo pakāsantī’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 304) hi paṇḍitāpi santoti vuttā. Brahmacārinanti seṭṭhacārīnaṃ maggabrahmacariyavāsaṃ vasantānaṃ. Kena vaṇṇo pasīdatīti kena kāraṇena chavivaṇṇo pasīdatīti pucchati. Kasmā panesā evaṃ pucchati? Esā kira vanasaṇḍavāsikā bhummadevatā āraññake bhikkhū pacchābhattaṃ piṇḍapātapaṭikkante araññaṃ pavisitvā rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānesu mūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā nisinne passati. Tesañca evaṃ nisinnānaṃ balavacittekaggatā uppajjati. Tato visabhāgasantati vūpasammati, sabhāgasantati okkamati, cittaṃ pasīdati. Citte pasanne lohitaṃ pasīdati, cittasamuṭṭhānāni upādārūpāni parisuddhāni honti, vaṇṭā pamuttatālaphalassa viya mukhassa vaṇṇo hoti. Taṃ disvā devatā cintesi – ‘‘sarīravaṇṇo nāmāyaṃ paṇītāni rasasampannāni bhojanāni sukhasamphassāni nivāsanapāpuraṇasayanāni utusukhe tebhūmikādibhede ca pāsāde mālāgandhavilepanādīni ca labhantānaṃ pasīdati, ime pana bhikkhū piṇḍāya caritvā missakabhattaṃ bhuñjanti, viraḷamañcake vā phalake vā silāya vā sayanāni kappenti, rukkhamūlādīsu vā abbhokāse vā vasanti, kena nu kho kāraṇena etesaṃ vaṇṇo pasīdatī’’ti. Tasmā pucchi.
于是,世尊为了说明这其中的原因,便诵出了第二首偈颂。其中,“过去”(atīta):不像某些贪着资具的人那样,对过去的事追悔不已:‘过去有某某国王是行持正法的人,他供养过我们殊胜的资具。我们的戒师和教授师都得到了利养。那时我们吃着那样的食物,穿着那样的衣服。’“不希求未来”(nappajappanti nāgata):他们也不那样希求未来:‘将来会有行持正法的国王,地方富庶,会出产许多酥油、生酥等东西,各处都会有人说“请嚼食,请吃食吧”。到那时,我们就能吃到那样的食物,穿上那样的衣服了。’“以现在所得”(paccuppannena):不论当时得到什么,就靠着它来维持生活。“因此”(tena):就是因为这三种原因。显示巴利原文
Athassā bhagavā kāraṇaṃ kathento dutiyaṃ gāthaṃ āha. Tattha atītanti atīte asuko nāma rājā dhammiko ahosi, so amhākaṃ paṇīte paccaye adāsi. Ācariyupajjhāyā lābhino ahesuṃ. Atha mayaṃ evarūpāni bhojanāni bhuñjimhā, cīvarāni pārupimhāti evaṃ ekacce paccayabāhullikā viya ime bhikkhū atītaṃ nānusocanti. Nappajappanti nāgatanti anāgate dhammiko rājā bhavissati, phītā janapadā bhavissanti, bahūni sappinavanītādīni uppajjissanti, ‘‘khādatha bhuñjathā’’ti tattha tattha vattāro bhavissanti, tadā mayaṃ evarūpāni bhojanāni bhuñjissāma, cīvarāni pārupissāmāti evaṃ anāgataṃ na patthenti. Paccuppannenāti yena kenaci taṅkhaṇe laddhena yāpenti. Tenāti tena tividhenāpi kāraṇena.
在这样说明了肤色成就之后,为了接着说明这种肤色的消亡,世尊诵出了紧接着的偈颂。其中,“由希求未来”(anāgatappajappāya):指的是因对未来的希求。“由此”(etena):是由于这两种原因——对过去的追悔与对未来的希求。“如被割下的绿苇”(naḷova harito luto):就像绿色的芦苇被割下来,扔在滚烫的石头上会干枯一样,他们的肤色也会这样干枯。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vaṇṇasampattiṃ dassetvā idāni tasseva vaṇṇassa vināsaṃ dassento anantaraṃ gāthamāha. Tattha anāgatappajappāyāti anāgatassa patthanāya. Etenāti etena kāraṇadvayena. Naḷova harito lutoti yathā harito naḷo lāyitvā uṇhapāsāṇe pakkhitto sussati, evaṃ sussantīti.
第二 欢喜园品显示巴利原文
2. Nandanavaggo
第一、欢喜园经注显示巴利原文
1. Nandanasuttavaṇṇanā
11 在欢喜园品的第一经中,「在那里」(tatra):即‘在那个园林中’。‘kho’:为音韵流畅而使用的虚词。‘世尊召唤比丘们’:世尊让僧团中的上首比丘们知晓。‘诸比丘’:表明对他们的称呼。‘贤者’:他们给予的回答。‘那些比丘们’:指那时在场、正在聆听佛法的比丘们。‘回应了世尊’:他们回应世尊的话,即面向世尊,恭敬倾听、接受。‘说了此语’:说出下面将要宣说的‘往昔……’这段话。其中,‘忉利天的天神’:指出生于忉利天的众生。所谓‘忉利天’,即第二层天界。据说,摩伽青年与三十二位朋友在摩阇罗村命终之后,转生彼处,成为三十三位天子,那个天界便由此得名。不过,在其他轮围世界中,也有六欲天存在。正如经中所说:‘一千个四大王天,一千个忉利天’(《增支部》10.29)。因此,应知这仅是此天界的名称安立。如此理解,则此说无过失。显示巴利原文
11. Nandanavaggassa paṭhame tatrāti tasmiṃ ārāme. Khoti byañjanasiliṭṭhatāvasena nipātamattaṃ. Bhikkhū āmantesīti parisajeṭṭhake bhikkhū jānāpesi. Bhikkhavoti tesaṃ āmantanākāradīpanaṃ. Bhadanteti pativacanadānaṃ. Te bhikkhūti ye tattha sammukhībhūtā dhammapaṭiggāhakā bhikkhū. Bhagavato paccassosunti bhagavato vacanaṃ patiassosuṃ, abhimukhā hutvā suṇiṃsu sampaṭicchiṃsūti attho. Etadavocāti etaṃ idāni vattabbaṃ ‘‘bhūtapubba’’ntiādivacanaṃ avoca. Tattha tāvatiṃsakāyikāti tāvatiṃsakāye nibbattā. Tāvatiṃsakāyo nāma dutiyadevaloko vuccati. Maghena māṇavena saddhiṃ macalagāme kālaṃ katvā tattha uppanne tettiṃsa devaputte upādāya kira tassa devalokassa ayaṃ paṇṇatti jātāti vadanti. Yasmā pana sesacakkavāḷesupi cha kāmāvacaradevalokā atthi. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘sahassaṃ cātumahārājikānaṃ sahassaṃ tāvatiṃsāna’’nti (a. ni. 10.29), tasmā nāmapaṇṇattiyevesā tassa devalokassāti veditabbā. Evañhi niddosaṃ padaṃ hoti.
「在欢喜林」(Nandane vane):进入此林园时,一进入便令人欢喜、喜悦,因此名为‘欢喜林’。当五种死相在天众身上显现时,那些天神悲叹道:‘我们要舍弃这些成就而逝去了!’帝释天便教诫说:‘不要悲叹,诸行本即坏灭之法,凡生起者必当坏灭,无可避免。’随后将他们带入此林。纵使有被其他天神挽着手臂带进来的天神,一见到林中的殊妙成就,死亡的愁苦便顿时止息,唯有纯粹的喜悦与欢悦生起。接着,他们就在那里尽情嬉乐,最终犹如受暑热侵袭的冰块一般消融,又如被风吹灭的灯火一闪即灭。因此,无论谁进入其中,它都必定令人欢喜、悦乐,所以称为‘欢喜林’。在那欢喜林中,‘为天女众所围绕’:天女即女天神,指被那一群天女之众所围绕。显示巴利原文
Nandane vaneti ettha taṃ vanaṃ paviṭṭhe paviṭṭhe nandayati tosetīti nandanaṃ. Pañcasu hi maraṇanimittesu uppannesu ‘‘sampattiṃ pahāya cavissāmā’’ti paridevamānā devatā sakko devānamindo ‘‘mā paridevittha, abhijjanadhammā nāma saṅkhārā natthī’’ti ovaditvā tattha pavesāpeti. Tāsaṃ aññāhi devatāhi bāhāsu gahetvā pavesitānampi tassa sampattiṃ disvāva maraṇasoko vūpasammati, pītipāmojjameva uppajjati. Atha tasmiṃ kīḷamānā eva uṇhasantatto himapiṇḍo viya vilīyanti, vātāpahatadīpasikhā viya vijjhāyantīti evaṃ yaṃkiñci anto paviṭṭhaṃ nandayati tosetiyevāti nandanaṃ, tasmiṃ nandane. Accharāsaṅghaparivutāti accharāti devadhītānaṃ nāmaṃ, tāsaṃ samūhena parivutā.
“以天的”(Dibbehīti):指在天界产生的。“以五种欲乐”(Pañcahi kāmaguṇehīti):即由可意、可爱的色、声、香、味、触所构成的五种欲的束缚,或五种欲的部分。“具足”(Samappitāti):即具备,后面的词是它的同义词。“享受”(Paricārayamānāti):即正在娱乐,或正在色等各个对象上运转诸根。“在那个时刻”(Tāyaṃ velāyanti):指在那个享受的时刻。应知,那正是这位天子刚刚出生的时刻。因为就在他结生的刹那,一个如同烧红的金块般闪耀、量达三伽浮他的有身便出生了。他穿着天衣,佩戴天界饰物,戴着天界花鬘,涂着天界香膏,被天界的栴檀粉末均匀地散布全身,为五种天界欲乐所包围、笼罩、裹覆,成为被贪征服者,不见贪的出离——涅槃,发出如牛王般的声音,高唱“他们不知乐”这一偈,在欢喜园中游荡。因此说:“在那个时刻,诵出了这一偈”。显示巴利原文
Dibbehīti devaloke nibbattehi. Pañcahi kāmaguṇehīti manāpiyarūpasaddagandharasaphoṭṭhabbasaṅkhātehi pañcahi kāmabandhanehi kāmakoṭṭhāsehi vā . Samappitāti upetā. Itaraṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ. Paricārayamānāti ramamānā, tesu tesu vā rūpādīsu indriyāni sañcārayamānā. Tāyaṃ velāyanti tasmiṃ paricāraṇakāle. So panassa devaputtassa adhunā abhinibbattakālo veditabbo. Tassa hi paṭisandhikkhaṇeyeva rattasuvaṇṇakkhandho viya virocayamāno tigāvutappamāṇo attabhāvo nibbatti. So dibbavatthanivattho dibbālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍito dibbamālāvilepanadharo dibbehi candanacuṇṇehi samaṃ vikiriyamāno dibbehi pañcahi kāmaguṇehi ovuto nivuto pariyonaddho lobhābhibhūto hutvā lobhanissaraṇaṃ nibbānaṃ apassanto āsabhiṃ vācaṃ bhāsanto viya mahāsaddena ‘‘na te sukhaṃ pajānantī’’ti imaṃ gāthaṃ gāyamāno nandanavane vicari. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tāyaṃ velāyaṃ imaṃ gāthaṃ abhāsī’’ti.
“彼不见欢喜园”(Ye na passanti nandananti):指那些人由于未经历五种欲乐,故不见欢喜园。“人天”(Naradevānanti):即人与天,意为天界的男子。“三十三天”(Tidasānanti):即三倍的十。“具名声者”(Yasassinanti):指具足称为眷属的名声者。显示巴利原文
Ye na passanti nandananti ye tatra pañcakāmaguṇānubhavanavasena nandanavanaṃ na passanti. Naradevānanti devanarānaṃ, devapurisānanti attho. Tidasānanti tikkhattuṃ dasannaṃ. Yasassinanti parivārasaṅkhātena yasena sampannānaṃ.
“某一天神”(Aññatarā devatāti):指一位圣声闻女天神。“回应”(Paccabhāsīti):她为揭示“这位愚痴天女认为此成就恒常、不动,不知它有断、坏、毁灭的法性”的意图,而以“你这愚女,你不了知”这一偈来回应她。“如同阿拉汉之语”(Yathā arahataṃ vacoti):即你不了知,如同阿拉汉之语那样。如此驳斥了她的意图后,现在为了显示阿拉汉之语,她说出了“诸行无常”等。其中,“诸行确实无常”(aniccā vata saṅkhārāti):一切三界诸行,以生起后归于无有的意义而为无常。“是生灭法”(uppādavayadhamminoti):即具有生起与坏灭的自性。“生已即灭”(uppajjitvā nirujjhantīti):这是前者的同义语;或者说,因为生起后即坏灭,故为生灭法。而且,此处以“生起”与“坏灭”之词,即已包含了其间的住立阶段。“它们的止息才是乐”(Tesaṃ vūpasamo sukhoti):那些诸行的止息,即称为涅槃,那才是乐。显示巴利原文
Aññatarā devatāti ekā ariyasāvikā devatā. Paccabhāsīti ‘‘ayaṃ bāladevatā imaṃ sampattiṃ niccaṃ acalaṃ maññati, nāssā chedanabhedanaviddhaṃsanadhammataṃ jānātī’’ti adhippāyaṃ vivaṭṭetvā dassentī ‘‘na tvaṃ bāle’’ti imāya gāthāya patiabhāsi. Yathā arahataṃ vacoti yathā arahantānaṃ vacanaṃ, tathā tvaṃ na jānāsīti. Evaṃ tassā adhippāyaṃ paṭikkhipitvā idāni arahantānaṃ vacanaṃ dassentī aniccātiādimāha. Tattha aniccā vata saṅkhārāti sabbe tebhūmakasaṅkhārā hutvā abhāvatthena aniccā. Uppādavayadhamminoti uppādavayasabhāvā. Uppajjitvā nirujjhantīti idaṃ purimasseva vevacanaṃ. Yasmā vā uppajjitvā nirujjhanti, tasmā uppādavayadhamminoti. Uppādavayaggahaṇena cettha tadanantarā vemajjhaṭṭhānaṃ gahitameva hoti. Tesaṃ vūpasamo sukhoti tesaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ vūpasamasaṅkhātaṃ nibbānameva sukhaṃ. Idaṃ arahataṃ vacoti.
2. 《欢喜经》注释显示巴利原文
2. Nandatisuttavaṇṇanā
12 第十二篇。第二经。“欢喜”:即满足,内心喜悦。“有子者”:指多子之人。因为他的儿子中,有的从事耕作,以谷物装满谷仓;有的经营贸易,带回金银;有的侍奉国王,获得车乘、坐骑、村庄、城镇等。那时,母亲或父亲享受着他们那称为神通的荣华,便心生欢喜。或者在节日等时候,看见打扮装饰的儿子们享受成就,便欢喜。所以说‘有子者因儿子们欢喜’。同样地,“以牛”:正如有子者因儿子们欢喜,牛的主人也看到圆满的牛群,依靠牛享受乳味成就,因牛而欢喜。“依着确实是人的乐源”:此处‘依着’指四种依着——欲依、蕴依、烦恼依、行依。因为诸欲是‘凡依五种欲乐而生起的乐与喜,这是诸欲的味’(中部一·一六六)如是所说之乐的依止处,以‘乐在此依止’这一词义而称为依着。诸蕴也是以蕴为根本之苦的依止处,诸烦恼也是恶趣之苦的依止处,诸行也是后有之苦的依止处。但此处意指欲依。因为五种欲乐以三界中的宫殿、华丽床座、衣饰显示巴利原文
12. Dutiye nandatīti tussati attamano hoti. Puttimāti bahuputto. Tassa hi ekacce puttā kasikammaṃ katvā dhaññassa koṭṭhe pūrenti, ekacce vaṇijjaṃ katvā hiraññasuvaṇṇaṃ āharanti, ekacce rājānaṃ upaṭṭhahitvā yānavāhanagāmanigamādīni labhanti. Atha tesaṃ ānubhāvasaṅkhātaṃ siriṃ anubhavamānā mātā vā pitā vā nandati. Chaṇadivasādīsu vā maṇḍitapasādhite putte sampattiṃ anubhavamāne disvā nandatīti, ‘‘nandati puttehi puttimā’’ti āha. Gohi tathevāti yathā puttimā puttehi, tathā gosāmikopi sampannaṃ gomaṇḍalaṃ disvā gāvo nissāya gorasasampattiṃ anubhavamāno gohi nandati. Upadhī hi narassa nandanāti, ettha upadhīti cattāro upadhī – kāmūpadhi, khandhūpadhi, kilesūpadhi, abhisaṅkhārūpadhīti. Kāmāpi hi ‘‘yaṃ pañca kāmaguṇe paṭicca uppajjati sukhaṃ somanassaṃ, ayaṃ kāmānaṃ assādo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.166) evaṃ vuttassa sukhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato ‘‘upadhiyati ettha sukha’’nti iminā vacanatthena upadhīti vuccati. Khandhāpi khandhamūlakassa dukkhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato, kilesāpi apāyadukkhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato, abhisaṅkhārāpi bhavadukkhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvatoti. Idha pana kāmūpadhi adhippeto. Pañca hi kāmaguṇā tebhūmikādipāsāda-uḷārasayana-vatthālaṅkāra-nāṭakaparivārādivasena paccupaṭṭhitā pītisomanassaṃ upasaṃharamānā naraṃ nandayanti. Tasmā yathā puttā ca gāvo ca, evaṃ imepi upadhī hi narassa nandanāti veditabbā. Na hi so nandati yo nirūpadhīti yo kāmaguṇasampattirahito daliddo dullabhaghāsacchādano , na hi so nandati. Evarūpo manussapeto ca manussanerayiko ca kiṃ nandissati bhagavāti āha.
世尊听了这话后思惟:“这位天女将忧悲之处当作欢喜之处,我将为她指出这是忧悲之处。”于是,就像用一颗果实击落另一颗果实那样,就以同一个譬喻,破斥她的言论,将那首偈颂反转过来,说“他忧愁”。其中,“以子为忧”:当儿子们因远赴他乡等原因而失去、正在失去,或者担心“现在将要失去”时,他忧愁;同样,当儿子们死去、正在死去,或者被贼人、官差抓走,或者落入敌人之手时,因担心他们会死,他也忧愁。当儿子们从树、山等处坠落,手脚等肢体因毁坏而残缺、正在毁坏,或者担心会毁坏时,他也忧愁。正如有子者以九种方式因儿子们而忧愁,牛的主人也同样因牛而忧愁。“依着确实是人的忧愁之源”:正如儿子和牛一样,五种欲乐的依着也是如此——显示巴利原文
Idaṃ sutvā satthā cintesi – ‘‘ayaṃ devatā sokavatthumeva nandavatthuṃ karoti, sokavatthubhāvamassā dīpessāmī’’ti phalena phalaṃ pātento viya tāyeva upamāya tassā vādaṃ bhindanto tameva gāthaṃ parivattetvā socatīti āha. Tattha socati puttehīti videsagamanādivasena puttesu naṭṭhesupi nassantesupi idāni nassissantīti nāsasaṅkīpi socati, tathā matesupi marantesupi corehi rājapurisehi gahitesu vā paccatthikānaṃ hatthaṃ upagatesu vā maraṇasaṅkīpi hutvā socati. Rukkhapabbatādīhi patitvā hatthapādādīnaṃ bhedavasena bhinnesupi bhijjantesupi bhedasaṅkīpi hutvā socati. Yathā ca puttehi puttimā, gosāmikopi tatheva navahākārehi gohi socati. Upadhī hi narassa socanāti yathā ca puttagāvo, evaṃ pañca kāmaguṇopadhīpi –
若彼有欲乐,生起贪欲的众生,
那些欲乐若衰减,他便如被箭刺中般地痛苦。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Tassa ce kāmayānassa, chandajātassa jantuno; Te kāmā parihāyanti, sallaviddhova ruppatī’’ti. (su. ni. 773) –
依前述之理,它们使人忧愁。因此应知:对于人而言,忧愁正是以忧悲之事为因。而“无依著者,他不会忧愁”——若有人已无此四种依著,他是无依著、漏尽的大阿拉汉,又怎会忧愁呢?天女,他不会忧愁。显示巴利原文
Vuttanayena naraṃ socanti. Tasmā narassa socanā sokavatthukamevāti veditabbā. Na hi so socati, yo nirūpadhīti yassa pana catubbidhāpete upadhiyo natthi, so nirupadhi mahākhīṇāsavo kiṃ socissati, na socati devateti.
3. 《无子堪比经》注疏显示巴利原文
3. Natthiputtasamasuttavaṇṇanā
13 13. 第三偈中,“没有像儿子那样的爱”:即使相貌丑陋,人们也把自己的孩子视如金像,像花鬘一样戴在头上等处珍重呵护,即使被他们弄脏、被他们撒尿,也如同涂香脱落一般心生喜悦。因此说:“没有像儿子那样的爱”,意思是:没有能与对儿子的爱相等的爱。“与牛同等的财富”:天神说,世尊,没有与牛群相等的、与牛财相似的其他财富。“与太阳同等的辉耀”:表示没有能与太阳光相等的其他光明。“大海为最”:任何其他所谓的湖泊,都以大海为最上,大海是它们中最殊胜的,世尊,没有能与大海相比的其他储水之处。显示巴利原文
13. Tatiye natthi puttasamaṃ pemanti virūpepi hi attano puttake suvaṇṇabimbakaṃ viya maññanti, mālāguḷe viya sīsādīsu katvā pariharamānā tehi ohaditāpi omuttikāpi gandhavilepanapatitā viya somanassaṃ āpajjanti. Tenāha – ‘‘natthi puttasamaṃ pema’’nti . Puttapemasamaṃ pemaṃ nāma natthīti vuttaṃ hoti. Gosamitaṃ dhananti gohi samaṃ godhanasamaṃ godhanasadisaṃ aññaṃ dhanaṃ nāma natthi bhagavāti āha. Sūriyasamā ābhāti sūriyābhāya samā aññā ābhā nāma natthīti dasseti. Samuddaparamāti ye keci aññe sarā nāma, sabbe te samuddaparamā, samuddo tesaṃ uttamo, samuddasadisaṃ aññaṃ udakanidhānaṃ nāma natthi, bhagavāti.
然而,因为没有能与自爱相等的爱。父母等纵使舍弃儿女,也不加养育,众生依然只养活自己。没有能与谷物相比的财富。当众生遭遇饥荒时,在那样的时刻,金银等乃至牛与水牛,都会被带到谷物主人那里,用以换取谷物。没有可与智慧相等的光明。太阳之类只能照亮一方,且仅能驱散当下的黑暗;而智慧却能让一万个世界同时照亮,并能驱散覆盖过去等时间的黑暗。没有能与降雨相比的湖泊。不论是河流、池塘还是湖泊,都无法与降雨相提并论。当降雨停歇时,大海的水量也只如沾湿山石表面的点滴;而降雨连绵时,直到光音天界都化作一片汪洋。因此,世尊在应答天女那首偈颂时,便说:“没有能与自爱相等的爱”等语。显示巴利原文
Yasmā pana attapemena samaṃ pemaṃ nāma natthi. Mātāpitādayo hi chaḍḍetvāpi puttadhītādayo ca aposetvāpi sattā attānameva posenti. Dhaññena ca samaṃ dhanaṃ nāma natthi. (Yadā hi sattā dubbhikkhā honti), tathārūpe hi kāle hiraññasuvaṇṇādīni gomahiṃsādīnipi dhaññaggahaṇatthaṃ dhaññasāmikānameva santikaṃ gahetvā gacchanti. Paññāya ca samā ābhā nāma natthi. Sūriyādayo hi ekadesaṃyeva obhāsanti, paccuppannameva ca tamaṃ vinodenti. Paññā pana dasasahassimpi lokadhātuṃ ekappajjotaṃ kātuṃ sakkoti, atītaṃsādipaṭicchādakañca tamaṃ vidhamati. Meghavuṭṭhiyā ca samo saro nāma natthi. Nadīvāpi hotu talākādīni vā, vuṭṭhisamo saro nāma natthi. Meghavuṭṭhiyā hi pacchinnāya mahāsamuddo aṅgulipabbatemanamattampi udakaṃ na hoti, vuṭṭhiyā pana pavattamānāya yāva ābhassarabhavanāpi ekodakaṃ hoti. Tasmā bhagavā devatāya paṭigāthaṃ vadanto natthi attasamaṃ pemantiādimāhāti.
4.《刹帝利经》注疏显示巴利原文
4. Khattiyasuttavaṇṇanā
14 第四偈中,“刹帝利是两足者中最胜的”:意思是,在两足者中,国王最为尊贵。“处女”:指在少女时期娶来的妻子。此处说,她在诸妻之中最为殊胜。“长子”:指最先出生的那一个,哪怕他是盲人,或是驼背等残疾人,唯有最先出生者,在这位天神的说法中,便称为最胜的儿子。然而,由于佛陀等才是两足者等类别中真正的最胜者,因此世尊说了答偈。在这里,世尊虽然确实是一切无足等各类众生中的最胜者,但这位一切众生中的最胜者降生时,只出现于两足者之中,因而说“正自觉者是两足者中最胜的”。而此降生于两足者中的他,拥有无可遮止的、一切众生最胜的本质。“良骏”:可指象,也可指马等其他四足众生。凡是能了知事理、具觉知能力者,这样的良骏,就是四足众生中最胜的。这便是它的含义。如同拘吒甘那王那匹糖色马一样。据说,国王想从东门出城,前往塔庙山,来到卡拉姆巴河边时,马站在岸边,不肯下水。国王召来驯马师说:‘哎呀!你调教的这匹马竟不肯下水。’驯马师回答:‘大王,这匹马调教得非常好。它心里在想:“如果我下水,会沾湿尾毛,尾毛……’”显示巴利原文
14. Catutthe khattiyo dvipadanti dvipadānaṃ rājā seṭṭho. Komārīti kumārikāle gahitā. Ayaṃ sesabhariyānaṃ seṭṭhāti vadati. Pubbajoti paṭhamaṃ jāto kāṇo vāpi hotu kuṇiādīnaṃ vā aññataro, yo paṭhamaṃ jāto, ayameva putto imissā devatāya vāde seṭṭho nāma hoti. Yasmā pana dvipadādīnaṃ buddhādayo seṭṭhā, tasmā bhagavā paṭigāthaṃ āha. Tattha kiñcāpi bhagavā sabbesaṃyeva apadādibhedānaṃ sattānaṃ seṭṭho, uppajjamāno panesa sabbasattaseṭṭho dvipadesuyeva uppajjati, tasmā sambuddho dvipadaṃ seṭṭhoti āha. Dvipadesu uppannassa cassa sabbasattaseṭṭhabhāvo appaṭihatova hoti. Ājānīyoti hatthī vā hotu assādīsu aññataro vā, yo kāraṇaṃ jānāti, ayaṃ ājānīyova catuppadānaṃ seṭṭhoti attho. Kūṭakaṇṇarañño guḷavaṇṇaasso viya. Rājā kira pācīnadvārena nikkhamitvā cetiyapabbataṃ gamissāmīti kalambanadītīraṃ sampatto, asso tīre ṭhatvā udakaṃ otarituṃ na icchati , rājā assācariyaṃ āmantetvā, ‘‘aho vata tayā asso sikkhāpito udakaṃ otarituṃ na icchatī’’ti āha. Ācariyo ‘‘susikkhāpito deva asso, etassa hi cittaṃ – ‘sacāhaṃ udakaṃ otarissāmi, vālaṃ temissati, vāle tinte rañño aṅge udakaṃ pāteyyā’ti, evaṃ tumhākaṃ sarīre udakapātanabhayena na otarati, vālaṃ gaṇhāpethā’’ti āha. Rājā tathā kāresi. Asso vegena otaritvā pāraṃ gato. Sussūsāti sussūsamānā. Kumārikāle vā gahitā hotu pacchā vā, surūpā vā virūpā vā, yā sāmikaṃ sussūsati paricarati toseti, sā bhariyānaṃ seṭṭhā. Assavoti āsuṇamāno. Jeṭṭho vā hi hotu kaniṭṭho vā, yo mātāpitūnaṃ vacanaṃ suṇāti, sampaṭicchati, ovādapaṭikaro hoti, ayaṃ puttānaṃ seṭṭho, aññehi sandhicchedakādicorehi puttehi ko attho devateti.
5.《谦逊意经》注疏显示巴利原文
5. Saṇamānasuttavaṇṇanā
15 第五偈:「Ṭhite majjhanhike」(在正午时分)指的是正值正午。「Sannisīvesu」(在聚集而憩息的众生中)指众生到达舒适的地方后,聚集在一起坐下休息。所谓正午时分,正是一切众生在威仪上变得虚弱的时候。不过,这里只是以鸟群为代表来描述的。「Saṇateva」(仿佛在作响)的意思是发出响声、像在大声呼啸一样。而此处所说的“saṇateva”,实际只是指“正在作响”,这是一种譬喻。因为在暑热季节的正午,当四足动物和鸟群都聚集休息时,风灌满了中空的树干和带孔的竹节,树木的枝干与枝干、枝条与枝条互相摩擦,在阿兰若深处便响起巨大的音声。这正是针对这一现象而说的。「Taṃ bhayaṃ paṭibhāti maṃ」(那怖畏在我面前显现):在那样的时候,大森林里回荡的声响,对我来说现前成为一种恐惧。据说,那位天女智慧迟钝,在那一刻因为没能获得自己座处的舒适、没人交谈,也没有同伴,所以才这么说。然而,正是在这样的时候,对那些用完了团食、在远离尘嚣的阿兰若处所选取业处后静坐的比丘来说,却会生起极大的安乐。关于这一点,有如下说法:显示巴利原文
15. Pañcame ṭhite majjhanhiketi ṭhitamajjhanhike. Sannisīvesūti yathā phāsukaṭṭhānaṃ upagantvā sannisinnesu vissamamānesu. Ṭhitamajjhanhikakālo nāmesa sabbasattānaṃ iriyāpathadubbalyakālo. Idha pana pakkhīnaṃyeva vasena dassito. Saṇatevāti saṇati viya mahāviravaṃ viya muccati. Saṇamānameva cettha ‘‘saṇatevā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tappaṭibhāgaṃ nāmetaṃ. Nidāghasamayasmiñhi ṭhitamajjhanhikakāle catuppadagaṇesu ceva pakkhīgaṇesu ca sannisinnesu vātapūritānaṃ susirarukkhānañceva chiddaveṇupabbānañca khandhena khandhaṃ sākhāya sākhaṃ saṅghaṭṭayantānaṃ pādapānañca araññamajjhe mahāsaddo uppajjati . Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Taṃ bhayaṃ paṭibhāti manti taṃ evarūpe kāle mahāaraññassa saṇamānaṃ mayhaṃ bhayaṃ hutvā upaṭṭhāti. Dandhapaññā kiresā devatā tasmiṃ khaṇe attano nisajjaphāsukaṃ kathāphāsukaṃ dutiyakaṃ alabhantī evamāha. Yasmā pana tādise kāle piṇḍapātapaṭikkantassa vivitte araññāyatane kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā nisinnassa bhikkhuno anappakaṃ sukhaṃ uppajjati, yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ –
进入空闲之处,内心寂静的比丘,
正确地观法者,获得非人的喜悦。
若身前身后,乃至任何地方,都没有他人,
独居林中,至为安乐。”(《长老偈》537)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Suññāgāraṃ paviṭṭhassa, santacittassa bhikkhuno; Amānusī ratī hoti, sammā dhammaṃ vipassato’’ti. (dha. pa. 373) ca, ‘‘Purato pacchato vāpi, aparo ce na vijjati; Atīva phāsu bhavati, ekassa vasato vane’’ti. (theragā. 537) ca;
因此,世尊诵出第二首偈颂。其中,「sā rati paṭibhāti maṃ」的意思是:在那样的时候,独自静坐所带来的那种愉悦,便会向我显现。其余内容,如前所述。显示巴利原文
Tasmā bhagavā dutiyaṃ gāthamāha. Tattha sā rati paṭibhāti manti yā evarūpe kāle ekakassa nisajjā nāma, sā rati mayhaṃ upaṭṭhātīti attho. Sesaṃ tādisamevāti.
第六 《睡眠·懈怠(Niddātandī)经》注释显示巴利原文
6. Niddātandīsuttavaṇṇanā
16 在第六首偈颂中,「睡眠」是指如同“阿耆毗舍那!我记得在夏季最后一个月,曾躺下入睡”(《中部》1.387)这类无记性睡眠的前后阶段,发生在有学及凡夫心中的、有行的不善心所——惛沉与睡眠。「懈怠」是指由于极度饥饿、极度寒冷等情况而生起的暂时性懒惰。对此也有说明:“其中,什么是懈怠?即那种懈怠、那种懈怠的状态、那颗懈怠的心、懒惰、懒惰的状态、已变得懒惰的样子,这便称为懈怠。”(《分别论》857)「打呵欠」是指身体打呵欠。「不乐」是指属于不善层面的厌倦感。「饭后昏沉」是指由饮食所引起的昏沉、由饮食所带来的疲乏。至于它们的详细解释,在阿毗达摩(《分别论》)中,依“其中,什么是打呵欠?即那身体的呵欠、那用力的呵欠……”等方式已有阐述。「由此」是指心被睡眠等这些随烦恼染污之后,其清净的显现便被遮蔽了。「不照耀」即不发光、不显露,意指不会显现。「圣道」显示巴利原文
16. Chaṭṭhe niddāti, ‘‘abhijānāmahaṃ, aggivessana, gimhānaṃ pacchime māse niddaṃ okkamitā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.387) evarūpāya abyākataniddāya pubbabhāgāparabhāgesu sekhaputhujjanānaṃ sasaṅkhārikaakusale citte uppannaṃ thinamiddhaṃ. Tandīti aticchātātisītādikālesu uppannaṃ āgantukaṃ ālasiyaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘tattha katamā tandī? Yā tandī tandiyanā tandimanatā ālasyaṃ ālasyāyanā ālasyāyitattaṃ, ayaṃ vuccati tandī’’ti (vibha. 857). Vijambhitāti kāyavijambhanā. Aratīti akusalapakkhā ukkaṇṭhitatā. Bhattasammadoti bhattamucchā bhattakilamatho. Vitthāro pana tesaṃ – ‘‘tattha katamā vijambhitā? Yā kāyassa jambhanā vijambhanā’’tiādinā nayena abhidhamme āgatova. Etenāti etena niddādinā upakkilesena upakkiliṭṭho nivāritapātubhāvo. Nappakāsatīti na jotati, na pātubhavatīti attho. Ariyamaggoti lokuttaramaggo. Idhāti imasmiṃ loke. Pāṇinanti sattānaṃ. Vīriyenāti maggasahajātavīriyena. Naṃ paṇāmetvāti etaṃ kilesajātaṃ nīharitvā. Ariyamaggoti lokiyalokuttaramaggo. Iti maggeneva upakkilese nīharitvā maggassa visuddhi vuttāti.
第七 《难行(Dukkara)经》注释显示巴利原文
7. Dukkarasuttavaṇṇanā
17 在第七节中,「难忍的」(duttitikkhaṃ):即难以忍耐、难以承受的苦。「以不灵巧者」(abyattena):即被愚昧者所持。「沙门法」(sāmaññaṃ):即沙门之行。此天神以此句指出:凡有智慧的善男子,纵使十年、二十年乃至六十年,咬紧牙关、舌抵上腭,以心调伏其心,奉行一座食、一日一食,终生修持梵行,来行此沙门法;而若是愚昧、不灵巧者,世尊说,他们绝不能做到。「其中实在多有险阻」(bahū hi tattha sambādhā):以此句指出,那名为沙门法的圣道中,确有众多险阻;对于为证道果而处于前行阶段的修行者而言,于中实有种种危难。显示巴利原文
17. Sattame duttitikkhanti dukkhamaṃ duadhivāsiyaṃ. Abyattenāti bālena. Sāmaññanti samaṇadhammo. Iminā devatā idaṃ dasseti – yaṃ paṇḍitā kulaputtā dasapi vassāni vīsatipi saṭṭhipi vassāni dante abhidantamādhāya jivhāya tāluṃ āhaccapi cetasā cittaṃ abhiniggaṇhitvāpi ekāsanaṃ ekabhattaṃ paṭisevamānā āpāṇakoṭikaṃ brahmacariyaṃ carantā sāmaññaṃ karonti. Taṃ bhagavā bālo abyatto kātuṃ na sakkotīti. Bahū hi tattha sambādhāti tasmiṃ sāmaññasaṅkhāte ariyamagge bahū sambādhā maggādhigamāya paṭipannassa pubbabhāge bahū parissayāti dasseti.
「cittañce na nivāraye(若心不制止)」意思是:如果对不如理生起的心不加制止,他能行沙门法多少天?即使一天也不能行。因为受心支配的人无法修持沙门法。「pade padaṃ(步步)」指在所缘上、在所缘上。此处,「pada」指所缘。因为凡于何种所缘生起烦恼,愚者即于彼处沉没。或者就威仪路而言亦可如此说。因为在行走等威仪中,凡于何种威仪生起烦恼,他即于彼处沉没。「saṅkappānaṃ(诸意图)」指欲寻等。显示巴利原文
Cittañce na nivārayeti yadi ayoniso uppannaṃ cittaṃ na nivāreyya, kati ahāni sāmaññaṃ careyya? Ekadivasampi na careyya. Cittavasiko hi samaṇadhammaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti. Pade padeti ārammaṇe ārammaṇe. Ārammaṇañhi idha padanti adhippetaṃ. Yasmiṃ yasmiṃ hi ārammaṇe kileso uppajjati, tattha tattha bālo visīdati nāma. Iriyāpathapadampi vaṭṭati. Gamanādīsu hi yattha yattha kileso uppajjati, tattha tattheva visīdati nāma. Saṅkappānanti kāmasaṅkappādīnaṃ.
「kummo va(如龟)」意思是如同龟。「aṅgāni(诸肢)」指头及四肢这五肢。「samodahaṃ(收摄着)」指正在收摄,或收摄之后。「manovitakke(于意中寻)」指在意中生起的寻。以此譬喻说明:犹如乌龟将头及四肢这五肢收进自己壳中,便不给豺狼可乘之机,收摄之后即处于难以被侵害的状态;同样地,比丘将意中生起的诸寻收摄于自身所缘之壳中,便不给魔罗可乘之机,收摄之后即处于难以被侵害的状态。「anissito(无依止者)」指不依止于渴爱与邪见的人。「aheṭhayano(不害者)」即不伤害他人者。「parinibbuto(般涅槃者)」指通过烦恼的涅槃而达般涅槃者。「nūpavadeyya kañci(不应责难任何人)」意思是:对于任何补特伽罗,不欲以其戒行缺失等过失,以任何方式令彼难堪而发出指责;而应先在内心确立“我将适时而说,不适时不说”等五项原则,怀着拯济他人之心,出于悲悯而说。显示巴利原文
Kummo vāti kacchapo viya. Aṅgānīti gīvapañcamāni aṅgāni. Samodahanti samodahanto, samodahitvā vā. Manovitakketi manamhi uppannavitakke. Ettāvatā idaṃ dasseti – yathā kummo soṇḍipañcamāni aṅgāni sake kapāle samodahanto siṅgālassa otāraṃ na deti, samodahitvā cassa appasayhataṃ āpajjati, evamevaṃ bhikkhu manamhi uppannavitakke sake ārammaṇakapāle samodahaṃ mārassa otāraṃ na deti, samodahitvā cassa appasayhataṃ āpajjatīti. Anissitoti taṇhādiṭṭhinissayehi anissito hutvā. Aheṭhayānoti avihiṃsamāno. Parinibbutoti kilesanibbānena parinibbuto. Nūpavadeyya kañcīti yaṃkiñci puggalaṃ ācāravipattiādīsu yāya kāyaci maṅkuṃ kātukāmo hutvā na vadeyya, ‘‘kālena vakkhāmi no akālenā’’tiādayo pana pañca dhamme ajjhattaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā ullumpanasabhāvasaṇṭhitena cittena kāruññataṃ paṭicca vadeyyāti.
第八 惭经注释显示巴利原文
8. Hirīsuttavaṇṇanā
18 「hirīnisedho(以惭制止者)」:由于以惭制止不善法,故称‘以惭制止者’。「koci lokasmiṃ vijjati(世间可有任何人)」——这是在问:世间是否存在这样的人?「yo nindaṃ apabodhati(远离讥嫌者)」:即避开责备而觉醒的人。「asso bhadro kasām iva(如良马于鞭)」:正如一匹良种骏马,能避开鞭子而觉醒,见到鞭影便警觉,不让鞭子落在身上;同样,若有比丘对于真实发生的十种受责骂之事,不使其落到自己身上,避开讥嫌、消除它而觉醒,他这样问:是否有这样的漏尽者?然而,由于不实的责骂而说已解脱的人,并不存在。「tanuyā(少)」意指稀少,即那些以惭制止不善法而安住的漏尽者,为数甚少。「sadā satā(常具念者)」:即恒时具足广大念的人。「antaṃ dukkhassa pappuyya(到达苦的边际)」:达到轮回之苦的尽头,也就是到达作为边际的涅槃。其余如前述。显示巴利原文
18. Aṭṭhame hirīnisedhoti hiriyā akusale dhamme nisedhetīti hirīnisedho. Koci lokasmiṃvijjatīti koci evarūpo vijjatīti pucchati. Yo nindaṃ apabodhatīti yo garahaṃ apaharanto bujjhati. Asso bhadro kasāmivāti yathā bhadro assājānīyo kasaṃ apaharanto bujjhati, patodacchāyaṃ disvā saṃvijjhanto viya kasāya attani nipātaṃ na deti, evameva yo bhikkhu bhūtassa dasaakkosavatthuno attani nipātaṃ adadanto nindaṃ apabodhati apaharanto bujjhati, evarūpo koci khīṇāsavo vijjatīti pucchati. Abhūtakkosena pana parimutto nāma natthi. Tanuyāti tanukā, hiriyā akusale dhamme nisedhetvā carantā khīṇāsavā nāma appakāti attho. Sadā satāti niccakālaṃ sativepullena samannāgatā. Antaṃ dukkhassa pappuyyāti vaṭṭadukkhassa koṭiṃ antabhūtaṃ nibbānaṃ pāpuṇitvā. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
第九 小屋经注释显示巴利原文
9. Kuṭikāsuttavaṇṇanā
19 「kacci te kuṭikā(你的小屋可好?)」这位天神将母亲——怀胎十月所住的处所,视为‘小屋’。如同鸟儿白天忙于觅食,夜晚归于鸟巢,同样,众生虽四处游走,终归回到女人身边,由爱著故,将妻子视为巢。以延续家系的含义,视儿子为传承人,视渴爱为束缚。她将这些提问汇编成偈颂,向世尊发问。世尊回答时,说了‘taggha(的确)’等语。其中,「taggha(的确)」是表示肯定的语气词。「natthi(没有)」的意思是:由于已舍离在家生活而出家,故于轮回中,不再有住母胎、养育妻子、生儿育女之事。显示巴利原文
19. Navame kacci te kuṭikāti ayaṃ devatā dasa māse antovasanaṭṭhānaṭṭhena mātaraṃ kuṭikaṃ katvā, yathā sakuṇā divasaṃ gocarapasutā rattiṃ kulāvakaṃ allīyanti, evamevaṃ sattā tattha tattha gantvāpi mātugāmassa santikaṃ āgacchanti, ālayavasena bhariyaṃ kulāvakaṃ katvā. Kulapaveṇiṃ santānakaṭṭhena putte santānake katvā, taṇhaṃ bandhanaṃ katvā, gāthābandhanena ime pañhe samodhānetvā bhagavantaṃ pucchi, bhagavāpissā vissajjento tagghātiādimāha. Tattha tagghāti ekaṃsavacane nipāto. Natthīti pahāya pabbajitattā vaṭṭasmiṃ vā puna mātukucchivāsassa dārabharaṇassa puttanibbattiyā vā abhāvato natthi.
天神心想:‘我系缚秘密后提出问题,这位沙门才被问到便解答了,他是了知我的心意而说,还是不知而随口说呢?’因此又说了‘kintāhan’等偈颂。其中,‘kintāhan’意为‘我对你(做了什么)?’那时,世尊对她说明,诵出‘mātaraṃ’等偈颂。她对‘sāhu te’偈颂随喜、欢喜,然后礼敬世尊,以香、花鬘等供养后,便返回自己天界的住处了。显示巴利原文
Devatā ‘‘mayā sannāhaṃ bandhitvā guḷhā pañhā pucchitā, ayañca samaṇo pucchitamatteyeva vissajjesi, jānaṃ nu kho me ajjhāsayaṃ kathesi, udāhu ajānaṃ yaṃ vā taṃ vā mukhāruḷhaṃ kathesī’’ti cintetvā puna kintāhantiādimāha. Tattha kintāhanti kiṃ te ahaṃ. Athassā bhagavā ācikkhanto mātarantiādimāha. Sāhu teti gāthāya anumoditvā sampahaṃsitvā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā gandhamālādīhi pūjetvā attano devaṭṭhānameva gatāti.
《沙门成功经》注疏显示巴利原文
10. Samiddhisuttavaṇṇanā
20 第十(经)中,“tapodārāme”(温泉园):因温泉湖而得名此园。据说,在毘跋罗山下方,有地居龙众的五百由旬龙宫,如同天界,宝石铺地,并有园林。在那里,龙众嬉戏之处有一大湖,从湖中流出一条名为“温泉”的河,水是沸腾的。这水为何沸腾?据说王舍城周边有大饿鬼界围绕,此温泉从两座大铁釜地狱之间流来,因此沸腾地流淌。经中对此也说过:显示巴利原文
20. Dasame tapodārāmeti tapodassa tattodakassa rahadassa vasena evaṃ laddhanāme ārāme. Vebhārapabbatassa kira heṭṭhā bhummaṭṭhakanāgānaṃ pañcayojanasatikaṃ nāgabhavanaṃ devalokasadisaṃ maṇimayena talena ārāmuyyānehi ca samannāgataṃ. Tattha nāgānaṃ kīḷanaṭṭhāne mahāudakarahado, tato tapodā nāma nadī sandati kuthitā uṇhodakā. Kasmā panesā edisā? Rājagahaṃ kira parivāretvā mahāpetaloko tiṭṭhati, tattha dvinnaṃ mahālohakumbhinirayānaṃ antarena ayaṃ tapodā āgacchati, tasmā kuthitā sandati. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
“比丘们,此温泉流经之处,有一湖,湖水清澈、清凉、甘美、洁白,有宜人的堤岸,令人愉悦,盛产鱼和龟,并绽放着车轮般大小的莲花。然而,比丘们,这温泉是从两座大地狱之间的隙缝中流出来的,因此它才沸腾地流淌。”(波罗夷 231)显示巴利原文
‘‘Yatāyaṃ, bhikkhave, tapodā sandati, so daho acchodako sītodako sātodako setodako suppatittho ramaṇīyo pahūtamacchakacchapo, cakkamattāni ca padumāni pupphanti. Apicāyaṃ, bhikkhave, tapodā dvinnaṃ mahānirayānaṃ antarikāya āgacchati, tenāyaṃ tapodā kuthitā sandatī’’ti (pārā. 231).
而在该园对面处,形成了一大湖,此寺院即因这湖而得名“温泉园”。显示巴利原文
Imassa pana ārāmassa abhimukhaṭṭhāne tato mahāudakarahado jāto, tassa vasenāyaṃ vihāro ‘‘tapodārāmo’’ti vuccati.
“圆满”(Samiddhī):据说这位长老的身相圆满,极为俊美,令人见之喜悦,因此以“圆满”(Samiddhī)之名而著称。
“清洗肢体”(gattāni parisiñcituṃ):这位精勤修行的长老,在破晓时分精力充沛时起身,让身体适应气候后,来到屋外长约六十肘的大经行处,来回经行。他心想:“如果以汗湿的身体去使用坐卧具,会把它弄脏。”于是为了清洗肢体、沐浴身体而走向水边。他仅穿着一件僧衣站在那里:他穿上内裙,系好腰带,手持袈裟,就这样站着。显示巴利原文
Samiddhīti tassa kira therassa attabhāvo samiddho abhirūpo pāsādiko, tasmā ‘‘samiddhī’’tveva saṅkhaṃ gato. Gattāni parisiñcitunti padhānikatthero esa, balavapaccūse uṭṭhāyāsanā sarīraṃ utuṃ gāhāpetvā bahi saṭṭhihatthamatte mahācaṅkame aparāparaṃ caṅkamitvā ‘‘sedagahitehi gattehi paribhuñjamānaṃ senāsanaṃ kilissatī’’ti maññamāno gattāni parisiñcanatthaṃ sarīradhovanatthaṃ upasaṅkami. Ekacīvaro aṭṭhāsīti nivāsanaṃ nivāsetvā kāyabandhanaṃ bandhitvā cīvaraṃ hatthena gahetvā aṭṭhāsi.
“使肢体洁净如泡沫”(gattāni pubbāpayamāno):令身体光洁,如同泡沫。因为湿身穿袈裟,袈裟会变脏,产生臭味,这不合仪轨。但这位长老是具足威仪的,因此他依循仪轨,沐浴后从水中出来,便这样站着。
至于沐浴的仪轨:前往水边,在某处放下袈裟后,不应仓促地直接跳入水中,而应先观察各个方向,确认无人后,再确认树桩、荆棘、水槽等所在,咳嗽三声。然后面朝下站着,脱下郁多罗僧,将其铺展开来,解开腰带放在袈裟上面。如果没有浴巾,就蹲坐在水边,脱下内裙,若有汗渍之处,便将内裙铺开;若无汗渍,便叠好放置。入水时,应缓缓浸没至肚脐处,不起浪花,不出声响,然后转向来时的方向沉入水中,以保护好袈裟。浮出时也当无声无息,缓缓浮出。沐浴完毕,蹲坐水边,穿好内裙后站起,将内裙整理齐整,系紧腰带,披上袈裟,就这样站着。显示巴利原文
Gattāni pubbāpayamānoti gattāni pubbasadisāni vodakāni kurumāno. Allasarīre pārutaṃ hi cīvaraṃ kilissati duggandhaṃ hoti, na cetaṃ vattaṃ. Thero pana vattasampanno, tasmā vatte ṭhitova nhāyitvā paccuttaritvā aṭṭhāsi. Tattha idaṃ nhānavattaṃ – udakatitthaṃ gantvā yattha katthaci cīvarāni nikkhipitvā vegena ṭhitakeneva na otaritabbaṃ, sabbadisā pana oloketvā vivittabhāvaṃ ñatvā khāṇugumbalatādīni vavatthapetvā tikkhattuṃ ukkāsitvā avakujja ṭhitena uttarāsaṅgacīvaraṃ apanetvā pasāretabbaṃ, kāyabandhanaṃ mocetvā cīvarapiṭṭheyeva ṭhapetabbaṃ. Sace udakasāṭikā natthi, udakante ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā nivāsanaṃ mocetvā sace sinnaṭṭhānaṃ atthi, pasāretabbaṃ. No ce atthi, saṃharitvā ṭhapetabbaṃ. Udakaṃ otarantena saṇikaṃ nābhippamāṇamattaṃ otaritvā vīciṃ anuṭṭhāpentena saddaṃ akarontena nivattitvā āgatadisābhimukhena nimujjitabbaṃ, evaṃ cīvaraṃ rakkhitaṃ hoti. Ummujjantenapi saddaṃ akarontena saṇikaṃ ummujjitvā nhānapariyosāne udakante ukkuṭikena nisīditvā nivāsanaṃ parikkhipitvā uṭṭhāya suparimaṇḍalaṃ nivāsetvā kāyabandhanaṃ bandhitvā cīvaraṃ apārupitvāva ṭhātabbanti.
长老就这样沐浴之后,从水里出来,站在那里看着自己带着水珠的身体。他本就庄严,在破晓时,食物已完全消化,用温水沐浴后,面色变得极为光彩,像从束缚中释放出的棕榈果一样闪耀,像满月,像刚刚绽放的莲花,面容祥瑞庄严,身体肤色也变得十分清净。那时,住在森林丛中的地居天神看到这位庄严的比丘,想要责备这位沙门却不能,被欲贪所征服,心想:‘我要诱惑长老。’于是,她以华丽的装饰庄严起‘有身’,好像点燃了千盏灯芯的明灯,好像让月亮升起,使整座园林一片光明,走近长老,没有行礼,站在空中说出一首偈颂。因此(经中)说:‘那时,有一位天神……乃至……说道。’显示巴利原文
Theropi tathā nhāyitvā paccuttaritvā vigacchamānaudakaṃ kāyaṃ olokayamāno aṭṭhāsi. Tassa pakatiyāpi pāsādikassa paccūsasamaye sammā pariṇatāhārassa uṇhodakena nhātassa ativiya mukhavaṇṇo viroci, bandhanā pavuttatālaphalaṃ viya pabhāsampanno puṇṇacando viya taṅkhaṇavikasitapadumaṃ viya mukhaṃ sassirikaṃ ahosi, sarīravaṇṇopi vippasīdi. Tasmiṃ samaye vanasaṇḍe adhivatthā bhummadevatā pāsādikaṃ bhikkhuṃ olokayamānā samanaṃ niggahetuṃ asakkontī kāmapariḷāhābhibhūtā hutvā, ‘‘theraṃ palobhessāmī’’ti attabhāvaṃ uḷārena alaṅkārena alaṅkaritvā sahassavaṭṭipadīpaṃ pajjalamānā viya candaṃ uṭṭhāpayamānā viya sakalārāmaṃ ekobhāsaṃ katvā theraṃ upasaṅkamitvā avanditvāva vehāse ṭhitā gāthaṃ abhāsi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho aññatarā devatā…pe… ajjhabhāsī’’ti.
“Abhutvā”指未受用五种欲乐。“Bhikkhasī”意为你行乞食。“莫让彼时越你而过”:此处“时”指能受用五种欲乐的年轻青春时期。因为已衰老、佝偻、拄杖、颤抖、被咳嗽与喘息所制的人,便无法受用欲乐。因此,天神针对此“时”说:“莫让彼时越你而过。”其中,“mā upaccagā”意为“不要错过”。显示巴利原文
Abhutvāti pañca kāmaguṇe aparibhuñjitvā. Bhikkhasīti piṇḍāya carasi. Mā taṃ kālo upaccagāti ettha kālo nāma pañcakāmaguṇapaṭisevanakkhamo daharayobbanakālo. Jarājiṇṇena hi obhaggena daṇḍaparāyaṇena pavedhamānena kāsasāsābhibhūtena na sakkā kāme paribhuñjituṃ. Iti imaṃ kālaṃ sandhāya devatā ‘‘mā taṃ kālo upaccagā’’ti āha. Tattha mā upaccagāti mā atikkami.
“我不知时”(Kālaṃ vohaṃ na jānāmi):此处“vo”仅为语气词。“我不知时”是针对死时而言。因为于众生——显示巴利原文
Kālaṃ vohaṃ na jānāmīti ettha voti nipātamattaṃ. Kālaṃ na jānāmīti maraṇakālaṃ sandhāya vadati. Sattānañhi –
“寿命、疾病、死时、舍身与趣,此五者于众生世间,无相而不可知。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Jīvitaṃ byādhi kālo ca, dehanikkhepanaṃ gati;
其中,首先「寿命」是无相的,因为无法限定“仅能活这么久,不会更长”。在羯罗蓝位时,已有众生死去;在頞部陀、闭尸、犍南、半个月、一个月、两个月、三个月、四个月、五个月……乃至十个月时也会死,出胎时也会死,此后在百岁之内或之外都会死。「疾病」也是无相的,因为无法限定“众生只会因这种病而死,不会因别的病”。众生也会因眼病、耳病等其他任何一种病而死。「时」也是无相的,因为无法限定“只应在这个时候死,不应在别的时候”。众生也会在上午、中午等任何一个时间死去。「舍身」也是无相的,因为无法限定“临命终时,身体只应倒在此处,不应倒在别处”。因为生在村内的人,身体可能倒在村外;生在村外的人,也可能倒在村内。同样地,陆生的会倒在水中,水生的会倒在陆地等,应以多种方式广为解说。「趣」也是无相的,因为无法限定“从此处死后,必定生在彼处”。因为从天界死后,也会生在人中;从人界死后,也会生在天界等某处。就这样,世间犹如套在轭上的牛,在五趣中流转。显示巴利原文
Pañcete jīvalokasmiṃ, animittā na nāyare’’.
「时隐蔽而不现」:这时对我来说是隐藏的、不明显的、不可知的。因此,由于这时隐蔽不可知,我完全不享用五种欲乐而行乞食。「时勿超越我」:这里“时”是指修习沙门法的时候。因为这种沙门法,到了生命最后的阶段,当人逾越了三个寿限,变得弯腰拄杖、全身颤抖,被咳嗽与喘息所制伏时,便无法修习。那时,不能如愿领受佛语、受持头陀支、住于阿兰若,也不能在期望的刹那入定,不能进行读诵、讽诵、说法、随喜等。而在年轻的时候,这一切都能做到。因此,这个修习沙门法的时机不要超越我:只要它尚未过去,我便不贪著欲乐而修习沙门法。显示巴利原文
Tattha jīvitaṃ tāva ‘‘ettakameva, na ito para’’nti vavatthānābhāvato animittaṃ. Kalalakālepi hi sattā maranti, abbuda-pesi-ghana-aḍḍhamāsa-ekamāsa-dvemāsa-temāsa-catumāsapañcamāsa…pe… dasamāsakālepi, kucchito nikkhantasamayepi, tato paraṃ vassasatassa antopi bahipi marantiyeva. Byādhipi ‘‘imināva byādhinā sattā maranti, na aññenā’’ti vavatthānābhāvato animitto. Cakkhurogenapi hi sattā maranti sotarogādīnaṃ aññatarenapi. Kālopi, ‘‘imasmiṃ yeva kāle maritabbaṃ, na aññasmi’’nti evaṃ vavatthānābhāvato animitto. Pubbaṇhepi hi sattā maranti majjhanhikādīnaṃ aññatarasmimpi. Dehanikkhepanampi, ‘‘idheva mīyamānānaṃ dehena patitabbaṃ, na aññatthā’’ti evaṃ vavatthānābhāvato animittaṃ. Antogāme jātānañhi bahigāmepi attabhāvo patati, bahigāmepi jātānaṃ antogāmepi. Tathā thalajānaṃ jale, jalajānaṃ thaleti anekappakārato vitthāretabbaṃ. Gatipi, ‘‘ito cutena idha nibbattitabba’’nti evaṃ vavatthānābhāvato animittā. Devalokato hi cutā manussesupi nibbattanti , manussalokato cutā devalokādīnaṃ yattha katthaci nibbattantīti evaṃ yante yuttagoṇo viya gatipañcake loko samparivattati. Tassevaṃ samparivattato ‘‘imasmiṃ nāma kāle maraṇaṃ bhavissatī’’ti imaṃ maraṇassa kālaṃ vohaṃ na jānāmi.
「立于大地」:据说那位天女让长老生起惭耻,视长老如同大梵天、如同火聚,生起恭敬心,从空中降下立于大地,故有此说。虽然她已立于大地,但依来意,又抓住同样的话题说:「汝尚年轻」等等。其中,“年轻”指年纪幼小。“黑发”指头发极为乌黑。「以美好」:以美好的状态。因为有些人虽然年轻,却或是独眼,或是手残等其他缺陷,这样的人便不称为具足美好的青春。然而,若有人相貌端严、美丽、可爱,具足一切成就,无论想要以何种装束打扮,装扮起来犹如天子游行一般,这才叫作「具足美好的青春」。长老正是具有最上等容貌的人,因此天女对他这样说。显示巴利原文
Channo kālo na dissatīti ayaṃ kālo mayhaṃ paṭicchanno avibhūto na paññāyati. Tasmāti yasmā ayaṃ kālo paṭicchanno na paññāyati, tasmā pañca kāmaguṇe abhutvāva bhikkhāmi. Mā maṃ kālo upaccagāti ettha samaṇadhammakaraṇakālaṃ sandhāya ‘‘kālo’’ti āha. Ayañhi samaṇadhammo nāma pacchime kāle tisso vayosīmā atikkantena obhaggena daṇḍaparāyaṇena pavedhamānena kāsasāsābhibhūtena na sakkā kātuṃ. Tadā hi na sakkā hoti icchiticchitaṃ buddhavacanaṃ vā gaṇhituṃ, dhutaṅgaṃ vā paribhuñjituṃ, araññavāsaṃ vā vasituṃ, icchiticchitakkhaṇe samāpattiṃ vā samāpajjituṃ, padabhāṇa-sarabhaññadhammakathā-anumodanādīni vā kātuṃ, taruṇayobbanakāle panetaṃ sabbaṃ sakkā kātunti ayaṃ samaṇadhammakaraṇassa kālo mā maṃ upaccagā, yāva maṃ nātikkamati, tāva kāme abhutvāva samaṇadhammaṃ karomīti āha.
关于“立于大地”(Pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhahitvā):据说,那位天女心想:“这位比丘,何时以时宜说法,何时以非时说法,如何以有因与有果的说法”至此,她对长老生起了惭愧心,将他视为大梵天或火堆一般,怀着敬重之情,从空中降下立于大地。所指即此。显示巴利原文
Pathaviyaṃpatiṭṭhahitvāti sā kira devatā – ‘‘ayaṃ bhikkhu samaṇadhammakaraṇassa kālaṃ nāma katheti, akālaṃ nāma katheti, sahetukaṃ katheti sānisaṃsa’’nti ettāvatāva there lajjaṃ paccupaṭṭhāpetvā mahābrahmaṃ viya aggikkhandhaṃ viya ca naṃ maññamānā gāravajātā ākāsā oruyha pathaviyaṃ aṭṭhāsi, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiñcāpi pathaviyaṃ ṭhitā, yena panatthena āgatā, punapi tameva gahetvā daharo tvantiādimāha. Tattha susūti taruṇo. Kāḷakesoti suṭṭhu kāḷakeso. Bhadrenāti bhaddakena. Ekacco hi daharopi samāno kāṇo vā hoti kuṇiādīnaṃ vā aññataro, so bhadrena yobbanena samannāgato nāma na hoti. Yo pana abhirūpo hoti dassanīyo pāsādiko sabbasampattisampanno, yaṃ yadeva alaṅkāraparihāraṃ icchati, tena tena alaṅkato devaputto viya carati, ayaṃ bhadrena yobbanena samannāgato nāma hoti. Thero ca uttamarūpasampanno, tena naṃ evamāha.
“于欲乐中未曾游戏”(Anikkīḷitāvī kāmesu):意即在欲乐中未曾作游戏之嬉戏,未曾受用,未曾有过欲乐的戏玩。“莫舍现见”(Mā sandiṭṭhikaṃ hitvā):因为,那些大多未证见圣谛、未离欲、不知他人心的天女们,见到比丘们十年、二十年……乃至六十年修行完全清净、无有缺失的梵行后,便生起这样的想法:“这些比丘舍弃了人间的五种欲乐,是为了希求天界的欲乐而修习沙门法。”這位天女也生起此想。显示巴利原文
Anikkīḷitāvīkāmesūti kāmesu akīḷitakīḷo abhuttāvī, akatakāmakīḷoti attho. Mā sandiṭṭhikaṃ hitvāti yebhuyyena hi tā adiṭṭhasaccā avītarāgā aparacittavidūniyo devatā bhikkhū dasapi vassāni vīsatimpi…pe… saṭṭhimpi vassāni parisuddhaṃ akhaṇḍaṃ brahmacariyaṃ caramāne disvā – ‘‘ime bhikkhū mānusake pañca kāmaguṇe pahāya dibbe kāme patthayantā samaṇadhammaṃ karontī’’ti saññaṃ uppādenti, ayampi tattheva uppādesi. Tasmā mānusake kāme sandiṭṭhike, dibbe ca kālike katvā evamāha.
“朋友,我并非如此。”意思是:朋友,我并没有舍弃现见的欲乐后,去追逐、希求、贪求待时的欲乐。而“朋友,我才是舍弃了待时的欲乐”意思是:朋友,我舍弃了待时的欲乐后,去追逐现见的出世间法。如此,长老由于未获得心相续,将天界和人间的五种欲功德都视为待时的;由于获得了心相续,将出世间法视为现见的。即使对于沉迷于五种欲功德中、具足欲乐的贪欲者,心相续中随心所欲地享受所缘也是不会实现的。因为,想要在眼门享受可意所缘的人,必须召来画师、织工、雕塑师等,并吩咐“请准备这个那个”。在此期间,有无数百千亿的心生起又灭去。之后,那个所缘才得以成就。其余诸门也是如此。然而,在入流道之后,须陀洹果即刻生起,中间没有其他心生起的机会。其余诸果也是如此。显示巴利原文
Na kho ahaṃ, āvusoti, āvuso, ahaṃ sandiṭṭhike kāme hitvā kālike kāme na anudhāvāmi na patthemi na pihemi. Kalikañca kho ahaṃ, āvusoti ahaṃ kho, āvuso, kālikaṃ kāmaṃ hitvā sandiṭṭhikaṃ lokuttaradhammaṃ anudhāvāmi. Iti thero cittānantaraṃ aladdhabbatāya dibbepi mānusakepi pañca kāmaguṇe kālikāti akāsi, cittānantaraṃ laddhabbatāya lokuttaradhammaṃ sandiṭṭhikanti. Pañcakāmaguṇesu samohitesupi sampannakāmassāpi kāmino cittānantaraṃ icchiticchitārammaṇānubhavanaṃ na sampajjati. Cakkhudvāre iṭṭhārammaṇaṃ anubhavitukāmena hi cittakārapotthakārarūpakārādayo pakkosāpetvā, ‘‘idaṃ nāma sajjethā’’ti vattabbaṃ hoti. Etthantare anekakoṭisatasahassāni cittāni uppajjitvā nirujjhanti. Atha pacchā taṃ ārammaṇaṃ sampāpuṇāti . Sesadvāresupi eseva nayo. Sotāpattimaggānantaraṃ pana sotāpattiphalameva uppajjati, antarā aññassa cittassa vāro natthi. Sesaphalesupi eseva nayoti.
他领会了此义后,便说出“朋友!正因为欲是待时的”等语。其中,“待时的”如前所述,是指即使具足种种条件,也须在之后的时日才能获得。“多苦”是说,依赖五种欲功德所招感的苦众多,故名多苦。“多愁忧”是说,以这些欲功德为所缘而生起的愁忧众多,故名多愁忧。“此处过患更多”意为,相比于依赖五种欲功德所得的乐,其过患更多,即苦更多。“此法为现见的”是指这出世间法,凡是证得的人,个个不必依靠对他人的信仰,而能以省察智自己现前照见,故为现见。就其能亲自给予果报而言,并没有时间的间隔,故称无时;无时也就是无时性。于此,圣道法在生起的当下即给予果报。因为值得说“你来看此法吧”,所以称为“来见的”。纵使衣、头正在燃烧而不顾,亦当通过修行将其引入自心,所以称为“应导入的”。一切智者(如利根者等)各自都能了知“我的道已修习,果已证得,灭已现证”,所以是“智者各自内证的”。这里只是略说,详细解释则如《清净道论》中“法随念”的注说所示。显示巴利原文
So tamevatthaṃ gahetvā kālikā hi, āvusotiādimāha. Tattha kālikāti vuttanayena samohitasampattināpi kālantare pattabbā. Bahudukkhāti pañca kāmaguṇe nissāya pattabbadukkhassa bahutāya bahudukkhā. Taṃvatthukasseva upāyāsassa bahutāya bahupāyāsā. Ādīnavo ettha bhiyyoti pañca kāmaguṇe nissāya laddhabbasukhato ādīnavo bhiyyo, dukkhameva bahutaranti attho. Sandiṭṭhiko ayaṃ dhammoti ayaṃ lokuttaradhammo yena yena adhigato hoti, tena tena parasaddhāya gantabbataṃ hitvā paccavekkhaṇañāṇena sayaṃ daṭṭhabboti sandiṭṭhiko. Attano phaladānaṃ sandhāya nāssa kāloti akālo, akāloyeva akāliko. Yo ettha ariyamaggadhammo, so attano pavattisamanantarameva phalaṃ detīti attho. ‘‘Ehi passa imaṃ dhamma’’nti evaṃ pavattaṃ ehipassavidhiṃ arahatīti ehipassiko. Ādittaṃ celaṃ vā sīsaṃ vā ajjhupekkhitvāpi bhāvanāvasena attano citte upanayaṃ arahatīti opaneyyiko. Sabbehi ugghaṭitaññūādīhi viññūhi ‘‘bhāvito me maggo, adhigataṃ phalaṃ, sacchikato nirodho’’ti attani attani veditabboti paccattaṃ veditabbo viññūhīti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.146 ādayo) dhammānussativaṇṇanāyaṃ vutto.
那时,那位天女犹如盲人无法分辨色法的微妙一般,不能了知长老所阐述的义理,于是说出“比丘,如何……”等语。在这里,“如何”一词应当与所有词句联系起来理解,即:“比丘,为何世尊说欲是待时的?为何说是多苦的?为何说是多愁忧的?”应当这样连贯起来理解。显示巴利原文
Idāni sā devatā andho viya rūpavisesaṃ therena kathitassa atthe ajānantī kathañca bhikkhūtiādimāha. Tattha kathañcātipadassa ‘‘kathañca bhikkhu kālikā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā, kathaṃ bahudukkhā, kathaṃ bahupāyāsā’’ti? Evaṃ sabbapadehi sambandho veditabbo.
“新”是指:未满五夏的比丘,称为“新”;从五夏开始,称为“中”;从十夏开始,称为“长老”。另有一种说法:未满十夏的为新,从十夏开始为中,从二十夏开始为长老。他说:“在他们当中,我是新的。”显示巴利原文
Navoti aparipuṇṇapañcavasso hi bhikkhu navo nāma hoti, pañcavassato paṭṭhāya majjhimo, dasavassato paṭṭhāya thero. Aparo nayo – aparipuṇṇadasavasso navo, dasavassato paṭṭhāya majjhimo, vīsativassato paṭṭhāya thero. Tesaṃ ahaṃ navoti vadati.
也有这样一种新学比丘:他在七八岁时出家,以沙弥身分度过了十二、十三年,已是久出家者,却自称‘我是新近出家者’。‘此法律’即此法和此律,两者皆是教法的名称。其中,‘法’指两藏,‘律’指律藏。如此,他是在说:‘我于三藏所示之修行道,乃是新来乍到。’显示巴利原文
Navopi ekacco sattaṭṭhavassakāle pabbajitvā dvādasaterasavassāni sāmaṇerabhāveneva atikkanto cirapabbajito hoti, ahaṃ pana acirapabbajitoti vadati. Imaṃ dhammavinayanti imaṃ dhammañca vinayañca. Ubhayampetaṃ sāsanasseva nāmaṃ. Dhammena hettha dve piṭakāni vuttāni, vinayena vinayapiṭakaṃ, iti tīhi piṭakehi pakāsitaṃ paṭipattiṃ adhunā āgatomhīti vadati.
“有大威力者”即拥有大眷属的天众。每一位天王的眷属都有百千乃至千万之多,他们将自己置于高位前来觐见如来。由此显示:“在那里,像我们这样威力微小、生为女人的众生,哪里有机会呢?”显示巴利原文
Mahesakkhāhīti mahāparivārāhi. Ekekassa hi devarañño koṭisatampi koṭisahassampi parivāro hoti, te attānaṃ mahante ṭhāne ṭhapetvā tathāgataṃ passanti. Tattha amhādisānaṃ appesakkhānaṃ mātugāmajātikānaṃ kuto okāsoti dasseti.
“我们也想前来”——那位天女知道:“即使与会大众坐满了整个轮围世界,在宽阔的佛道上也有亲近导师的机会”,所以才这样说。“问吧,比丘!问吧,比丘!”——这是为了让他坚定而重复说的话语。显示巴利原文
Mayampiāgaccheyyāmāti idaṃ sā devatā ‘‘sacepi cakkavāḷaṃ pūretvā parisā nisinnā hoti, mahatiyā buddhavīthiyā satthu santikaṃ gantuṃ labhatī’’ti ñatvā āha. Puccha bhikkhu, puccha bhikkhūti thirakaraṇavasena āmeḍitaṃ kataṃ.
“于所说有想者”:此处,由于依“天、人、在家者、出家者、众生、人、蒂萨、普萨”等方式,一切言说、一切谈论皆以“所说”为其对象,故五取蕴被称为“所说”。凡持有“众生、人、士夫、人、女人、男人”等想者,称为“有想者”;而这些想正是针对“所说”而生起,因此他们便是“于所说有想者”,意即对五蕴生起有众生、人等想。“住著于所说”是指以八种方式住著于五蕴:充满染着的人依贪而住著,充满嗔怒的人依嗔而住著,愚痴的人依痴而住著,执取者依邪见而住著,刚强者依随眠而住著,被系缚者依慢而住著,未达决定性者依疑而住著,散乱者依掉举而住著。“未遍知所说”即未以三种遍知完全了知五蕴。“就进入死神的轭”即进入死神的轭,被投入、抛入其中,也就是进入其范围、方式、内部,意思是走向被死亡所掌控。如此,以此偈颂便说明了“待时的欲”。显示巴利原文
Akkheyyasaññinoti ettha ‘‘devo, manusso, gahaṭṭho, pabbajito, satto, puggalo, tisso, phusso’’tiādinā nayena akkheyyato sabbesaṃ akkhānānaṃ sabbāsaṃ kathānaṃ vatthubhūtato pañcakkhandhā ‘‘akkheyyā’’ti vuccanti. ‘‘Satto naro poso puggalo itthī puriso’’ti evaṃ saññā etesaṃ atthīti saññino, akkheyyesveva saññinoti akkheyyasaññino, pañcasu khandhesu sattapuggalādisaññinoti attho. Akkheyyasmiṃ patiṭṭhitāti pañcasu khandhesu aṭṭhahākārehi patiṭṭhitā. Ratto hi rāgavasena patiṭṭhito hoti, duṭṭho dosavasena, mūḷho mohavasena, parāmaṭṭho diṭṭhivasena, thāmagato anusayavasena, vinibaddho mānavasena, aniṭṭhaṅgato vicikicchāvasena, vikkhepagato uddhaccavasena patiṭṭhito hoti. Akkheyyaṃ apariññāyāti pañcakkhandhe tīhi pariññāhi aparijānitvā. Yogamāyanti maccunoti maccuno yogaṃ payogaṃ pakkhepaṃ upakkhepaṃ upakkamaṃ abbhantaraṃ āgacchanti, maraṇavasaṃ gacchantīti attho. Evamimāya gāthāya kālikā kāmā kathitā.
“遍知”——即依知遍知、度遍知、断遍知这三种遍知而完全了知。其中,什么是“知遍知”?即对五蕴进行辨别:“这是色蕴,这是受蕴,这是想蕴,这是行蕴,这是识蕴,这些是它们的特征、作用、现起、近因”——此即知遍知。什么是“度遍知”?即如此了知后,以四十二种方式观照五蕴:是无常、是苦、是病等——此即度遍知。什么是“断遍知”?即如此观照后,以最上之道断除对五蕴的欲贪——此即断遍知。显示巴利原文
Pariññāyāti ñātapariññā, tīraṇapariññā, pahānapariññāti imāhi tīhi pariññāhi parijānitvā. Tattha katamā ñātapariññā? Pañcakkhandhe parijānāti – ‘‘ayaṃ rūpakkhandho, ayaṃ vedanākkhandho, ayaṃ saññākkhandho, ayaṃ saṅkhārakkhandho, ayaṃ viññāṇakkhandho, imāni tesaṃ lakkhaṇarasapaccupaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānānī’’ti, ayaṃ ñātapariññā. Katamā tīraṇapariññā? Evaṃ ñātaṃ katvā pañcakkhandhe tīreti aniccato dukkhato rogatoti dvācattālīsāya ākārehi. Ayaṃ tīraṇapariññā. Katamā pahānapariññā? Evaṃ tīrayitvā aggamaggena pañcasu khandhesu chandarāgaṃ pajahati. Ayaṃ pahānapariññā.
“不思量说者”——如此以三种遍知完全了知五蕴后,漏尽比丘不再思量那个被称作“说者”的人。此处的“说者”应理解为依业而有的行为原因,意即他不再思量、不再看见那个应被宣说、应被谈论的人。那么,应被宣说的是什么意思?即可以用“蒂萨”或“普萨”等任何名字或姓氏来称呼的人。“因为那个对于他并不存在”,是说那个对于漏尽者而言并不存在。“若有人以此来说他”,意即若有人以“他因贪而染污”、“他因嗔而愤怒”、“他因痴而愚痴”等这样的话来说他,这些原因对于漏尽者是没有的。显示巴利原文
Akkhātāraṃ na maññatīti evaṃ tīhi pariññāhi pañcakkhandhe parijānitvā khīṇāsavo bhikkhu akkhātāraṃ puggalaṃ na maññati. Akkhātāranti kammavasena kāraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ, akkhātabbaṃ kathetabbaṃ puggalaṃ na maññati, na passatīti attho . Kinti akkhātabbanti? ‘‘Tisso’’ti vā ‘‘phusso’’ti vā evaṃ yena kenaci nāmena vā gottena vā pakāsetabbaṃ. Tañhi tassa na hotīti taṃ tassa khīṇāsavassa na hoti. Yena naṃ vajjāti yena naṃ ‘‘rāgena ratto’’ti vā ‘‘dosena duṭṭho’’ti vā ‘‘mohena mūḷho’’ti vāti koci vadeyya, taṃ kāraṇaṃ tassa khīṇāsavassa natthi.
“你若了知,便说”——若你识得这样的漏尽者,便说“我知道”;若不知,则说“我不知道”。“夜叉”是此处呼唤天女时的称呼。如此,这首偈颂说明了九种现见的出世间法。“善哉”是表示请求的词语。显示巴利原文
Sace vijānāsi vadehīti sace evarūpaṃ khīṇāsavaṃ jānāsi, ‘‘jānāmī’’ti vadehi. No ce jānāsi, atha ‘‘na jānāmī’’ti vadehi. Yakkhāti devataṃ ālapanto āha. Iti imāya gāthāya sandiṭṭhiko navavidho lokuttaradhammo kathito. Sādhūti āyācanatthe nipāto.
“凡认为”——指凡自认为“我等同”“我殊胜”或“我低劣”。此语实已包含了“我是殊胜的”等三种慢。这三种慢被含摄时,九种慢也都被含摄了。“他便可能因此与人诤论”——那个人即因这样的慢,与任何人争论:“你凭什么和我比?在出身、姓氏、家族、容貌、博学、头陀功德哪方面能及得上我?”如此,这半首偈颂说明了“世间欲”。显示巴利原文
Yo maññatīti yo attānaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ samo’’ti vā ‘‘visesī’’ti vā ‘‘nihīno’’ti vā maññati. Etena ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’tiādayo tayo mānā gahitāva. Tesu gahitesu nava mānā gahitāva honti. So vivadetha tenāti so puggalo teneva mānena yena kenaci puggalena saddhiṃ – ‘‘kena maṃ tvaṃ pāpuṇāsi, kiṃ jātiyā pāpuṇāsi, udāhu gottena, kulapadesena, vaṇṇapokkharatāya, bāhusaccena, dhutaguṇenā’’ti evaṃ vivadeyya. Iti imāyapi upaḍḍhagāthāya kālikā kāmā kathitā.
“于三种类”——即于三种慢。在“以一法摄色”等句中,“种类”指部分;在“他们是如何的持戒者、具慧者”等句中,指状态;在“比丘们,有三种种类。哪三种?我是殊胜者种类、我是同等者种类、我是低劣者种类”等句中,慢被称为种类。此处正是指慢,所以说“于三种种类中”即于三种慢中。“不动摇者”——此人在略说的三种慢或广说的九种慢中,不动摇、不震动。“等或胜”于他并不存在——这显示了已断除慢的漏尽者,没有“我等同”“我殊胜”“我低劣”之想。后半偈的意义如前所说。如此,这半首偈颂说明了九种现见的出世间法。显示巴利原文
Tīsu vidhāsūti tīsu mānesu. ‘‘Ekavidhena rūpasaṅgaho’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 584) hi koṭṭhāso ‘‘vidho’’ti vutto. ‘‘Kathaṃvidhaṃ sīlavantaṃ vadanti, kathaṃvidhaṃ paññavantaṃ vadantī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.95) ākāro. ‘‘Tisso imā, bhikkhave, vidhā. Katamā tisso ? Seyyohamasmīti vidhā, sadisohamasmīti vidhā, hīnohamasmīti vidhā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.162) māno ‘‘vidhā’’ti vutto. Idhāpi mānova. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tīsu vidhāsūti tīsu mānesū’’ti. Avikampamānoti so puggalo etesu saṅkhepato tīsu , vitthārato navasu mānesu na kampati, na calati. Samo visesīti na tassa hotīti tassa pahīnamānassa khīṇāsavassa ‘‘ahaṃ sadiso’’ti vā ‘‘seyyo’’ti vā ‘‘hīno’’ti vā na hotīti dasseti. Pacchimapadaṃ vuttanayameva. Iti imāyapi upaḍḍhagāthāya navavidho sandiṭṭhiko lokuttaradhammo kathito.
“他断了假名”——在“他如理思惟后进食”等句中,“saṅkhā”指智慧。在“你是否有任何会计、计算师或统计师,能计算恒河的沙数”这句里,指计算。在“因为想为因,才有戏论的部分”等句中,指部分。在“这些种种法的‘saṅkhā’即共同名称”这句里,“saṅkhā”指假名。此处正取此义。因为“Pahāsi saṅkha”这一句的义理即是:漏尽者已断除、已舍弃、已抛弃了“染污者、嗔怒者、愚痴者”这类假名。显示巴利原文
Pahāsisaṅkhanti, ‘‘paṭisaṅkhā yoniso āhāraṃ āhāretī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.120, 239) paññā ‘‘saṅkhā’’ti āgatā. ‘‘Atthi te koci gaṇako vā muddiko vā saṅkhāyako vā, yo pahoti gaṅgāya vālukaṃ gaṇetu’’nti (saṃ. ni. 4.410) ettha gaṇanā. ‘‘Saññānidānā hi papañcasaṅkhā’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 880) koṭṭhāso. ‘‘Yā tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ saṅkhā samaññā’’ti (dha. sa. 1313-1315) ettha paṇṇatti ‘‘saṅkhā’’ti āgatā. Idhāpi ayameva adhippetā. Pahāsi saṅkhanti padassa hi ayamevattho – ratto duṭṭho mūḷho iti imaṃ paṇṇattiṃ khīṇāsavo pahāsi jahi pajahīti.
“未曾得到慢的住处”——即未再依存那分成九种、又复三种的慢。或者,以住处义,母胎被称为“住处”,未来不再以结生方式进入母胎,也是它的意思。此处以过去式动词表未来义。“已断”——即已经切断。“已断结者”——即已切断四种结而安住之人。“无苦”——即没有苦恼。“无望”——即没有渴爱。“正在寻找”——即正在到处寻觅。“不得”——即不能证得、不能获得、不能看见。此处以过去式动词表现在义。“在此处或他处”——即于此世间或他世间。“于一切住处”——即三界有、四种生、五种趣、七种识住、九种众生居,于这一切有情的住处当中,皆不见如此漏尽者在身坏之后,或正在生起,或已经生起。这就是它的意思。依此偈颂,唯开示了现见的出世间法。显示巴利原文
Na vimānamajjhagāti navabhedaṃ tividhamānaṃ na upagato. Nivāsaṭṭhena vā mātukucchi ‘‘vimāna’’nti vuccati, taṃ āyatiṃ paṭisandhivasena na upagacchītipi attho. Anāgatatthe atītavacanaṃ. Acchecchīti chindi. Chinnaganthanti cattāro ganthe chinditvā ṭhitaṃ. Anīghanti niddukkhaṃ. Nirāsanti nittaṇhaṃ. Pariyesamānāti olokayamānā. Nājjhagamunti na adhigacchanti na vindanti na passanti. Vattamānatthe atītavacanaṃ. Idha vā huraṃ vāti idhaloke vā paraloke vā. Sabbanivesanesūti tayo bhavā, catasso yoniyo, pañca gatiyo, satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo, nava sattāvāsā, iti imesupi sabbesu sattanivesanesu evarūpaṃ khīṇāsavaṃ kāyassa bhedā uppajjamānaṃ vā uppannaṃ vā na passantīti attho. Imāya gāthāya sandiṭṭhikaṃ lokuttaradhammameva kathesi.
天女听闻此偈后,亦了达其义,以此因缘,她说出“Imassa khvāhaṃ, bhante”等语。其中,“pāpaṃ na kayirā”这首偈,既可以从十善业道来解释,也可以从八支圣道来解释。先就十善业道而言:“vacasā(以语)”指四种语善行;“manasā(以意)”指三种意善行;“kāyena vā kiñcana sabbaloke(或以身于此一切世间)”指三种身善行。这些便是十善业道法。“kāme pahāyā(已舍诸欲)”一句,以此遮止了放纵欲乐的行为。“satimā sampajāno(具念、正知)”一句,以此摄取了十善业道的因——念与正知。“dukkhaṃ na sevetha anatthasaṃhitanti(不亲近无义相应的苦行)”一句,以此遮止了自我折磨的苦行。如是,天女说:“世尊,我这样理解您所说的法——舍弃了二边,以念与正知为因,结合十善业道法。”显示巴利原文
Imañca gāthaṃ sutvā sāpi devatā atthaṃ sallakkhesi, teneva kāraṇena imassa khvāhaṃ, bhantetiādimāha. Tattha pāpaṃ na kayirāti gāthāya dasakusalakammapathavasenapi kathetuṃ vaṭṭati aṭṭhaṅgikamaggavasenapi. Dasakusalakammapathavasena tāva vacasāti catubbidhaṃ vacīsucaritaṃ gahitaṃ. Manasāti tividhaṃ manosucaritaṃ gahitaṃ. Kāyena vā kiñcana sabbaloketi tividhaṃ kāyasucaritaṃ gahitaṃ. Ime tāva dasakusalakammapathadhammā honti. Kāme pahāyāti iminā pana kāmasukhallikānuyogo paṭikkhitto. Satimā sampajānoti iminā dasakusalakammapathakāraṇaṃ satisampajaññaṃ gahitaṃ. Dukkhaṃ na sevetha anatthasaṃhitanti iminā attakilamathānuyogo paṭisiddho. Iti devatā ‘‘ubho ante vivajjetvā kāraṇehi satisampajaññehi saddhiṃ dasakusalakammapathadhamme tumhehi kathite ājānāmi bhagavā’’ti vadati.
若依八支圣道来解释,则有这样的说法:据说,在那个场合曾有一次盛大的法开示。开示结束时,天女便站在原处,随顺着开示通达了智慧,安住于入流果之后,为了显示她自己所证得的八支圣道,而说出以下这段话。其中,“vacasā(以语)”指正语;然而意并非一支,所以“manasā(以意)”指与道相应的心;“kāyena vā kiñcana sabbaloke(或以身于此一切世间)”指正业,而正命因属于语、业的部分,故也被含摄其中;“satimā(具念)”一词,以此摄取了精进、念与定;“sampajāno(正知)”一词,摄取正见与正思惟。“kāme pahāya, dukkhaṃ na sevetha”这两句,则表示舍弃了二边。如此,天女便说:“世尊,我明白您所说的法,是不堕二边的中道之说。”继而以香、花鬘等供养如来,右绕之后离去。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhaṅgikamaggavasena pana ayaṃ nayo – tasmiṃ kira ṭhāne mahatī dhammadesanā ahosi. Desanāpariyosāne devatā yathāṭhāne ṭhitāva desanānusārena ñāṇaṃ pesetvā sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāya attanā adhigataṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ dassentī evamāha. Tattha vacasāti sammāvācā gahitā, mano pana aṅgaṃ na hotīti manasāti maggasampayuttakaṃ cittaṃ gahitaṃ. Kāyena vā kiñcana sabbaloketi sammākammanto gahito, ājīvo pana vācākammantapakkhikattā gahitova hoti. Satimāti iminā vāyāmasatisamādhayo gahitā. Sampajānotipadena sammādiṭṭhisammāsaṅkappā. Kāme pahāya, dukkhaṃ na sevethātipadadvayena antadvayavajjanaṃ. Iti ime dve ante anupagamma majjhimaṃ paṭipadaṃ tumhehi kathitaṃ, ājānāmi bhagavāti vatvā tathāgataṃ gandhamālādīhi pūjetvā padakkhiṇaṃ katvā pakkāmīti.
1. 《矛经》注疏显示巴利原文
1. Sattisuttavaṇṇanā
21 21. 矛品第一:“sattiyāti”是开示的起始句,意思是以单刃等武器。“omaṭṭhoti”意为被击打。击打有四种:omaṭṭho、ummaṭṭho、maṭṭho、vimaṭṭho。其中,“omaṭṭho”指从高处脸朝下给予的击打;“ummaṭṭho”指从低处脸朝上给予的击打;“maṭṭho”指像门闩上的钉子那般贯穿而入的击打;其余一切情况则总称“vimaṭṭho”。在此处,特指“omaṭṭho”,因为这种伤最为剧烈,箭镞难以拔出,极难医治,身内充满腐血,而腐血无法流出,瘡口被堵住。想要排出腐血的人,必须将身体与床捆绑在一起,头朝下倒悬,如此会遭受死亡或濒临死亡的痛苦。“paribbajeti”的意思是:应当如此安住修持。显示巴利原文
21. Sattivaggassa paṭhame sattiyāti desanāsīsametaṃ. Ekatokhārādinā satthenāti attho. Omaṭṭhoti pahato. Cattāro hi pahārā omaṭṭho ummaṭṭho maṭṭho vimaṭṭhoti. Tattha upari ṭhatvā adhomukhaṃ dinnapahāro omaṭṭho nāma; heṭṭhā ṭhatvā uddhaṃmukhaṃ dinno ummaṭṭho nāma; aggaḷasūci viya vinivijjhitvā gato maṭṭho nāma; seso sabbopi vimaṭṭho nāma. Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne omaṭṭho gahito. So hi sabbadāruṇo duruddharasallo duttikiccho antodoso antopubbalohitova hoti , pubbalohitaṃ anikkhamitvā vaṇamukhaṃ pariyonandhitvā tiṭṭhati. Pubbalohitaṃ niharitukāmehi mañcena saddhiṃ bandhitvā adhosiro kātabbo hoti, maraṇaṃ vā maraṇamattaṃ vā dukkhaṃ pāpuṇāti. Paribbajeti vihareyya.
这首偈颂在说什么呢?就像被矛击中的人,为了拔箭和疗伤而精进努力、奋勉不懈;又如头顶着火的人,为了扑灭火焰而精进努力、奋勉不懈。同样地,比丘为了断除欲贪,应具念、不放逸而安住。显示巴利原文
Imāya gāthāya kiṃ katheti? Yathā sattiyā omaṭṭho puriso sallubbahana-vaṇatikicchanānaṃ atthāya vīriyaṃ ārabhati, payogaṃ karoti parakkamati. Yathā ca ḍayhamāno matthake ādittasīso tassa nibbāpanatthāya vīriyaṃ ārabhati, payogaṃ karoti parakkamati, evameva bhikkhu kāmarāgaṃ pahānāya sato appamatto hutvā vihareyya bhagavāti kathesi.
当时,世尊这样思惟:“这位天神所作的譬喻,虽然举得很有力,但她只取了很少一部分义理来安立。即便反复宣说,也仅仅是在说镇伏欲贪与断除欲贪罢了。只要欲贪尚未被圣道彻底根除,它便会一直紧随。既然如此,我就用这同一个譬喻,转而以初道为基础来开示法要,宣说第二首偈颂。”这首偈颂的含义,应依前文脉络来理解。这是第一。显示巴利原文
Atha bhagavā cintesi – imāya devatāya upamā tāva daḷhaṃ katvā ānītā, atthaṃ pana parittakaṃ gahetvā ṭhitā, punappunaṃ kathentīpi hesā kāmarāgassa vikkhambhanapahānameva katheyya. Yāva ca kāmarāgo maggena na samugghāṭiyati, tāva anubaddhova hoti. Iti tameva opammaṃ gahetvā paṭhamamaggavasena desanaṃ vinivaṭṭetvā desento dutiyaṃ gāthamāha. Tassattho purimānusāreneva veditabboti. Paṭhamaṃ.
《触经》注释显示巴利原文
2. Phusatisuttavaṇṇanā
22 在第二首偈颂中,“不触者不触”:意思是,对于未曾造作的业,其果报不会触及他;也可以说,业本身未被造作,所以果报就不会触及他。因为,若无作者造业,业果便不被感受。“触者于彼处触”:指对于已经造作的业,其果报便会触及他;或者,业本身已被造作,相关的果报便会触及他。因为,若有作者造业,便会感受其果。因此,“触者触,于无过者起害心”:正因不是“未作的业果报不触”,而是“已作的业果报便触”,这是业与果报的自然法则,所以,凡像所说的“对清净无过的善人、对纯洁无可指摘的人起害心”那样,对无过者起害心的人,那业必定触及那位补特伽罗——业本身会触及他,或果报会触及他。因为,他也许有加害他人的能力,也许没有,但他自己却已因此被投置于四恶道之中了。所以世尊说:“那恶业反过来害了愚者,犹如逆风扬撒的细尘。”这是第二。显示巴利原文
22. Dutiye nāphusantaṃ phusatīti kammaṃ aphusantaṃ vipāko na phusati, kammameva vā aphusantaṃ kammaṃ na phusati. Kammañhi nākaroto kariyati. Phusantañca tatophuseti kammaṃ phusantaṃ vipāko phusati, kammameva vā phusati. Kammañhi karoto kariyati. Tasmā phusantaṃ phusati, appaduṭṭhapadosinanti yasmā na aphusantaṃ phusati, phusantañca phusati, ayaṃ kammavipākānaṃ dhammatā, tasmā yo ‘‘appaduṭṭhassa narassa dussati, suddhassa posassa anaṅgaṇassā’’ti evaṃ vutto appaduṭṭhapadosī puggalo, taṃ puggalaṃ kammaṃ phusantameva kammaṃ phusati, vipāko vā phusati. So hi parassa upaghātaṃ kātuṃ sakkoti vā mā vā, attā panānena catūsu apāyesu ṭhapito nāma hoti. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘tameva bālaṃ pacceti pāpaṃ, sukhumo rajo paṭivātaṃva khitto’’ti. Dutiyaṃ.
《结发经》的注释显示巴利原文
3. Jaṭāsuttavaṇṇanā
23 在第三首偈颂“内结”中:“结”是对那如网般渴爱的称呼。因为这种渴爱对于色等所缘,以上下等方式反复生起,具有缠结的意义,就像竹丛等的枝网被称为“结”一样,所以称为“结”。而此渴爱由于在自己的资具与他人的资具、自己的有身与他人的有身、内六处与外六处中生起,故被称为“内结”与“外结”。一切被称为“有情聚”的世间众生,便被这样生起的“结”所缠缚。正如竹等被竹结等缠绕,同样地,整个有情世间都被那渴爱之结所缚、所系、所纠缠,这就是它的含义。因为被这样缠缚,所以偈颂中说:“乔达摩!我向您请问这个。”“乔达摩”是以姓氏称呼世尊。“谁能解开此结?”:意思是问,谁能解开这个像这样在三界中缠成的结?谁有能力解开它?显示巴利原文
23. Tatiye antojaṭāti gāthāyaṃ jaṭāti taṇhāya jāliniyā adhivacanaṃ. Sā hi rūpādīsu ārammaṇesu heṭṭhupariyavasena punappunaṃ uppajjanato saṃsibbanaṭṭhena veḷugumbādīnaṃ sākhājālasaṅkhātā jaṭā viyāti jaṭā. Sā panesā sakaparikkhāraparaparikkhāresu sakaattabhāva-paraattabhāvesu ajjhattikāyatana-bāhirāyatanesu ca uppajjanato antojaṭā bahijaṭāti vuccati. Tāya evaṃ uppajjamānāya jaṭāya jaṭitā pajā. Yathā nāma veḷujaṭādīhi veḷuādayo, evaṃ tāya taṇhājaṭāya sabbāpi ayaṃ sattanikāyasaṅkhātā pajā jaṭitā vinaddhā, saṃsibbitāti attho. Yasmā ca evaṃ jaṭitā, taṃ taṃ gotama pucchāmīti tasmā taṃ pucchāmi. Gotamāti bhagavantaṃ gottena ālapati. Ko imaṃ vijaṭaye jaṭanti imaṃ evaṃ tedhātukaṃ jaṭetvā ṭhitaṃ jaṭaṃ ko vijaṭeyya, vijaṭetuṃ ko samatthoti pucchati.
于是,世尊为了回答那个问题,宣说了“建立在戒之上”等开示。其中,“建立在戒之上”的意思是:安立于四遍清净戒。在这里,世尊被问到解开结的方法,却从戒开始说起,这不应当被理解为“问这个却说那个”。因为,这是为了显示解结者所应具备的基础,所以才在此处宣说戒。显示巴利原文
Athassa bhagavā tamatthaṃ vissajjento sīle patiṭṭhāyātiādimāha. Tattha sīle patiṭṭhāyāti catupārisuddhisīle ṭhatvā. Ettha ca bhagavā jaṭāvijaṭanaṃ pucchito sīlaṃ ārabhanto na ‘‘aññaṃ puṭṭho aññaṃ kathetī’’ti veditabbo. Jaṭāvijaṭakassa hi patiṭṭhādassanatthamettha sīlaṃ kathitaṃ.
“人”指有情。“有慧”是指拥有由业所生、具足三因的结生心之智慧。“修习心与慧”:意思是修习定与观。在这里,以“心”为首,指的是八等至;以“慧”为名,指的是观。“精勤”指具足精进的人。因为精进有燃烧烦恼、遍烧烦恼的意义,故称为“热勤”;他具备此,所以称为“精勤者”。“具方便智”:“方便智”就是所说的智慧,指成就了这种智慧的人。这一句是用来显示“护持智”。“护持智”是指像“这是温习法要的时候,这是请教探讨的时候”这样,依正确的方法,在一切事上都能运用、应当护持的智慧。确实,在这整个问答当中,智慧出现了三次。其中,第一次是“生得慧”,第二次是“观慧”,第三次是总持一切所应作事业的“护持慧”。显示巴利原文
Naroti satto. Sapaññoti kammajatihetukapaṭisandhipaññāya paññavā. Cittaṃ paññañca bhāvayanti samādhiñceva vipassanañca bhāvayamāno. Cittasīsena hettha aṭṭha samāpattiyo kathitā, paññānāmena vipassanā. Ātāpīti vīriyavā. Vīriyañhi kilesānaṃ ātāpanaparitāpanaṭṭhena ‘‘ātāpo’’ti vuccati, tadassa atthīti ātāpī. Nipakoti nepakkaṃ vuccati paññā, tāya samannāgatoti attho. Iminā padena pārihāriyapaññaṃ dasseti. Pārihāriyapaññā nāma ‘‘ayaṃ kālo uddesassa, ayaṃ kālo paripucchāyā’’tiādinā nayena sabbattha kārāpitā pariharitabbapaññā. Imasmiñhi pañhābyākaraṇe tikkhattuṃ paññā āgatā. Tattha paṭhamā jātipaññā, dutiyā vipassanāpaññā, tatiyā sabbakiccapariṇāyikā pārihāriyapaññā.
“他能解开此结”:意思是,那位具足戒等功德的比丘,能够解开此结。譬如有人立于大地,举起磨得锋利的刀,劈开一丛巨大的竹结;同样,这位比丘安立于戒(如同立于大地),以定为磨石,借由精进力执持的护持慧之手,举起锐利的观慧之刀,将落于自相续的一切渴爱之结,一一解开、切断、彻底击碎。显示巴利原文
Soimaṃ vijaṭaye jaṭanti so imehi sīlādīhi samannāgato bhikkhu. Yathā nāma puriso pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhāya sunisitaṃ satthaṃ ukkhipitvā mahantaṃ veḷugumbaṃ vijaṭeyya, evamevaṃ sīle patiṭṭhāya samādhisilāyaṃ sunisitaṃ vipassanāpaññāsatthaṃ vīriyabalapaggahitena pārihāriyapaññāhatthena ukkhipitvā sabbampi taṃ attano santāne patitaṃ taṇhājaṭaṃ vijaṭeyya sañchindeyya sampadāleyyāti.
至此,世尊已开示有学的范畴。现在,为显示已解开缠结、安住的大漏尽者(大阿拉汉),世尊宣说了“yesaṃ…”等偈颂。这样显示了已解开缠结、安住的漏尽者之后,又为了显示缠结被解开的处所,世尊宣说了“yattha nāmañca…”等偈颂。其中,“名”指四种无色蕴。“有对想与色想”:此处,通过有对想摄取了欲有,通过色想摄取了色有。当此二者被摄取时,因其总括三有,故无色有亦同时被摄取。“于此,此结被断除”:意即在三界流转轮回彻底灭尽之处,此结被断除;也就是到达涅槃时,它被断除、被息灭。这是世尊所显示的意义。这是第三颂。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā sekhabhūmiṃ kathetvā idāni jaṭaṃ vijaṭetvā ṭhitaṃ mahākhīṇāsavaṃ dassento yesantiādimāha. Evaṃ jaṭaṃ vijaṭetvā ṭhitaṃ khīṇāsavaṃ dassetvā puna jaṭāya vijaṭanokāsaṃ dassento yattha nāmañcātiādimāha. Tattha nāmanti cattāro arūpino khandhā. Paṭighaṃ rūpasaññā cāti ettha paṭighasaññāvasena kāmabhavo gahito, rūpasaññāvasena rūpabhavo. Tesu dvīsu gahitesu arūpabhavo gahitova hoti bhavasaṅkhepenāti. Etthesā chijjate jaṭāti ettha tebhūmakavaṭṭassa pariyādiyanaṭṭhāne esā jaṭā chijjati, nibbānaṃ āgamma chijjati nirujjhatīti ayaṃ attho dassito hoti. Tatiyaṃ.
《意防护经》注释显示巴利原文
4. Manonivāraṇasuttavaṇṇanā
24 24. 第四首偈颂中,“yato yato”指的是从恶的方面或从善的方面。据说这位天神持有这样的见解:“无论何种心,不管是善等类别的心,还是世间或出世间的心,全都应被阻止,都不应生起。”她所说的“sabbato”意思是“从一切方面”。这时世尊思惟:“这位天神正在宣说不能导向解脱的言论。心,既有应当被阻止的部分,也有应当被修习的部分。我将为她分别解说,把这道理揭示出来。”于是,世尊宣说了第二首偈颂。其中,“na mano saṃyatattamāgataṃ”(心并非已得调御)的意思是:你们所说的“不应从一切方面阻止心”,那么那种不应从一切方面阻止的心究竟指什么呢?所谓“心已得调御”,是指心已达调伏,例如生起“我将布施,我将持守戒律”等心。像这样的心,不应当阻止,反而应当让它更加增长、培育。而“yato yato ca pāpakaṃ”(凡从何处有恶)的意思是:无论何处生起不善,就应当从该处去阻止它。显示巴利原文
24. Catutthe yato yatoti pāpato vā kalyāṇato vā. Ayaṃ kira devatā ‘‘yaṃkiñci kusalādibhedaṃ lokiyaṃ vā lokuttaraṃ vā mano, taṃ nivāretabbameva, na uppādetabba’’nti evaṃladdhikā . Sa sabbatoti so sabbato. Atha bhagavā – ‘‘ayaṃ devatā aniyyānikakathaṃ katheti, mano nāma nivāretabbampi atthi bhāvetabbampi, vibhajitvā namassā dassessāmī’’ti cintetvā dutiyagāthaṃ āha. Tattha na mano saṃyatattamāgatanti, yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘na sabbato mano nivāraye’’ti, kataraṃ taṃ mano, yaṃ taṃ sabbato na nivāretabbanti ce. Mano saṃyatattaṃ āgataṃ, yaṃ mano yattha saṃyatabhāvaṃ āgataṃ, ‘‘dānaṃ dassāmi, sīlaṃ rakkhissāmī’’tiādinā nayena uppannaṃ, etaṃ mano na nivāretabbaṃ, aññadatthu brūhetabbaṃ vaḍḍhetabbaṃ. Yato yato ca pāpakanti yato yato akusalaṃ uppajjati, tato tato ca taṃ nivāretabbanti. Catutthaṃ.
《阿拉汉经》注释显示巴利原文
5. Arahantasuttavaṇṇanā
25 第五首偈颂中,「katāvī」(所作已办)是指通过四种道已完成所应作之事的人。「我所说」:这位天神住在林野间,她听到林野比丘们说着“我用餐”、“我坐下”、“我的钵”、“我的袈裟”这一类世俗言说(vohāra)后,心想:“我以为这些比丘是漏尽者,可漏尽者竟还会有这种基于我取的言论吗?还是没有呢?”为了弄清此事,她便这样发问。显示巴利原文
25. Pañcame katāvīti catūhi maggehi katakicco. Ahaṃ vadāmīti ayaṃ devatā vanasaṇḍavāsinī, sā āraññakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ bhuñjāmi, ahaṃ nisīdāmi, mama patto, mama cīvara’’ntiādikathāvohāraṃ sutvā cintesi – ‘‘ahaṃ ime bhikkhū ‘khīṇāsavā’ti maññāmi, khīṇāsavānañca nāma evarūpā attupaladdhinissitakathā hoti, na hoti nu kho’’ti jānanatthaṃ evaṃ pucchati.
「sāmañña」(通称)指世间的通称、世俗的言说(lokavohāra)。「kusalo」(善巧)指对诸蕴等类别善巧通达。「仅以言说(vohāramattena)」的意思是:他舍弃基于执取的谈论,不制造言说的混乱,而说“我”、“我所”。因为如果他说“诸蕴在用餐、诸蕴在坐下、诸蕴的钵、诸蕴的袈裟”,便会造成言说的混乱,无人能懂。所以他不如此说,只是随顺世间的言说来表达。显示巴利原文
Sāmaññanti lokaniruttiṃ lokavohāraṃ. Kusaloti khandhādīsu kusalo. Vohāramattenāti upaladdhinissitakathaṃ hitvā vohārabhedaṃ akaronto ‘‘ahaṃ, mamā’’ti vadeyya. ‘‘Khandhā bhuñjanti, khandhā nisīdanti, khandhānaṃ patto, khandhānaṃ cīvara’’nti hi vutte vohārabhedo hoti, na koci jānāti. Tasmā evaṃ avatvā lokavohārena voharatīti.
于是天神思惟:“如果这位比丘不是依凭邪见而说,那他是不是依凭慢心而说呢?”因此她又问道:“他是谁(yo hoti)?”这里,“慢吗?(mānaṃ nu kho)”是指那位比丘是不是心中怀有慢,依于慢而说话呢?世尊思惟:“这位天神似乎将这位漏尽者也当作尚有慢心的人。”为了显示“漏尽者的九种慢都已彻底断除”,世尊宣说了答偈。其中,「vidhūpitā」(已破除)意为已摧毁。「mānaganthassa」(慢结的)即慢与结。「maññata」(妄想)指虚妄的构想。对于渴爱、邪见、慢这三种妄想,他都已经超越、彻底跨越。这就是它的含义。其余的意义便很明显了。第五段结束。显示巴利原文
Atha devatā – ‘‘yadi diṭṭhiyā vasena na vadati, mānavasena nu kho vadatī’’ti cintetvā puna yo hotīti pucchi. Tattha mānaṃ nu khoti so bhikkhu mānaṃ upagantvā mānavasena vadeyya nu khoti. Atha bhagavā – ‘‘ayaṃ devatā khīṇāsavaṃ samānaṃ viya karotī’’ti cintetvā, ‘‘khīṇāsavassa navavidhopi māno pahīno’’ti dassento paṭigāthaṃ āha. Tattha vidhūpitāti vidhamitā. Mānaganthassāti mānā ca ganthā ca assa. Maññatanti maññanaṃ. Tividhampi taṇhā-diṭṭhi-māna-maññanaṃ so vītivatto, atikkantoti attho. Sesaṃ uttānatthamevāti. Pañcamaṃ.
《灯光经》注释显示巴利原文
6. Pajjotasuttavaṇṇanā
26 第二十六段解释。在第六首偈颂中,“被问”(puṭṭhuṃ)的意思是去询问。“我们如何能知”(kathaṃ jānemu)的意思是我们如何能够知晓。“日夜”(divārattiṃ)即指白天与夜晚。“处处”(tattha tattha)是指无论火在哪里燃烧,就在那里。“此光明”(esā ābhā)即指佛陀的光明。那么,具体是指什么呢?无论是智慧的光明、喜悦的光明、净信的光明,还是说法开示的光明,一切因佛陀出世而生起的光明,都统称为“佛陀之光明”。这光明是无上的、最殊胜的、无与伦比的。第六段解释完毕。显示巴利原文
26. Chaṭṭhe puṭṭhunti pucchituṃ. Kathaṃ jānemūti kathaṃ jāneyyāma. Divārattinti divā ca rattiñca. Tattha tatthāti yattha yattheva pajjalito hoti, tattha tattha. Esā ābhāti esā buddhābhā. Katamā pana sāti? Ñāṇāloko vā hotu pītiāloko vā pasādāloko vā dhammakathāāloko vā, sabbopi buddhānaṃ pātubhāvā uppanno āloko buddhābhā nāma. Ayaṃ anuttarā sabbaseṭṭhā asadisāti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.
第七、《河流经》注释显示巴利原文
7. Sarasuttavaṇṇanā
27 第二十七段解释。在第七首偈颂中,“诸河流从何处回转”(kuto sarā nivattanti)的意思是:这些生死轮回的河流从哪里回转,或者说,它们依止什么便不再流转?“不立足”(na gādhati)的意思是不得安立、不停驻。“从此”(ato)是就此涅槃而言的。其余文义便容易理解了。第七段解释完毕。显示巴利原文
27. Sattame kuto sarā nivattantīti ime saṃsārasarā kuto nivattanti, kiṃ āgamma nappavattantīti attho. Na gādhatīti na patiṭṭhāti. Atoti ato nibbānato. Sesaṃ uttānatthamevāti. Sattamaṃ.
第八、《大富者经》注释显示巴利原文
8. Mahaddhanasuttavaṇṇanā
28 第二十八段解释。第八首的解释:“大财富者”(mahaddhanā),指那些寻求埋藏的宝藏、纯金等巨大财富的人,因此称为大财富者。“大受用者”(mahābhogā),指拥有金器、银器等丰厚受用之物的人,因此称为大受用者。“相互贪婪”(aññamaññābhigijjhanti)的意思是:彼此之间贪图、渴望、觊觎。“不满足”(analaṅkatā)的意思是:不知足,处于未得遍满的状态。“于勤勉生起之人中”(ussukkajātesu),是指在各种事务生起时的勤勉忙碌中,为了令未生的色等事物生起,以及为了受用已生起的事物而投身其中者。“于有流中随逐之人中”(bhavasotānusārīsu),是指那些在轮回的洪流中漂逐的人。“不勤勉”(anussukā)的意思是:不再热衷于这些忙碌。“家”(agāraṃ)是指与女人共住的房屋。“远离”(virājiyā)的意思是:避开之后。其余文义很容易理解。第八段解释完毕。显示巴利原文
28. Aṭṭhame nidhānagataṃ muttasārādi mahantaṃ dhanametesanti mahaddhanā. Suvaṇṇarajatabhājanādi mahābhogo etesanti mahābhogā. Aññamaññābhigijjhantīti aññamaññaṃ abhigijjhanti patthenti pihenti. Analaṅkatāti atittā apariyattajātā. Ussukkajātesūti nānākiccajātesu anuppannānaṃ rūpādīnaṃ uppādanatthāya uppannānaṃ anubhavanatthāya ussukkesu. Bhavasotānusārīsūti vaṭṭasotaṃ anusarantesu. Anussukāti avāvaṭā. Agāranti mātugāmena saddhiṃ gehaṃ. Virājiyāti virājetvā. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti. Aṭṭhamaṃ.
第九、《四轮经》注释显示巴利原文
9. Catucakkasuttavaṇṇanā
29 第二十九段解释。第九首的解释:「四轮」(catucakka)指的是四种威仪(iriyāpatha)。这里是把威仪比喻为“轮”。「九门」(navadvāra)是指:由九个疮口构成了九个门户。「充满」(puṇṇa)是指:充满了不净之物。「与贪连结」(lobhena saṃyuta)是指:与渴爱(taṇhā)连结在一起。「如何存活」(kathaṃ yātrā bhavissati)这一句,是询问:“像这样的一副身体,究竟要如何出离?如何获得解脱(parimutti)、超越(samatikkamo)呢?”「缚」(naddhi)就是指怨恨(upanāha),它是指先前有嗔怒(kodha),后续又持续怀有怨恨,这样不断现行的一种强力的嗔恨。「皮带」(varattā),就如“断除缚与皮带,以及轭与随行”这首偈颂(《法句经》398;《经集》627)中所说的,渴爱被比喻为皮带,邪见被比喻为轭。而在这里的解释中,除了经文中直接点出的烦恼外,其余的烦恼都应当视为「皮带」(varattā)。所以,连同烦恼的“皮带”也一起斩断,就是这个意思。「欲贪」(icchā lobha):这是同一个法,从想要追求的角度称为“欲”,从贪着粘着的角度称为“贪”。或者是,最初生起的、较微弱的叫作“欲”,后来层层生起的、强力的叫作“贪”。又或者,对于还没得到的东西心生希求叫“欲”,对于已经得到的东西产生粘着叫“贪”。「连同根的爱」(samūlaṃ taṇhaṃ)是指:以无明(avijjā)为根本的、带着根源的渴爱。「拔出」(abbuyha)是指:用最上道智(aggamaggena)将它连根拔除。剩下的文义很容易理解。第九段解释结束。显示巴利原文
29. Navame catucakkanti catuiriyāpathaṃ. Iriyāpatho hi idha cakkanti adhippeto. Navadvāranti navahi vaṇamukhehi navadvāraṃ. Puṇṇanti asucipūraṃ. Lobhena saṃyutanti taṇhāya saṃyuttaṃ. Kathaṃ yātrā bhavissatīti etassa evarūpassa sarīrassa kathaṃ niggamanaṃ bhavissati, kathaṃ mutti parimutti samatikkamo bhavissatīti pucchati. Naddhinti upanāhaṃ, pubbakāle kodho, aparakāle upanāhoti evaṃ pavattaṃ balavakodhanti attho. Varattanti ‘‘chetvā naddhi varattañca, sandānaṃ sahanukkama’’nti gāthāya (dha. pa. 398; su. ni. 627) taṇhā varattā, diṭṭhi sandānaṃ nāma jātaṃ. Idha pana pāḷiniddiṭṭhe kilese ṭhapetvā avasesā ‘‘varattā’’ti veditabbā, iti kilesavarattañca chetvāti attho. Icchā lobhanti ekoyeva dhammo icchanaṭṭhena icchā, lubbhanaṭṭhena lobhoti vutto. Paṭhamuppattikā vā dubbalā icchā, aparāparuppattiko balavā lobho. Aladdhapatthanā vā icchā, paṭiladdhavatthumhi lobho. Samūlaṃ taṇhanti avijjāmūlena samūlakaṃ taṇhaṃ. Abbuyhāti aggamaggena uppāṭetvā. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti. Navamaṃ.
第十、《鹿胫经》注释显示巴利原文
10. Eṇijaṅghasuttavaṇṇanā
30 第十偈:“鹿胫”指如鹿腿般圆润的腿。“消瘦”谓身体不粗壮,匀称适中;或指身体被炎热所凋枯,未以花鬘、香、涂油所滋养。“英武”指具足精进者。“少食”指饮食知量,节制而食;或因禁止非时食而食量少。“不贪求”指于四种资具无有贪求,或谓拒绝味爱。“如狮独行、如龙”:如狮子独行,如龙独行。因群居者易放逸,独行者不放逸,故专取独行之义。“开示”即宣说、讲说。“于此”即在这名色之中。由五种欲功德执取色,由意执取名,再由二者执取不可分离之法后,于此当以五蕴等方式安立。第十。显示巴利原文
30. Dasame eṇijaṅghanti eṇimigassa viya suvaṭṭitajaṅghaṃ. Kisanti athūlaṃ samasarīraṃ. Atha vā ātapena milātaṃ mālāgandhavilepanehi anupabrūhitasarīrantipi attho. Vīranti vīriyavantaṃ. Appāhāranti bhojane mattaññutāya mitāhāraṃ, vikālabhojanapaṭikkhepavasena vā parittāhāraṃ. Alolupanti catūsu paccayesu loluppavirahitaṃ. Rasataṇhāpaṭikkhepo vā esa. Sīhaṃvekacaraṃ nāganti ekacaraṃ sīhaṃ viya, ekacaraṃ nāgaṃ viya. Gaṇavāsino hi pamattā honti, ekacarā appamattā, tasmā ekacarāva gahitāti. Paveditāti pakāsitā kathitā. Etthāti etasmiṃ nāmarūpe. Pañcakāmaguṇavasena hi rūpaṃ gahitaṃ, manena nāmaṃ, ubhayehi pana avinibhuttadhamme gahetvā pañcakkhandhādivasenapettha bhummaṃ yojetabbanti. Dasamaṃ.
沙都拉巴咖衣咖天品。显示巴利原文
4. Satullapakāyikavaggo
善士经注。显示巴利原文
1. Sabbhisuttavaṇṇanā
31 「萨睹拉巴咖依咖天」是指那些因受持善法而受到称赞,由此投生天界的天人。关于他们,有这样一个故事:据说,有许多海商乘船出海。船借风势疾行,到了第七天,大海中央生起巨大灾变,巨浪涌起,海水灌入船中。船即将沉没,众人各自称念自己所信奉的神祇名号,哀号祈求。人群中有一人,心想:‘在此怖畏之中,我当依止于何?’他觉知自己拥有清净的皈依与戒行,便如同瑜伽行者一般结跏趺坐。旁人问他,为何不惧?他告诉众人:‘朋友,我登船那日,曾向比丘僧团行布施,并领受了皈依与戒法,因此我内心没有恐惧。’众人又问:‘那么,尊者,这皈依与戒法,于我等亦有效验吗?’他答:‘有的,有效验。’于是众人请求:‘那就请授予我们吧。’他便将众人分为七组,每组百人,授予他们五戒。其中,第一组百人于海水淹至脚踝时受戒;第二组于水淹至膝时受戒;第三组于水淹至腰时受戒;第四组于水淹至脐时受戒;第五组于水淹至胸时受戒;第六组于水淹至颈时受戒;第七组于海水灌入口中时受戒。他将戒授予他们之后,高声说道:‘你们再也没有其他依怙了,唯一要做的,就是一心忆念这些戒法!’那总计七百人便在此处命终,凭显示巴利原文
31. Satullapakāyikavaggassa paṭhame satullapakāyikāti sataṃ dhammaṃ samādānavasena ullapetvā sagge nibbattāti satullapakāyikā. Tatridaṃ vatthu – sambahulā kira samuddavāṇijā nāvāya samuddaṃ pakkhandiṃsu. Tesaṃ khittasaravegena gacchantiyā nāvāya sattame divase samuddamajjhe mahantaṃ uppātikaṃ pātubhūtaṃ, mahāūmiyo uṭṭhahitvā nāvaṃ udakassa pūrenti. Nāvāya nimujjamānāya mahājano attano attano devatānaṃ nāmāni gahetvā āyācanādīni karonto paridevi. Tesaṃ majjhe eko puriso – ‘‘atthi nu kho me evarūpe bhaye patiṭṭhā’’ti āvajjento attano parisuddhāni saraṇāni ceva sīlāni ca disvā yogī viya pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā nisīdi. Tamenaṃ itare sabhayakāraṇaṃ pucchiṃsu. So tesaṃ kathesi – ‘‘ambho ahaṃ nāvaṃ abhirūhanadivase bhikkhusaṅghassa dānaṃ datvā saraṇāni ceva sīlāni ca aggahesiṃ, tena me bhayaṃ natthī’’ti. Kiṃ pana sāmi etāni aññesampi vattantīti? Āma vattantīti tena hi amhākampi dethāti. So te manusse sataṃ sataṃ katvā satta koṭṭhāse akāsi, tato pañcasīlāni adāsi. Tesu paṭhamaṃ jaṅghasataṃ gopphakamatte udake ṭhitaṃ aggahesi, dutiyaṃ jāṇumatte, tatiyaṃ kaṭimatte, catutthaṃ nābhimatte, pañcamaṃ thanamatte, chaṭṭhaṃ galappamāṇe, sattamaṃ mukhena loṇodake pavisante aggahesi. So tesaṃ sīlāni datvā – ‘‘aññaṃ tumhākaṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ natthi, sīlameva āvajjethā’’ti ugghosesi. Tāni sattapi jaṅghasatāni tattha kālaṃ katvā āsannakāle gahitasīlaṃ nissāya tāvatiṃsabhavane nibbattiṃsu, tesaṃ ghaṭāvaseneva vimānāni nibbattiṃsu. Sabbesaṃ majjhe ācariyassa yojanasatikaṃ suvaṇṇavimānaṃ nibbatti, avasenāni tassa parivārāni hutvā sabbaheṭṭhimaṃ dvādasayojanikaṃ ahosi. Te nibbattakkhaṇeyeva kammaṃ āvajjentā ācariyaṃ nissāya sampattilābhaṃ ñatvā, ‘‘gacchāma tāva, dasabalassa santike amhākaṃ ācariyassa vaṇṇaṃ katheyyāmā’’ti majjhimayāmasamanantare bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamiṃsu, tā devatā ācariyassa vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ ekekaṃ gāthaṃ abhāsiṃsu.
其中,「唯与善士」:意为只与智者、善士共处。此处的“r”为连声字。「应共坐」:指应与他们一同安坐。这是教法的核心要旨,意即于行住坐卧一切威仪中,唯应与善士共同行事。「应作」:即应当如是行持。「交往」:指的是朋友之间的交往。然而,渴爱之交往不应与任何人建立;良朋之交往则应同佛陀、独觉佛及佛弟子建立。此处正是取此义而说。「善」:指佛陀等诸善士。「正法」:指五戒、十戒、四念处等种种正法,但此处特指五戒。「有进益」:意即只会更增上进步。「不退堕」:意即不会堕于任何下劣之处。「不从他处」:如同从沙砾中榨不出油,从其他愚昧之人那里也得不到智慧;而如同从芝麻等种子中可得油一般,了知善法之后,只亲近承事智者,便能求得智慧。「处于忧愁中」:指处于令人忧愁的事缘之中,或处于追随忧愁的众生之中,自身却能无所忧愁。如班都拉·玛拉将军的妻子优婆夷,又如置身五百盗贼之中的法将军同住比丘桑基洽沙弥,皆是如此。显示巴利原文
Tattha sabbhirevāti paṇḍitehi, sappurisehi eva. Ra-kāro padasandhikaro. Samāsethāti saha nisīdeyya. Desanāsīsameva cetaṃ, sabbairiyāpathe sabbhireva saha kubbeyyāti attho. Kubbethāti kareyya. Santhavanti mittasanthavaṃ. Taṇhāsanthavo pana na kenaci saddhiṃ kātabbo, mittasanthavo buddha-paccekabuddha-buddhasāvakehi saha kātabbo. Idaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Satanti buddhādīnaṃ sappurisānaṃ. Saddhammanti pañcasīladasasīlacatusatipaṭṭhānādibhedaṃ saddhammaṃ, idha pana pañcasīlaṃ adhippetaṃ. Seyyo hotīti vaḍḍhi hoti. Na pāpiyoti lāmakaṃ kiñci na hoti. Nāññatoti vālikādīhi telādīni viya aññato andhabālato paññā nāma na labbhati, tilādīhi pana telādīni viya sataṃ dhammaṃ ñatvā paṇḍitameva sevanto bhajanto labhatīti. Sokamajjheti sokavatthūnaṃ sokānugatānaṃ vā sattānaṃ majjhagato na socati bandhulamallasenāpatissa upāsikā viya, pañcannaṃ corasatānaṃ majjhe dhammasenāpatissa saddhivihāriko saṃkiccasāmaṇero viya ca.
「于亲族中辉耀」:指在亲族眷属之中,犹如桑基洽长老的同住沙弥——解脱沙弥那样,光彩出众。据说,这位沙弥是长老的外甥。一日,长老对他说:‘沙弥,你已经长大了,去吧,问明你的戒腊之后再回来,我将为你授具足戒。’他答:‘好的。’便礼敬长老,执持衣钵,来到盗贼森林外靠近村落之处,进入他姊妹所住的村子乞食。姊妹见到他后,顶礼并请他在家中安坐,供养了饭食。他用完饭后,便问起戒腊。姊妹说:‘我不知道,我的母亲知道。’于是沙弥说:‘你们且留在此处,我去母亲那里。’说罢便走进了森林。有个盗贼远远地瞧见了他,便去禀报其他盗贼。盗贼们说:‘听说有个沙弥独自进了森林,去把他带来。’于是有人说:‘我们杀了他吧。’也有人说:‘放他走。’沙弥心中思惟:‘我尚在有学之位,仍有应作之事未办。我应与他们商量,以此保全自身。’他便对盗贼首领说:‘贤友,我为你说个譬喻。’随即诵出了这些偈颂:显示巴利原文
Ñātimajjhe virocatīti ñātigaṇamajjhe saṃkiccatherassa saddhivihāriko adhimuttakasāmaṇero viya sobhati. So kira therassa bhāgineyyo hoti, atha naṃ thero āha – ‘‘sāmaṇera, mahallakosi jāto, gaccha, vassāni pucchitvā ehi, upasampādessāmi ta’’nti. So ‘‘sādhū’’ti theraṃ vanditvā pattacīvaramādāya coraaṭaviyā orabhāge bhaginigāmaṃ gantvā piṇḍāya cari, taṃ bhaginī disvā vanditvā gehe nisīdāpetvā bhojesi. So katabhattakicco vassāni pucchi. Sā ‘‘ahaṃ na jānāmi, mātā me jānātī’’ti āha. Atha so ‘‘tiṭṭhatha tumhe, ahaṃ mātusantikaṃ gamissāmī’’ti aṭaviṃ otiṇṇo. Tamenaṃ dūratova corapuriso disvā corānaṃ ārocesi. Corā ‘‘sāmaṇero kireko aṭaviṃ otiṇṇo, gacchatha naṃ ānethā’’ti āṇāpetvā ekacce ‘‘mārema na’’nti āhaṃsu, ekacce vissajjemāti. Sāmaṇero cintesi – ‘‘ahaṃ sekho sakaraṇīyo, imehi saddhiṃ mantetvā sotthimattānaṃ karissāmī’’ti corajeṭṭhakaṃ āmantetvā, ‘‘upamaṃ te, āvuso, karissāmī’’ti imā gāthā abhāsi –
在久远的过去,于大森林中;
猎人布下种种陷阱,当时便杀死了兔子。
看见兔子死了,鹿和鸟都惊恐不安;
一夜之间,他们全都离开了,心想:“这里发生了不当之事。”
同样,若杀害已得解脱、一无所有的沙门;
旅客将不复前来,财富必定损失。”
这位沙门所说真实无虚,他已解脱,无所执着;
旅人将不再前来,财富必遭损失。
如果在路上看见,却不告诉任何人;
为守护您的真实语,尊者,请随意而行。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ahu atītamaddhānaṃ, araññasmiṃ brahāvane; Ceto kūṭāni oḍḍetvā, sasakaṃ avadhī tadā. ‘‘Sasakañca mataṃ disvā, ubbiggā migapakkhino; Ekarattiṃ apakkāmuṃ, ‘akiccaṃ vattate idha’. ‘‘Tatheva samaṇaṃ hantvā, adhimuttaṃ akiñcanaṃ; Addhikā nāgamissanti, dhanajāni bhavissatī’’ti. ‘‘Saccaṃ kho samaṇo āha, adhimutto akiñcano; Addhikā nāgamissanti, dhanajāni bhavissati. ‘‘Sace paṭipathe disvā, nārocessasi kassaci; Tava saccamanurakkhanto, gaccha bhante yathāsukha’’nti.
他被那伙强盗释放后,离去时虽遇见了亲戚,也没有告诉他们。后来,强盗们追了上来,捉住那些亲戚加以折磨,捶打其胸膛,并对正在悲泣的母亲这样说道:显示巴利原文
So tehi corehi vissajjito gacchanto ñātayopi disvā tesampi na ārocesi. Atha te anuppatte corā gahetvā viheṭhayiṃsu, uraṃ paharitvā paridevamānañcassa mātaraṃ corā etadavocuṃ –
我问了,尊敬的母亲,请告诉我吧——我们要怎样才能认出他呢?
我是这位心志坚定者的母亲,这位是他的父亲;
这些是姐妹,这些是兄弟,全都是这里的亲族。
专注于不当之行,你们见了他却不加制止;
这确是沙门、圣者、依正法而活者的行仪。
专注于真实之言,你们见了他却不加制止;
这位已得解脱的比丘,善行圆满,语如其实;
一切皆已得达无畏,愿诸亲眷平安。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kiṃ te hoti adhimutto, udare vasiko asi; Puṭṭhā me amma akkhāhi, kathaṃ jānemu taṃ maya’’nti. ‘‘Adhimuttassa ahaṃ mātā, ayañca janako pitā; Bhaginī bhātaro cāpi, sabbeva idha ñātayo. ‘‘Akiccakārī adhimutto, yaṃ disvā na nivāraye; Etaṃ kho vattaṃ samaṇānaṃ, ariyānaṃ dhammajīvinaṃ. ‘‘Saccavādī adhimutto, yaṃ disvā na nivāraye; Adhimuttassa suciṇṇena, saccavādissa bhikkhuno; Sabbeva abhayaṃ pattā, sotthiṃ gacchantu ñātayo’’ti.
于是,他们被强盗们释放后,便前往尊者阿提穆达处,对他说道:显示巴利原文
Evaṃ te corehi vissajjitā gantvā adhimuttaṃ āhaṃsu –
尊者,依您这位善行圆满、说真实语比丘的善行,
我们所有人都获得了无畏,平安归来。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Tava tāta suciṇṇena, saccavādissa bhikkhuno; Sabbeva abhayaṃ pattā, sotthiṃ paccāgamamhase’’ti.
那五百名盗贼也生起了净信,在已解脱沙弥座前出家。他带着他们到亲教师前,自己先受具足戒,随后将这五百人收为弟子,并为他们授具足戒。他们安住于已解脱长老的教诫中,全都证得了最上的果位——阿拉汉果。天神领会此义理后说:‘了知正法已,于亲族中辉耀。’显示巴利原文
Tepi pañcasatā corā pasādaṃ āpajjitvā adhimuttassa sāmaṇerassa santike pabbajiṃsu. So te ādāya upajjhāyassa santikaṃ gantvā paṭhamaṃ attanā upasampanno pacchā te pañcasate attano antevāsike katvā upasampādesi. Te adhimuttatherassa ovāde ṭhitā sabbe aggaphalaṃ arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu. Imamatthaṃ gahetvā devatā ‘‘sataṃ saddhammamaññāya ñātimajjhe virocatī’’ti āha.
“常”:即是恒常、安乐或长久安住,他这样说。“你们一切”:即你们所有人。“以方法”:即以此因由。从一切苦中解脱:并非仅仅变成更高贵,并非仅仅获得智慧,在忧愁中不忧愁,在亲族中焕发辉光,生于善趣,长久安住于乐,而是从整个轮回之苦中解脱。第一。显示巴利原文
Sātatanti satataṃ sukhaṃ vā ciraṃ tiṭṭhantīti vadati. Sabbāsaṃ voti sabbāsaṃ tumhākaṃ. Pariyāyenāti kāraṇena. Sabbadukkhā pamuccatīti, na kevalaṃ seyyova hoti, na ca kevalaṃ paññaṃ labhati, sokamajjhe na socati, ñātimajjhe virocati, sugatiyaṃ nibbattati, ciraṃ sukhaṃ tiṭṭhati, sakalasmā pana vaṭṭadukkhāpi muccatīti. Paṭhamaṃ.
《悭经》注疏(Maccharisuttavaṇṇanā)显示巴利原文
2. Maccharisuttavaṇṇanā
32 在第二首偈中,“以悭与以逸故”:即因悭吝(具有隐藏自己成就特征的悭)与因放逸(具有失去正念特征的放逸)。有些人由于悭吝,心想:“把这给人,我的财物就会耗尽,要不然我自己或家人便会缺乏”,因此不布施。另有些人由于沉溺于嬉戏等,连“应当布施”的心念都不生起。就这样,他们不布施。世尊由此说明,如此能带来名誉、带来祥瑞、带来成就、带来安乐的布施,他们却不去做。“希望福者”:指希求前思等各类福的人。“智者有可施”:指了知布施有果报的智者,说这布施确实应当行。显示巴利原文
32. Dutiye maccherā ca pamādā cāti attasampattinigūhanalakkhaṇena maccherena ceva sativippavāsalakkhaṇena pamādena ca. Ekacco hi ‘idaṃ me dentassa parikkhayaṃ gamissati, mayhaṃ vā gharamānusakānaṃ vā na bhavissatī’’ti macchariyena dānaṃ na deti. Ekacco khiḍḍādipasutattā ‘dānaṃ dātabba’’nti cittampi na uppādeti. Evaṃ dānaṃ na dīyatīti evametaṃ yasadāyakaṃ sirīdāyakaṃ sampattidāyakaṃ sukhadāyakaṃ dānaṃ nāma na dīyatītiādinā kāraṇaṃ kathesi. Puññaṃ ākaṅkhamānenāti pubbacetanādibhedaṃ puññaṃ icchamānena. Deyyaṃ hoti vijānatāti atthi dānassa phalanti jānantena dātabbamevāti vadati.
“唯彼愚者被触恼”:即唯独那个愚人,在此世和他世被饥渴所触恼、追随、不得舍离。“因此”:正因唯独他被触恼,所以。“调伏悭”:即调伏了悭吝之垢后。“为胜垢而行布施”:即成为胜伏垢秽者,克服那悭吝之垢后,应行布施。显示巴利原文
Tameva bālaṃ phusatīti taṃyeva bālaṃ idhalokaparalokesu jighacchā ca pipāsā ca phusati anubandhati na vijahati. Tasmāti yasmā tameva phusati, tasmā. Vineyya maccheranti maccheramalaṃ vinetvā. Dajjā dānaṃ malābhibhūti malābhibhū hutvā taṃ maccheramalaṃ abhibhavitvā dānaṃ dadeyya.
“他们不死于死者中”(te matesu na mīyanti):指具足布施戒德的人,不会像无施戒者那样死去。正如死者被团团围绕放置时,纵有许多饮食等物,也不会起身作意“这给此人,这给此人”而行分配;无施戒者也是如此。因此,死者与无施戒者的受用,可说是等同的。由此说明:具施戒者,不死于这类死者之中。“如行路者同行远途,于少物中分赠”:如同在旷野长路上共同行路的旅人,会将少量资粮分赠同伴而行布施;同样,那些共行于无始轮回旷野的同伴,也会将哪怕少许的应施物分赠同伴而行布施,他们便不死于死者中。显示巴利原文
Te matesu na mīyantīti adānasīlatāya maraṇena matesu na mīyanti. Yathā hi mato samparivāretvā ṭhapite bahumhipi annapānādimhi ‘‘idaṃ imassa hotu, idaṃ imassā’’ti uṭṭhahitvā saṃvibhāgaṃ na karoti, evaṃ adānasīlopīti matakassa ca adānasīlassa ca bhogā samasamā nāma honti. Tena dānasīlā evarūpesu matesu na mīyantīti attho. Panthānaṃva saha vajaṃ, appasmiṃ ye pavecchantīti yathā addhānaṃ kantāramaggaṃ saha vajantā pathikā saha vajantānaṃ pathikānaṃ appasmiṃ pātheyye saṃvibhāgaṃ katvā pavecchanti dadantiyeva, evamevaṃ ye pana anamataggaṃ saṃsārakantāraṃ saha vajantā saha vajantānaṃ appasmimpi deyyadhamme saṃvibhāgaṃ katvā dadantiyeva, te matesu na mīyanti.
“Esa dhammo sanantano”:意为“这是古老的法”,或“这是永恒智者的法”。“Appasme ke”:在微少的应施物上,有些人。“Paveccanti”:他们施予。“Bahune ke na dicchare”:而有些人虽拥有大量财富,却不施予。“Sahassena samaṃ mitā”:与千等量,即等同于千倍的布施。显示巴利原文
Esa dhammo sanantanoti esa porāṇako dhammo, sanantanānaṃ vā paṇḍitānaṃ esa dhammoti. Appasmeketi appasmiṃ deyyadhamme eke. Pavecchantīti dadanti. Bahuneke na dicchareti bahunāpi bhogena samannāgatā ekacce na dadanti. Sahassena samaṃ mitāti sahassena saddhiṃ mitā, sahassa dānasadisā hoti.
“Duranvayo”:难以追随、难以践行,意即难以圆满。“Dhammaṃ care”:实践十善业道法。“Yo pi samuñjakañ care”:即使那从事打扫谷场、拍打秸秆等清洁工作的人。“Dārañca posaṃ”:抚养妻子。“Dadaṃ appakasmiṃ”:即使在像一片菜叶那样微少的物品中,也分施于人者,彼即是在行法。“Sataṃ sahassānaṃ”:以千为单位计算的一百,即十万。“Sahassayāginaṃ”:指行千施者,即布施千位比丘或以千金成就布施者,如此之人称为千施者。由此显示相当于供奉十亿比丘或十亿金的食物。“Kalampi nagghanti”:连他的一小份都不值。那位虽从事清洁工作、抚养家眷、施舍微物的人,那些行千施者连他的一小份功德也不值。那个穷人所施的哪怕只是一份份额或一口饭食,其布施与所有这些人的布施相比,不值一小份。“Kalaṃ”:指十六分之一、百分之一或千分之一,此处取百分之一。他说:将那人的布施分成一百份,这些人的布施连其中一份也比不上。显示巴利原文
Duranvayoti duranugamano, duppūroti attho. Dhammaṃ careti dasakusalakammapathadhammaṃ carati. Yopi samuñjakañcareti yo api khalamaṇḍalādisodhanapalālapoṭhanādivasena samuñjakañcarati. Dārañca posanti dārañca posanto. Dadaṃ appakasminti appakasmiṃ paṇṇasākamattasmimpi saṃvibhāgaṃ katvā dadantova so dhammaṃ carati. Sataṃ sahassānanti sahassaṃ sahassaṃ katvā gaṇitānaṃ purisānaṃ sataṃ, satasahassanti attho. Sahassayāginanti bhikkhusahassassa vā yāgo kahāpaṇasahassena vā nibbattito yāgopi sahassayāgo. So etesaṃ atthīti sahassayāgino, tesaṃ sahassayāginaṃ. Etena dasannaṃ vā bhikkhukoṭīnaṃ dasannaṃ vā kahāpaṇakoṭīnaṃ piṇḍapāto dassito hoti. Ye ettakaṃ dadanti, te kalampi nagghanti tathāvidhassāti āha. Yvāyaṃ samuñjakaṃ carantopi dhammaṃ carati, dāraṃ posentopi, appakasmiṃ dadantopi, tathāvidhassa ete sahassayāgino kalampi nagghanti. Yaṃ tena daliddena ekapaṭivīsakamattampi salākabhattamattampi vā dinnaṃ, tassa dānassa sabbesampi tesaṃ dānaṃ kalaṃ nagghatīti. Kalaṃ nāma soḷasabhāgopi satabhāgopi sahassabhāgopi. Idha satabhāgo gahito. Yaṃ tena dānaṃ dinnaṃ, tasmiṃ satadhā vibhatte itaresaṃ dasakoṭisahassadānaṃ tato ekakoṭṭhāsampi nagghatīti āha.
当如来如此衡量布施的价值时,立于近处的天人思惟:“世尊以脚拨开大布施,犹如将百宝之囊掷入地狱;而对这点微小的布施,却高举如同触击月轮。为何此布施的果报更大呢?”为明了此事,他以偈颂请问。其中,“kena”意为“以什么原因”。“mahaggato”意为达到广大,是“vipula”(庞大)的同义词。“samena dinnassa”意为平等施与的布施。随后,世尊为作分析而开示:“dadanti heke”等。其中,“visame niviṭṭhā”意为立足于不平等的身、语、意业中。“chetvā”意为破坏、杀害。“vadhitvā”意为杀害。“socayitvā”意为令他人陷入忧伤。“assumukhā”意为面带泪痕。因令他人哭泣而作的布施,称为泣面施。“sadaṇḍā”意为以杖恐吓、打击而施的布施,称为杖施。“evaṃ”表示:我并不能因身为正自觉者便将大施变为小果报,或将小施变为大果报。然而,此大布施因其来源不清净,故成小果报;而彼小布施……”},{显示巴利原文
Evaṃ tathāgate dānassa agghaṃ karonte samīpe ṭhitā devatā cintesi – ‘‘evaṃ bhagavā mahantaṃ dānaṃ pādena pavaṭṭetvā ratanasatike viya narake pakkhipanto idaṃ evaṃ parittakaṃ dānaṃ candamaṇḍale paharanto viya ukkhipati, kathaṃ nu kho etaṃ mahapphalatara’’nti jānanatthaṃ gāthāya ajjhabhāsi. Tattha kenāti kena kāraṇena. Mahaggatoti mahattaṃ gato, vipulassetaṃ vevacanaṃ. Samena dinnassāti samena dinnassa dānassa. Athassā bhagavā dānaṃ vibhajitvā dassento dadanti heketiādimāha. Tattha visame niviṭṭhāti visame kāyavacīmanokamme patiṭṭhitā hutvā. Chetvāti pothetvā. Vadhitvāti māretvā. Socayitvāti paraṃ sokasamappitaṃ katvā. Assumukhāti assumukhasammissā. Paraṃ rodāpetvā dinnadānañhi assumukhadānanti vuccati. Sadaṇḍāti daṇḍena tajjetvā paharitvā dinnadakkhiṇā sadaṇḍāti vuccati. Evanti nāhaṃ sammāsambuddhatāya mahādānaṃ gahetvā appaphalaṃ nāma kātuṃ sakkomi parittakadānaṃ vā mahapphalaṃ nāma. Idaṃ pana mahādānaṃ attano uppattiyā aparisuddhatāya evaṃ appaphalaṃ nāma hoti, itaraṃ parittadānaṃ attano uppattiyā parisuddhatāya evaṃ mahapphalaṃ nāmāti imamatthaṃ dassento evantiādimāhāti. Dutiyaṃ.
《善经》注疏(Sādhusuttavaṇṇanā)显示巴利原文
3. Sādhusuttavaṇṇanā
33 「udānaṃ udānesī」意思是发出了感兴语。正如油无法被量器容纳而溢流出来,那称为「avasesaka」(溢余);又如水无法被湖容纳而漫溢出去,那称为「ogha」(暴流);同样地,那种喜悦之语无法被心容纳,变得更多,不能在内部安定而向外涌出,这就叫做「udāna」(感兴语)。意思就是发出了如此以喜悦成就的语言。「Saddhāyapi sāhu dānaṃ」意思是:即使出于对业和业果的相信而布施,所施的布施也是好的、吉祥的。「Āhū」意指他们说。那么这两者如何是相等的呢?因为怕死的人不能战斗,怕耗尽财产的人不能布施。说“我要保护生命并战斗”的人并不真正战斗。当舍弃对生命的执着,努力说“哪怕被砍头或死去,我也要取得这个自在(issariya)”时,他才战斗。说“我要保护财富并布施”的人并不布施。当舍弃对财富的执着,努力说“我将行大施”时,他才布施。这样布施与战斗是相同的。更有甚者:如同在战斗中少数勇士能战胜众多怯弱者,同样地,具足信心等功德的人,即使施舍微少的布施,也能摧破众多悭吝,获得广大的布施果报。这样布施与战斗也是相同的。因此他说:显示巴利原文
33. Tatiye udānaṃ udānesīti udāhāraṃ udāhari. Yathā hi yaṃ telaṃ mānaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti vissanditvā gacchati, taṃ avasesakoti vuccati. Yañca jalaṃ taḷākaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, ajjhottharitvā gacchati, taṃ oghoti vuccati, evamevaṃ yaṃ pītivacanaṃ hadayaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, adhikaṃ hutvā anto asaṇṭhahitvā bahi nikkhamati, taṃ udānanti vuccati. Evarūpaṃ pītimayaṃ vacanaṃ nicchāresīti attho. Saddhāyapi sāhu dānanti kammañca kammaphalañca saddahitvāpi dinnadānaṃ sāhu laddhakaṃ bhaddakameva. Āhūti kathenti. Kathaṃ panetaṃ ubhayaṃ samaṃ nāma hotīti? Jīvitabhīruko hi yujjhituṃ na sakkoti, khayabhīruko dātuṃ na sakkoti. ‘‘Jīvitañca rakkhissāmi yujjhissāmi cā’’ti hi vadanto na yujjhati. Jīvite pana ālayaṃ vissajjetvā, ‘‘chejjaṃ vā hotu maraṇaṃ vā, gaṇhissāmetaṃ issariya’’nti ussahantova yujjhati. ‘‘Bhoge ca rakkhissāmi, dānañca dassāmī’’ti vadanto na dadāti. Bhogesu pana ālayaṃ vissajjetvā mahādānaṃ dassāmīti ussahantova deti. Evaṃ dānañca yuddhañca samaṃ hoti. Kiñca bhiyyo? Appāpi santā bahuke jinantīti yathā ca yuddhe appakāpi vīrapurisā bahuke bhīrupurise jinanti, evaṃ saddhādisampanno appakampi dānaṃ dadanto bahumaccheraṃ maddati, bahuñca dānavipākaṃ adhigacchati. Evampi dānañca yuddhañca samānaṃ. Tenevāha –
有信之人即使施予微少之物,
由此,他即于来世获得安乐。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Appampi ce saddahāno dadāti, Teneva so hoti sukhī paratthā’’ti.
为阐明此义,当详述《一衣婆罗门》本生与《安古罗》本生故事。显示巴利原文
Imassa ca panatthassa pakāsanatthaṃ ekasāṭakabrāhmaṇavatthu ca aṅkuravatthu ca vitthāretabbaṃ.
“Dhammaladdhassa”指以如法、正当的方式所获得的财富,也指“得法的人”。此处,“得法的人”即是证得法的圣者。因此,无论是以如法所得的财富作布施,还是布施给得法的圣者,那都是善的。本句偈颂中的“Yo dhammaladdhassa”也是同一意义。“Uṭṭhānavīriyādhigatassa”意为:由勤勉精进而获得的财富。“Vetaraṇiṃ”仅是教法的开显,其意是越过阎魔的韦答拉尼河,乃至等活地狱、黑绳地狱等,超越一切三十一座大地狱。显示巴利原文
Dhammaladdhassāti dhammena samena laddhassa bhogassa dhammaladdhassa ca puggalassa. Ettha puggalo laddhadhammo nāma adhigatadhammo ariyapuggalo. Iti yaṃ dhammaladdhassa bhogassa dānaṃ dhammaladdhassa ariyapuggalassa dīyati, tampi sādhūti attho. Yo dhammaladdhassāti imasmimpi gāthāpade ayameva attho. Uṭṭhānavīriyādhigatassāti uṭṭhānena ca vīriyena ca adhigatassa bhogassa. Vetaraṇinti desanāsīsamattametaṃ. Yamassa pana vetaraṇimpi sañjīvakāḷasuttādayopi ekatiṃsamahānirayepi sabbasova atikkamitvāti attho.
“如理抉择的布施”即经过拣择而施予的布施。其中,抉择有两种:对供养物的抉择与对应供者的抉择。在这两种抉择中,舍弃低劣、粗恶的资具,拣选最殊胜、最精良的物品而行布施,称为对供养物的抉择。放弃外道中那些破戒者,以及九十五种外道之类的应供对象,转而布施给在教法中出家、具足戒等功德的修行者,称为对应供者的抉择。如此,布施便由这两种方式而得以抉择。“为善逝所称扬的”意指:受到善逝赞叹的。在那里,为了说明对应供者的抉择,而有“哪些应供者”等语。“如所播种”这一句,则说明了供养物的抉择。因为,那种拣选最胜应施物的行为,就如同农夫精选无损坏的种子一样。显示巴利原文
Viceyya dānanti vicinitvā dinnadānaṃ. Tattha dve vicinanā dakkhiṇāvicinanaṃ dakkhiṇeyyavicinanañca. Tesu lāmakalāmake paccaye apanetvā paṇītapaṇīte vicinitvā tesaṃ dānaṃ dakkhiṇāvicinanaṃ nāma. Vipannasīle ito bahiddhā pañcanavutipāsaṇḍabhede vā dakkhiṇeyye pahāya sīlādiguṇasampannānaṃ sāsane pabbajitānaṃ dānaṃ dakkhiṇeyyavicinanaṃ nāma. Evaṃ dvīhākārehi viceyya dānaṃ. Sugatappasatthanti sugatena vaṇṇitaṃ. Tattha dakkhiṇeyyavicinanaṃ dassento ye dakkhiṇeyyātiādimāha. Bījāni vuttāni yathāti iminā pana dakkhiṇāvicinanaṃ āha. Avipannabījasadisā hi vicinitvā gahitā paṇītapaṇītā deyyadhammāti.
“乃至对众生能自制,也是好的”,意为:即使在众生之中,能自我克制、调伏,也是善好的。这位天神超越了此前诸天所开示的布施功德,转而开始阐述持戒的功德。“他不加害而行”的意思,是以不伤害众生的方式而行履。“由于他人的责难”是指因为恐惧他人的非议与谴责,“因恐惧”也是指由于害怕受到责备而心生畏惧。相较于布施,“布施虽佳,法句更胜”:这里的“法句”所指的就是涅槃。因为过去与更早之前的诸佛,如迦叶佛等出世时的过去,乃至更早的拘那含佛等出世之时,所有那些从前与更早的圣者们,也都是如此宣说的。第三部分结束。显示巴利原文
Pāṇesupi sādhu saṃyamoti pāṇesu saṃyatabhāvopi bhaddako. Ayaṃ devatā itarāhi kathitaṃ dānānisaṃsaṃ atikkamitvā sīlānisaṃsaṃ kathetumāraddhā. Aheṭhayaṃ caranti avihiṃsanto caramāno. Parūpavādāti parassa upavādabhayena. Bhayāti upavādabhayā. Dānā ca kho dhammapadaṃva seyyoti dānato nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ dhammapadameva seyyo. Pubbe ca hi pubbatare ca santoti pubbe ca kassapabuddhādikāle pubbatare ca koṇāgamanabuddhādikāle, sabbepi vā ete pubbe ca pubbatare ca santo nāmāti. Tatiyaṃ.
4. 《有经》释义显示巴利原文
4. Nasantisuttavaṇṇanā
34 第四偈中,“令人愉悦的”指颜色、声音等可爱的所缘。“不再来”、“不来者”以及“人于死域而不再来”:这是指从名为三界轮回的死域中离去后便不再回来,证得了被称为“不来”的涅槃。因为众生证得涅槃后便不再返回,所以涅槃被称为“不来”。至于那个被诸欲所束缚、放逸懈怠的人,虽然也可被称为“不来者”,却无法证得那种境界,因此才这样说。“欲所生”意为从渴爱之欲而生起。“苦”指五取蕴之苦。第二句是其同义语。“由调伏欲而调伏苦”,即通过调伏渴爱来调伏痛苦的根源。“由调伏苦而究竟调伏苦”,则是通过调伏五取蕴之苦,使得轮回之苦得以平息。“种种”指种种不同的所缘。“思欲之贪”,是由意图、思惟而生起的贪著。在此句中,排除了事相上的欲之后,将烦恼欲称为“欲”。这一义理,应如同在《帕苏拉经》中,当尊者向游方者帕苏拉说出“意图的贪著,即是男子之欲”之后,所阐明的那样来理解。显示巴利原文
34. Catutthe kamanīyānīti rūpādīni iṭṭhārammaṇāni. Apunāgamanaṃ anāgantā puriso maccudheyyāti tebhūmakavaṭṭasaṅkhātā maccudheyyā apunāgamanasaṅkhātaṃ nibbānaṃ anāgantā. Nibbānañhi sattā na punāgacchanti, tasmā taṃ apunāgamananti vuccati. Taṃ kāmesu baddho ca pamatto ca anāgantā nāma hoti, so taṃ pāpuṇituṃ na sakkoti, tasmā evamāha. Chandajanti taṇhāchandato jātaṃ. Aghanti pañcakkhandhadukkhaṃ. Dutiyapadaṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ. Chandavinayā aghavinayoti taṇhāvinayena pañcakkhandhavinayo . Aghavinayā dukkhavinayoti pañcakkhandhavinayena vaṭṭadukkhaṃ vinītameva hoti. Citrānīti ārammaṇacittāni. Saṅkapparāgoti saṅkappitarāgo. Evamettha vatthukāmaṃ paṭikkhipitvā kilesakāmo kāmoti vutto. Ayaṃ panattho pasūrasuttena (su. ni. 830 ādayo) vibhāvetabbo. Pasūraparibbājako hi therena ‘‘saṅkapparāgo purisassa kāmo’’ti vutte –
‘世间种种可爱之物,并不是欲(na te kāmā yāni citrāni loke),
你却把意图之贪(saṅkapparāgaṃ)称为欲(kāmaṃ);
在思惟(saṅkappayaṃ)那些不善寻(akusale vitakke)的时候,
比丘们也都将成为享受欲的人(bhikkhūpi te hehinti kāmabhogī)。’
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Na te kāmā yāni citrāni loke, Saṅkapparāgañca vadesi kāmaṃ; Saṅkappayaṃ akusale vitakke, Bhikkhūpi te hehinti kāmabhogī’’ti. –
游方者这样说后,尊者便对他说道:显示巴利原文
Āha. Atha naṃ thero avoca –
‘如果世间种种可爱之物就是欲(te ce kāmā yāni citrāni loke),
那么,你便不会把意图的贪著说成是欲贪。
见到种种悦意的色相,
你的导师也将是一个耽著欲乐之人。
耳闻种种声,鼻嗅种种香;
舌尝种种味,身触种种可意的触感;
他亦将成为你的导师,一位受用欲乐者。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Te ce kāmā yāni citrāni loke, Saṅkapparāgaṃ na vadesi kāmaṃ; Passanto rūpāni manoramāni, Satthāpi te hehiti kāmabhogī. Suṇanto saddāni, ghāyanto gandhāni; Sāyanto rasāni, phusanto phassāni manoramāni; Satthāpi te hehiti kāmabhogī’’ti.
这里,「贤善者」:在这些所缘中,有智慧的人调伏欲贪。「一切结」:指十种结。「无所」:指远离贪等尘垢的状态。「不堕于苦」:也就是轮回的痛苦不会落在他身上。当时,具寿摩伽罗阇长老听闻“他断灭了诸数”这首偈颂后,在那集会中,他心想:“这首偈颂的意义尚未依相应的连结而显明。”于是他便顺应连结来阐明,说道。其中,「此世或他世」:就是在这一世或他世。「人中最上者、为人作利益者」:虽然一切漏尽者都是人中最上者与作利益他人者,但长老实际上是针对具足十力的世尊而说这话。「如果有人礼敬他,他们是否值得称赞?」:如果天和人礼敬这样的解脱者,那些通过身体、语言或随顺实践来礼敬世尊的人,他们是值得称赞,还是不值得称赞?「比丘」:这是称呼摩伽罗阇长老。「完全了知法」:指完全了知四谛的法。「他们也超越了执着」:那些通过身体、语言或随顺实践来礼敬他的人,完全了知四谛之后,舍弃了疑,他们既超越执着,也值得称赞。这是第四个问答。显示巴利原文
Athettha dhīrāti atha etesu ārammaṇesu paṇḍitā chandarāgaṃ vinayanti. Saṃyojanaṃ sabbanti dasavidhampi saṃyojanaṃ. Akiñcananti rāgakiñcanādivirahitaṃ. Nānupatanti dukkhāti vaṭṭadukkhā pana tassa upari na patanti. Iccāyasmāmogharājāti, ‘‘pahāsi saṅkha’’nti gāthaṃ sutvā tassaṃ parisati anusandhikusalo mogharājā nāma thero ‘‘imissā gāthāya attho na yathānusandhiṃ gato’’ti cintetvā yathānusandhiṃ ghaṭento evamāha. Tattha idha vā huraṃ vāti idhaloke vā paraloke vā. Naruttamaṃ atthacaraṃ narānanti kiñcāpi sabbe khīṇāsavā naruttamā ceva atthacarā ca narānaṃ, thero pana dasabalaṃ sandhāyevamāha. Ye taṃ namassanti pasaṃsiyā teti yadi tathāvimuttaṃ devamanussā namassanti, atha ye taṃ bhagavantaṃ kāyena vā vācāya vā anupaṭipattiyā vā namassanti, te kiṃ pasaṃsiyā, udāhu apasaṃsiyāti. Bhikkhūti mogharājattheraṃ ālapati. Aññāya dhammanti catusaccadhammaṃ jānitvā. Saṅgātigā tepi bhavantīti ye taṃ kāyena vā vācāya vā anupaṭipattiyā vā namassanti. Te catusaccadhammaṃ aññāya vicikicchaṃ pahāya saṅgātigāpi honti, pasaṃsiyāpi hontīti. Catutthaṃ.
五、嫌恨想经注显示巴利原文
5. Ujjhānasaññisuttavaṇṇanā
35 35. 第五,「嫌恨想者」:并非有一个单独名为嫌恨想的天界,而是这些天神因为对如来受用四资具的方式感到不满,才来发牢骚。据说她们心里这样想:“沙门乔达摩教导比丘们要满足于粪扫衣、乞食、树下坐卧具、腐尿药,称赞那最为简朴的生活,可他自己却穿着精工细制的布料、亚麻等上好的袈裟,享用堪与国王相比的最上等食物,睡在如同天宫一般华美的香室中美妙的床榻上,服用酥油、鲜奶油等药物,日日为大众说法。他说的是一套,做的却是另一套。”她们就这样心怀不满而来。因此,结集法藏的长老们便称她们为“嫌恨想者”。显示巴利原文
35. Pañcame ujjhānasaññikāti ujjhānasaññī devaloko nāma pāṭiyekko natthi, imā pana devatā tathāgatassa catupaccayaparibhogaṃ nissāya ujjhāyamānā āgatā. Tāsaṃ kira evaṃ ahosi – ‘‘samaṇo gotamo bhikkhūnaṃ paṃsukūlacīvara-piṇḍiyālopa-rukkhamūlasenāsanapūtimuttabhesajjehi santosasseva pariyantakāritaṃ vaṇṇeti, sayaṃ pana pattuṇṇadukūla khomādīni paṇītacīvarāni dhāreti, rājārahaṃ uttamaṃ bhojanaṃ bhuñjati, devavimānakappāya gandhakuṭiyā varasayane sayati, sappinavanītādīni bhesajjāni paṭisevati, divasaṃ mahājanassa dhammaṃ deseti, vacanamassa aññato gacchati, kiriyā aññato’’ti ujjhāyamānā āgamiṃsu. Tena tāsaṃ dhammasaṅgāhakattherehi ‘‘ujjhānasaññikā’’ti nāmaṃ gahitaṃ.
「实为异样」:指以另一种方式存在。「以诈欺」:即通过诈术、欺骗,意思是欺骗了他人。「如骗人者」:「骗人者」就是捕鸟者。他本身并非丛林,却用树枝、树叶等把自己遮盖起来,显出丛林的样子,等到孔雀、鹧鸪等鸟飞来时,就把它们杀死以抚养妻儿。同样地,就像那骗人者以这种欺诈手段欺骗后享用鸟肉,伪善者也用粪扫衣掩盖自己,凭借巧言善辩欺骗大众之后,到处行走啖食;他的一切受用——即「其以偷盗所受用之物」——也就是他所有的四资具受用,都称为偷盗受用。那些天神是针对世尊而说这番话的。「贤者遍知」:意思是贤者们知道“这是造作的人,或不是造作的人”。就这样,那些天神自以为“我们也是贤者,如来也一样”,而说了这些话。显示巴利原文
Aññathā santanti aññenākārena bhūtaṃ. Nikaccāti nikatiyā vañcanāya, vañcetvāti attho. Kitavassevāti kitavo vuccati sākuṇiko. So hi agumbova samāno sākhapaṇṇādipaṭicchādanena gumbavaṇṇaṃ dassetvā upagate moratittirādayo sakuṇe māretvā dārabharaṇaṃ karoti. Iti tassa kitavassa imāya vañcanāya evaṃ vañcetvā sakuṇamaṃsabhojanaṃ viya kuhakassāpi paṃsukūlena attānaṃ paṭicchādetvā kathāchekatāya mahājanaṃ vañcetvā khādamānassa vicarato. Bhuttaṃ theyyena tassa tanti sabbopi tassa catupaccayaparibhogo theyyena paribhutto nāma hotīti devatā bhagavantaṃ sandhāya vadati. Parijānanti paṇḍitāti ayaṃ kārako vā akārako vāti paṇḍitā jānanti. Iti tā devatā ‘‘tathāgatāpi mayameva paṇḍitā’’ti maññamānā evamāhaṃsu.
那时,世尊说出“不,此为”等话语。其中,“凡此行持稳固”:指这种随法行持坚固、稳定。凡是依此行持的贤者、智者,通过所缘审察与特相审察两种禅那而成为禅修者,便从魔的束缚中解脱出来。这一行持,并非仅仅依靠口说或听闻就能进入、实践的(即“不能”)。“贤者不造作”:贤者、智者了知世间流转,通达诸行世间的生灭,完全了知四圣谛法,以烦恼的般涅槃而寂息,渡越了世间的渴爱,他们不行此事,我们也不说此语。这便是其含义。显示巴利原文
Atha bhagavā nayidantiādimāha. Tattha yāyaṃ paṭipadā daḷhāti ayaṃ dhammānudhammapaṭipadā daḷhā thirā. Yāya paṭipadāya dhīrā paṇḍitā ārammaṇūpanijjhānena lakkhaṇūpanijjhānena cāti dvīhi jhānehi jhāyino mārabandhanā pamuccanti, taṃ paṭipadaṃ bhāsitamattena vā savanamattena vā okkamituṃ paṭipajjituṃ na sakkāti attho. Na ve dhīrā pakubbantīti dhīrā paṇḍitā viditvā lokapariyāyaṃ saṅkhāralokassa udayabbayaṃ ñatvā catusaccadhammañca aññāya kilesanibbānena nibbutā loke visattikaṃ tiṇṇā evaṃ na kubbanti, mayaṃ evarūpāni na kathemāti attho.
“站在地上”(pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhahitvā):他们心想:“我们做了不该做的事,把非作者称为作者。”因而感到羞惭,犹如对大梵天生起恭敬那样,对世尊生起尊重,视世尊如同火堆般难以靠近。他们这样看待着,从空中降落,站在地面。“罪过”(accayo)即过失。“不,尊者,罪过征服了我们”(no, bhante, accāgamā):意为这罪过超越、征服了我们而现前。“应冒犯的”(āsādetabbaṃ):指应被触恼的。据说那些天神以身和语两方面触恼了世尊。他们不向如来顶礼,停在空中,这是以身触恼;他们引用骗子的譬喻,发出种种恶语,这是以语触恼。因此他们说:“我们以为是应冒犯的。”“请接受”(paṭiggaṇhātu):即请宽恕。“为了未来的防护”(āyatiṃ saṃvarāya):意为为了在未来能够克制,不再造作这样的过失与嗔怒。显示巴利原文
Pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhahitvāti ‘‘ayuttaṃ amhehi kataṃ, akārakameva mayaṃ kārakavādena samudācarimhā’’ti lajjamānā mahābrahmani viya bhagavati gāravaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā aggikkhandhaṃ viya bhagavantaṃ durāsadaṃ katvā passamānā ākāsato otaritvā bhūmiyaṃ ṭhatvāti attho. Accayoti aparādho. No, bhante, accāgamāti amhe atikkamma abhibhavitvā pavatto. Āsādetabbanti ghaṭṭayitabbaṃ. Tā kira devatā bhagavantaṃ kāyena vācāyāti dvīhipi ghaṭṭayiṃsu. Tathāgataṃ avanditvā ākāse patiṭṭhamānā kāyena ghaṭṭayiṃsu, kitavopamaṃ āharitvā nānappakārakaṃ asabbhivādaṃ vadamānā vācāya ghaṭṭayiṃsu. Tasmā āsādetabbaṃ amaññimhāti āhaṃsu. Paṭiggaṇhātūti khamatu. Āyatiṃ saṃvarāyāti anāgate saṃvaraṇatthāya, puna evarūpassa aparādhassa dosassa akaraṇatthāya.
“展露微笑”(sitaṃ pātvākāsi):即露出上齿,显出喜悦之相。为何如此?据说那些天神并非真心忏悔,还将世间凡夫与天界人间最上的如来等量齐观。于是世尊想:“当由他人发起论争时,我应先彰显佛力,然后再行宽恕。”因此展露微笑。“更加地”(bhiyyoso mattāya):指以过分的方式。“他说此偈”(imaṃ gāthaṃ abhāsi):世尊心想“他们必定是对我们生气了”,而说出此偈。显示巴利原文
Sitaṃpātvākāsīti aggadante dassento pahaṭṭhākāraṃ dassesi. Kasmā? Tā kira devatā na sabhāvena khamāpenti, lokiyamahājanañca sadevake loke aggapuggalaṃ tathāgatañca ekasadisaṃ karonti. Atha bhagavā ‘‘parato kathāya uppannāya buddhabalaṃ dīpetvā pacchā khamissāmī’’ti sitaṃ pātvākāsi. Bhiyyoso mattāyāti atirekappamāṇena. Imaṃ gāthaṃ abhāsīti kupito esa amhākanti maññamānā abhāsi.
“不接纳”意为不能忍耐、不能认可。“内有嗔恚”是指内心生起了忿怒。“为重嗔所缚者”就是把嗔恨看得极重,始终带着它生活。“他执取怨恨”谓这种人犹如系缚一个结,把怨恨牢牢系在自己身上,执持不舍。“如果没有罪过”意为假如没有重大过失。“也无任何退堕”是说连过失本身都不存在。“那谁会成为善巧者?”意思是如果怨恨尚未平息,又凭什么因缘能成为善巧之人呢?显示巴利原文
Na paṭigaṇhatīti na khamati nādhivāseti. Kopantaroti abbhantare uppannakopo. Dosagarūti dosaṃ garuṃ katvā ādāya viharanto. Sa veraṃ paṭimuñcatīti so evarūpo gaṇṭhikaṃ paṭimuñcanto viya taṃ veraṃ attani paṭimuñcati ṭhapeti, na paṭinissajjatīti attho. Accayo ce na vijjethāti sace accāyikakammaṃ na bhaveyya. No cidhāpagataṃ siyāti yadi aparādho nāma na bhāveyya. Kenīdha kusalo siyāti yadi verāni na sammeyyuṃ, kena kāraṇena kusalo bhaveyya.
“对于谁的罪过……”这一偈颂的意思是:谁没有越轨行为?谁没有过失?谁不陷入迷乱?谁永远堪称智者?据说世尊展露微笑,正是为了让他们说出这个偈颂。因此,现在为了先彰显佛力,然后宣示“我将宽恕”,世尊才说出“如来、佛陀……”等开首之语。其中,“如来”是因为如此前来等理趣而得名。“佛陀”则是因觉悟四圣谛等,依解脱法之安立而得此称。“对说示罪过者”:你们所说的“对于说示罪过的人……他执取怨恨”,这话虽好,但我于那种怨恨并不欢喜,也不希求。“我接受你们的罪过”即我宽恕你们的过失。第五段。显示巴利原文
Kassaccayāti gāthāya kassa atikkamo natthi? Kassa aparādho natthi? Ko sammohaṃ nāpajjati? Ko niccameva paṇḍito nāmāti attho? Imaṃ kira gāthaṃ bhaṇāpanatthaṃ bhagavato sitapātukammaṃ. Tasmā idāni devatānaṃ buddhabalaṃ dīpetvā khamissāmīti tathāgatassa buddhassātiādimāha. Tattha tathāgatassāti tathā āgatoti evamādīhi kāraṇehi tathāgatassa. Buddhassāti catunnaṃ saccānaṃ buddhattādīhi kāraṇehi vimokkhantikapaṇṇattivasena evaṃ laddhanāmassa. Accayaṃ desayantīnanti yaṃ vuttaṃ tumhehi ‘‘accayaṃ desayantīnaṃ…pe… sa veraṃ paṭimuñcatī’’ti, taṃ sādhu vuttaṃ, ahaṃ pana taṃ veraṃ nābhinandāmi na patthayāmīti attho. Paṭiggaṇhāmi voccayanti tumhākaṃ aparādhaṃ khamāmīti. Pañcamaṃ.
6. 信经注释(Saddhāsuttavaṇṇanā)显示巴利原文
6. Saddhāsuttavaṇṇanā
36 36. 第六经中说:“信是人的伙伴”:对于去往天界、人间乃至涅槃的人,信成为他的伙伴,完成同伴的职责。“如果没有不信停留”:即如果不信已不复存在。“名声”指随众、眷属。“称誉”指赞叹的言语。“从此而生”:从那里便生起这些名声与称誉。“诸结不追随”:欲结等五种结不能追随于他。“放逸之辈”:那些制造、滋生放逸的人,便被称为沉溺于放逸者。“如护最胜财”:就像守护珍珠、摩尼宝心等最殊胜的财富那样去守护。“禅修者”:指通过相随观禅那和所缘随观禅那而修禅的人。其中,“相随观禅那”就是指观、道、果。因为观能随观无常、苦、无我这三种相状,所以称为“相随观禅那”;道则成就观所成办之功业。显示巴利原文
36. Chaṭṭhe saddhā dutiyā purisassa hotīti purisassa devaloke manussaloke ceva nibbānañca gacchantassa saddhā dutiyā hoti, sahāyakiccaṃ sādheti. No ce assaddhiyaṃ avatiṭṭhatīti yadi assaddhiyaṃ na tiṭṭhati. Yasoti parivāro. Kittīti vaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ. Tatvassa hotīti tato assa hoti. Nānupatanti saṅgāti rāgasaṅgādayo pañca saṅgā na anupatanti. Pamādamanuyuñjantīti ye pamādaṃ karonti nibbattenti, te taṃ anuyuñjanti nāma. Dhanaṃ seṭṭhaṃva rakkhatīti muttāmaṇisārādiuttamadhanaṃ viya rakkhati. Jhāyantoti lakkhaṇūpanijjhānena ca ārammaṇūpanijjhānena ca jhāyanto. Tattha lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ nāma vipassanāmaggaphalāni. Vipassanā hi tīṇi lakkhaṇāni upanijjhāyatīti lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ. Maggo vipassanāya āgatakiccaṃ sādhetīti lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ. Phalaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ upanijjhāyatīti lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ. Aṭṭha samāpattiyo pana kasiṇārammaṇassa upanijjhāyanato ārammaṇūpanijjhānanti veditabbā. Paramaṃ nāma arahattasukhaṃ adhippetanti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.
7. 《祥会经》的注释(Samayasuttavaṇṇanā)显示巴利原文
7. Samayasuttavaṇṇanā
37 第七经中的“于释迦族中”(sakkesu):因“诸王子,释迦族啊”这一感叹语,诸王子得名“释迦”,他们所居的地区也随惯用名称而被称作释迦。此处即指释迦族所在之地。“大林”(mahāvane)指一片自然生长、非人工种植、与雪山相连的广袤大森林。“与一切阿拉汉”(sabbeheva arahantehīti)则指在这部经宣讲当天便证得阿拉汉果的那些比丘。显示巴利原文
37. Sattame sakkesūti ‘‘sakyā vata, bho kumārā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.267) udānaṃ paṭicca sakkāti laddhanāmānaṃ rājakumārānaṃ nivāso ekopi janapado rūḷhīsaddena sakkāti vuccati . Tasmiṃ sakkesu janapade. Mahāvaneti sayaṃjāte aropime himavantena saddhiṃ ekābaddhe mahati vane. Sabbeheva arahantehīti imaṃ suttaṃ kathitadivaseyeva pattaarahantehi.
关于此事,有次第的叙述如下:据说,释迦族与拘利族在迦毗罗卫城和拘利城之间,于名为罗希尼的河上只筑了一道堤堰,引水灌溉庄稼。到了热季初月,庄稼渐趋枯萎,两城居民的农夫便聚集起来。拘利城的人说:“这水若分引两岸,既不够你们,也不够我们。但我们的庄稼只需灌溉一次便能成熟,请把水给我们吧。”迦毗罗卫城的人说:“等你们粮仓堆满之后,我们即使拿着赤金、黄金、青宝石和伽哈巴那钱币,提着篮袋,亦无从在你们门口乞食。我们的庄稼也只需灌溉一次就能成熟,把水给我们。”“我们不会给。”“我们也不会给。”如此争执愈演愈烈,一个人起身打了另一人,被打者又击打他人,互相殴斗,进而辱骂对方王族的种姓出身,事态便愈发严重。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ anupubbikathā – sākiyakoliyā hi kira kapilavatthunagarassa ca koliyanagarassa ca antare rohiṇiṃ nāma nadiṃ ekeneva āvaraṇena bandhāpetvā sassāni kārenti. Atha jeṭṭhamūlamāse sassesu milāyantesu ubhayanagaravāsīnampi kammakārā sannipatiṃsu. Tattha koliyanagaravāsino āhaṃsu – ‘‘idaṃ udakaṃ ubhayato āhariyamānaṃ na tumhākaṃ, na amhākaṃ pahossati , amhākaṃ pana sassaṃ ekena udakeneva nipphajjissati, idaṃ udakaṃ amhākaṃ dethā’’ti. Kapilavatthuvāsino āhaṃsu – ‘‘tumhesu koṭṭhe pūretvā ṭhitesu mayaṃ rattasuvaṇṇanīlamaṇikāḷakahāpaṇe ca gahetvā pacchipasibbakādihatthā na sakkhissāma tumhākaṃ gharadvāre vicarituṃ, amhākampi sassaṃ ekeneva udakena nipphajjissati, idaṃ udakaṃ amhākaṃ dethā’’ti. ‘‘Na mayaṃ dassāmā’’ti. ‘‘Mayampi na dassāmā’’ti. Evaṃ kathaṃ vaḍḍhetvā eko uṭṭhāya ekassa pahāraṃ adāsi, sopi aññassāti evaṃ aññamaññaṃ paharitvā rājakulānaṃ jātiṃ ghaṭṭetvā kalahaṃ vaḍḍhayiṃsu.
拘利族的工人们骂道:“你们只管仗着迦毗罗卫城的人逞威风!他们就如狗和豺狼一般,与自己的姐妹同居。这些人的象、马、盾牌武器,能把我们怎样?”释迦族的工人们反骂道:“你们这些癞病人,只管仗着自家的孩子逞威风!他们如同无依无靠、走投无路的畜生,栖住在拘罗树上。这些人的象、马、盾牌武器,又能将我们怎样?”他们回去向负责该工事的官员报告,官员又禀告了王族。于是,释迦族人说:“我们要让那些与姐妹同居的人见识我们的勇力与威势!”随即整军出战。拘利族人也说:“我们要让那些栖居拘罗树的人见识我们的勇力与威势!”也整军出战。显示巴利原文
Koliyakammakārā vadanti – ‘‘tumhe kapilavatthuvāsike gahetvā gajjatha, ye soṇasiṅgālādayo viya attano bhaginīhi saddhiṃ saṃvasiṃsu, etesaṃ hatthino ca assā ca phalakāvudhāni ca amhākaṃ kiṃ karissantī’’ti? Sākiyakammakārā vadanti – ‘‘tumhe dāni kuṭṭhino dārake gahetvā gajjatha, ye anāthā niggatikā tiracchānā viya kolarukkhe vasiṃsu, etesaṃ hatthino ca assā ca phalakāvudhāni ca amhākaṃ kiṃ karissantī’’ti? Te gantvā tasmiṃ kamme niyuttaamaccānaṃ kathesuṃ, amaccā rājakulānaṃ kathesuṃ. Tato sākiyā – ‘‘bhaginīhi saddhiṃ saṃvasitakānaṃ thāmañca balañca dassessāmā’’ti yuddhasajjā nikkhamiṃsu. Koliyāpi – ‘‘kolarukkhavāsīnaṃ thāmañca balañca dassessāmā’’ti yuddhasajjā nikkhamiṃsu.
世尊也在破晓时分从大悲定出定,观察世间,看见这些人正如此整军出战。见后,他思量道:“如果我前往那里,这场争斗会不会平息?”随即决意:“我去那里,为平息争斗,将讲说三则本生故事,这样争端就会平息。然后为彰显和合再讲两则本生故事,接着宣说《自杖经》。听法之后,两城居民会各献出二百五十位王子,我将度他们出家,届时便有一场大集会。”于是,当这些人整军出发时,世尊未告知任何人,独自持钵与衣,去到两军之间,于半空中结跏趺坐,放出六色光芒,安坐其中。显示巴利原文
Bhagavāpi rattiyā paccūsasamayeva mahākaruṇāsamāpattito uṭṭhāya lokaṃ volokento ime evaṃ yuddhasajje nikkhamante addasa. Disvā – ‘‘mayi gate ayaṃ kalaho vūpasammissati nu kho udāhu no’’ti upadhārento – ‘‘ahamettha gantvā kalahavūpasamanatthaṃ tīṇi jātakāni kathessāmi, tato kalaho vūpasammissati. Atha sāmaggidīpanatthāya dve jātakāni kathetvā attadaṇḍasuttaṃ desessāmi. Desanaṃ sutvā ubhayanagaravāsinopi aḍḍhatiyāni aḍḍhatiyāni kumārasatāni dassanti, ahaṃ te pabbājessāmi, tadā mahāsamāgamo bhavissatī’’ti sanniṭṭhānaṃ akāsi. Tasmā imesu yuddhasajjesu nikkhamantesu kassaci anārocetvā sayameva pattacīvaramādāya gantvā dvinnaṃ senānaṃ antare ākāse pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā chabbaṇṇarasmiyo vissajjetvā nisīdi.
迦毗罗卫城的居民一见世尊,便心想:“我们亲族中最尊贵的导师来了。他知道我们在争斗吗?”又想:“世尊到来,我们绝不能再以武器伤害别人。就让拘利城的人杀害我们或捉拿我们吧。”于是他们丢弃武器,顶礼世尊而坐。拘利城的居民也这样想,丢弃武器,顶礼世尊而坐。显示巴利原文
Kapilavatthuvāsino bhagavantaṃ disvāva, ‘‘amhākaṃ ñātiseṭṭho satthā āgato. Diṭṭho nu kho tena amhākaṃ kalahakaraṇabhāvo’’ti cintetvā, ‘‘na kho pana sakkā bhagavati āgate amhehi parassa sarīre satthaṃ pātetuṃ. Koliyanagaravāsino amhe hanantu vā bajjhantu vā’’ti. Āvudhāni chaḍḍetvā, bhagavantaṃ vanditvā, nisīdiṃsu. Koliyanagaravāsinopi tatheva cintetvā āvudhāni chaḍḍetvā, bhagavantaṃ vanditvā, nisīdiṃsu.
世尊虽然知晓,却仍问道:“大王们,你们为何而来?”“世尊,我们不是来玩渡口游戏、山岳游戏、河流游戏,也不是来观赏山景的,我们是来此准备作战的。”“大王们,你们因何而起争斗?”“因为水,尊者。”“大王们,水值多少?”“很少,尊者。”“大王们,那么大地的价值呢?”“无价,尊者。”“那么刹帝利呢?”“刹帝利也是无价的,尊者。”“大王们,为什么为了这点水,就要毁灭无价的刹帝利呢?大王们,在争执中实无乐趣可言。大王们,过去有一位树神,就因争执而与一头黑狮结下仇怨,这仇怨历经整整一个大劫都无法化解。”说完,便宣说了《悸动本生》。然后又说:“大王们,不应只听别人说便跟着行事。因为只凭听信人言,一只兔子说了几句话,便引得雪山中三由旬方圆内所有的四足众生纷纷投海。所以,不可轻信人言。”说完,宣说了《大地威仪本生》。然后又说:“大王们,有时弱者能发现强者的漏洞,有时强者反被弱者所乘。就像鹡鸰那样的小鸟,也能杀死象王。”说完,宣说了《鹡鸰本生》。就这样,为平息争斗讲说了三则本生。显示巴利原文
Bhagavā jānantova, ‘‘kasmā āgatattha, mahārājā’’ti pucchi? ‘‘Na, bhagavā, titthakīḷāya na pabbatakīḷāya, na nadīkīḷāya, na giridassanatthaṃ, imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne saṅgāmaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā āgatamhā’’ti. ‘‘Kiṃ nissāya vo kalaho, mahārājāti? Udakaṃ, bhanteti. Udakaṃ kiṃ agghati, mahārājāti? Appaṃ, bhanteti. Pathavī nāma kiṃ agghati, mahārājāti? Anagghā, bhanteti. Khattiyā kiṃ agghantīti? Khattiyā nāma anagghā, bhanteti. Appamūlaṃ udakaṃ nissāya kimatthaṃ anagghe khattiye nāsetha, mahārāja, kalahe assādo nāma natthi, kalahavasena, mahārāja, aṭṭhāne veraṃ katvā ekāya rukkhadevatāya kāḷasīhena saddhiṃ baddhāghāto sakalampi imaṃ kappaṃ anuppattoyevāti vatvā phandanajātakaṃ (jā. 1.13.14 ādayo) kathesi’’. Tato ‘‘parapattiyena nāma, mahārāja, na bhavitabbaṃ. Parapattiyā hutvā hi ekassa sasakassa kathāya tiyojanasahassavitthate himavante catuppadagaṇā mahāsamuddaṃ pakkhandino ahesuṃ. Tasmā parapattiyena na bhavitabba’’nti vatvā, pathavīundriyajātakaṃ kathesi. Tato ‘‘kadāci, mahārāja, dubbalopi mahābalassa randhaṃ vivaraṃ passati, kadāci mahābalo dubbalassa. Laṭukikāpi hi sakuṇikā hatthināgaṃ ghātesī’’ti laṭukikajātakaṃ (jā. 1.5.39 ādayo) kathesi. Evaṃ kalahavūpasamanatthāya tīṇi jātakāni kathetvā sāmaggiparidīpanatthāya dve jātakāni kathesi. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Samaggānañhi, mahārāja, koci otāraṃ nāma passituṃ na sakkotīti vatvā, rukkhadhammajātakaṃ (jā. 1.1.74) kathesi . Tato ‘‘samaggānaṃ, mahārāja, koci vivaraṃ dassituṃ na sakkhi. Yadā pana aññamaññaṃ vivādamakaṃsu, atha te nesādaputto jīvitā voropetvā ādāya gatoti vivāde assādo nāma natthī’’ti vatvā, vaṭṭakajātakaṃ (jā. 1.1.118) kathesi. Evaṃ imāni pañca jātakāni kathetvā avasāne attadaṇḍasuttaṃ (su. ni. 941 ādayo) kathesi.
诸王心生净信,心想:“如果导师不来,我们必定会亲手互相残杀,血流成河。我们的儿子、兄弟也见不到家门,连传达命令、回话的人都没有。全靠导师,我们才得以活命。如果导师过着在家生活,他能拥有被两千座岛屿环绕的四大洲王权,还会有一千多位儿子,率领刹帝利眷属自在游行。但他舍弃了那样的成就,出家证得正觉。现在,他也应当以刹帝利眷属的身分游化世间。”于是,两城居民各献出了二百五十位王子。世尊便让他们出家,随后前往大林。这些王子因为是出于对导师的敬重而出家,并非出于自己的意愿,所以心生不乐。他们往日的妻子们也送来消息,说:“诸位夫君应当感到厌烦了吧,家庭生活可不安稳啊”等等,这使他们更加增生了不乐。显示巴利原文
Rājāno pasannā – ‘‘sace satthā nāgamissa, mayaṃ sahatthā aññamaññaṃ vadhitvā lohitanadiṃ pavattayissāma. Amhākaṃ puttabhātaro ca gehadvāre na passeyyāma, sāsanapaṭisāsanampi no āharaṇako nābhavissa. Satthāraṃ nissāya no jīvitaṃ laddhaṃ. Sace pana satthā āgāraṃ ajjhāvasissa dīpasahassadvayaparivāraṃ catumahādīparajjamassa hatthagataṃ abhavissa, atirekasahassaṃ kho panassa puttā abhavissaṃsu, tato khattiyaparivāro avicarissa. Taṃ kho panesa sampattiṃ pahāya nikkhamitvā sambodhiṃ patto. Idānipi khattiyaparivāroyeva vicaratū’’ti ubhayanagaravāsino aḍḍhatiyāni aḍḍhatiyāni kumārasatāni adaṃsu. Bhagavāpi te pabbājetvā mahāvanaṃ agamāsi. Tesaṃ garugāravena na attano ruciyā pabbajitānaṃ anabhirati uppajji. Purāṇadutiyikāyopi tesaṃ – ‘‘ayyaputtā ukkaṇṭhantu, gharāvāso na saṇṭhātī’’tiādīni vatvā sāsanaṃ pesenti. Te ca atirekataraṃ ukkaṇṭhiṃsu.
世尊观察了解到他们内心不乐的状态后,心想:“这些比丘跟我这样的佛陀在一起,竟然还会感到厌倦。我来对他们讲讲鹆那罗湖的殊胜之处,把他们带到那里,帮他们去除这种不乐吧。”于是,世尊就讲说了鹆那罗湖的殊胜之处。那些比丘听了,就想去看看那个湖。世尊问:“比丘们,你们想去看看鹆那罗湖吗?”他们回答:“是的,世尊。”世尊说:“既然这样,那我们走吧。”那些没有神通的比丘说:“世尊要去的地方,我们怎么去得了呢?”世尊说:“你们既然想去,我就用我的威神力带着你们一起去吧。”比丘们回答:“太好了,尊者!”于是,世尊带着这五百位比丘,腾空而起,降落在鹆那罗湖。然后,世尊对那些比丘说:“比丘们,在这个鹆那罗湖里,有你们不知道名字的鱼,都可以来问我。”显示巴利原文
Bhagavā āvajjento tesaṃ anabhiratibhāvaṃ ñatvā – ‘‘ime bhikkhū mādisena buddhena saddhiṃ ekato vasantā ukkaṇṭhanti, handa nesaṃ kuṇāladahassa vaṇṇaṃ kathetvā tattha netvā anabhiratiṃ vinodemī’’ti kuṇāladahassa vaṇṇaṃ kathesi. Te taṃ daṭṭhukāmā ahesuṃ. Daṭṭhukāmattha, bhikkhave, kuṇāladahanti? Āma bhagavāti. Yadi evaṃ etha gacchāmāti. Iddhimantānaṃ bhagavā gamanaṭṭhānaṃ mayaṃ kathaṃ gamissāmāti. Tumhe gantukāmā hotha, ahaṃ mamānubhāvena gahetvā gamissāmīti. Sādhu, bhanteti. Bhagavā pañca bhikkhusatāni gahetvā ākāse uppatitvā kuṇāladahe patiṭṭhāya te bhikkhū āha – ‘‘bhikkhave, imasmiṃ kuṇāladahe yesaṃ macchānaṃ nāmaṃ na jānātha mamaṃ pucchathā’’ti.
那些比丘就纷纷发问,世尊对他们提出的每一个问题都一一作了解答。不单是鱼的名字,世尊还让他们问那片森林中树木的名字,以及山脚下两足、四足众生和鸟类的名字,问过之后也都一一告知。这时,有一只鹆那罗鸟王,嘴里衔着一根被两只鸟用喙咬住的小棒子坐着,从前后左右都有鸟群围绕着飞过来。比丘们看见后,心想:“尊者!这只鸟应该就是这些鸟的王了,那些都是它的眷属。”世尊知道他们的想法,便说:“确实如此,比丘们!它也是我的族系,我的传承。”比丘们说:“尊者!我们现在看到这些鸟了。不过,世尊您刚才说的‘它也是我的族系,我的传承’,我们很想听听。”世尊问:“比丘们,你们想听吗?”他们回答:“是的,世尊!”世尊说:“既然想听,那就仔细听好。”于是,世尊便以三百首偈颂来庄严地讲说《鹆那罗本生》,以此去除他们内心的不乐。说法结束时,所有比丘都证得了入流果,而且靠着这条道路,他们也获得了神通。世尊心想:“对这些比丘来说,这样暂时就够了。”于是他腾空而起,回到了大林。那些比丘去的时候,是依靠十力世尊的威神力前往的;回来的时候,则是靠着自己获得的神通力,围绕着世尊,降落在了大林。显示巴利原文
Te pucchiṃsu. Bhagavā pucchitaṃ pucchitaṃ kathesi. Na kevalañca, macchānaṃyeva, tasmiṃ vanasaṇḍe rukkhānampi pabbatapāde dvipadacatuppadasakuṇānampi nāmāni pucchāpetvā kathesi. Atha dvīhi sakuṇehi mukhatuṇḍakena ḍaṃsitvā gahitadaṇḍake nisinno kuṇālasakuṇarājā purato pacchato ubhosu ca passesu sakuṇasaṅghaparivuto āgacchati. Bhikkhū taṃ disvā – ‘‘esa, bhante, imesaṃ sakuṇānaṃ rājā bhavissati, parivārā ete etassā’’ti maññāmāti. Evametaṃ, bhikkhave, ayampi mameva vaṃso mama paveṇīti. Idāni tāva mayaṃ, bhante, ete sakuṇe passāma. Yaṃ pana bhagavā ‘‘ayampi mameva vaṃso mama paveṇī’’ti āha, taṃ sotukāmamhāti. Sotukāmattha, bhikkhaveti? Āma bhagavāti. Tena hi suṇāthāti tīhi gāthāsatehi maṇḍetvā kuṇālajātakaṃ (jā. 2.21.kuṇālajātaka) kathento anabhiratiṃ vinodesi. Desanāpariyosāne sabbepi sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahiṃsu, maggeneva ca nesaṃ iddhipi āgatā. Bhagavā ‘‘hotu tāva ettakaṃ tesaṃ bhikkhūna’’nti ākāse uppatitvā mahāvanameva agamāsi. Tepi bhikkhū gamanakāle dasabalassa ānubhāvena gantvā āgamanakāle attano ānubhāvena bhagavantaṃ parivāretvā mahāvane otariṃsu.
世尊在已铺好的座位上坐下后,招呼那些比丘说:“来吧,诸比丘,请坐。我将为你们开示能断除上三道烦恼的业处。”于是,世尊便开示了业处。那些比丘心想:“世尊知道我们心生不乐,便将我们带到鹆那罗湖,除去了我们的不乐;在那里证得入流果的我们,如今世尊又在此处给予通往其余三道果的业处。然而,我们不应心想‘我们已是入流者’而虚度时光,应当像大丈夫一样精进努力。”于是,他们顶礼十力世尊双足,起身之后,抖擞袈裟,便各自分散,到山崖下、树根处端坐修行了。显示巴利原文
Bhagavā paññattāsane nisīditvā te bhikkhū āmantetvā – ‘‘etha, bhikkhave, nisīdatha. Uparimaggattayavajjhānaṃ vo kilesānaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathessāmī’’ti kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathesi. Bhikkhū cintayiṃsu – ‘‘bhagavā amhākaṃ anabhiratabhāvaṃ ñatvā kuṇāladahaṃ netvā anabhiratiṃ vinodesi, tattha sotāpattiphalaṃ pattānaṃ no idāni idha tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ adāsi, na kho pana amhehi ‘sotāpannā maya’nti vītināmetuṃ vaṭṭati, purisapurisehi no bhavituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti te dasabalassa pāde vanditvā uṭṭhāya nisīdanaṃ papphoṭetvā visuṃ visuṃ pabbhārarukkhamūlesu nisīdiṃsu.
世尊心想:“这些比丘本性上就是不放逸于业处的,更何况已经获得修行方法的比丘,是没有疲劳懈怠的理由的。他们会在经行的过程中不断增长观智,证得阿拉汉果后,就会到我这里来,会想‘我要向世尊汇报自己所证悟的功德’。等他们到来的时候,一万个轮围世界里的诸天都会聚集到一个轮围世界里来,那将是一场大集会。为了这个因缘,我应该找一个僻静的地方独自坐着。”于是,世尊就在一个僻静的地方铺好佛座,坐了下来。显示巴利原文
Bhagavā cintesi – ‘‘ime bhikkhū pakatiyāpi avissaṭṭhakammaṭṭhānā, laddhupāyassa pana bhikkhuno kilamanakāraṇaṃ nāma natthi. Gacchantā gacchantā ca vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattaṃ patvā ‘attanā paṭividdhaguṇaṃ ārocessāmā’ti mama santikaṃ āgamissanti. Etesu āgatesu dasasahassacakkavāḷadevatā ekacakkavāḷe sannipatissanti, mahāsamayo bhavissati, vivitte okāse mayā nisīdituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti tato vivitte okāse buddhāsanaṃ paññāpetvā nisīdi.
那位最先取了业处而去的长老,连同无碍解一起证得了阿拉汉果。接着另一位,又接着另一位……这五百位比丘就像莲池里的莲花一般绽放了。那位最先证得阿拉汉果的比丘心想:‘我要去禀告世尊。’于是散开盘坐的姿势,抖了抖坐布,站起身来,面向十力世尊的方向。就这样,第二位、第三位……五百位比丘如同排队进入斋堂一般,依着顺序走了过来。最先到达的比丘顶礼后,铺好坐布,在一旁坐下。他想禀告自己所证悟的功德,心想:‘还有其他人吗?没有了。’于是回头看向来路,结果看到还有一位,然后又看到还有一位……就这样,等所有的人都到了,各各退坐一面。结果,这位对那位不好意思先开口,那位对这位也不好意思先开口。原来,据说漏尽者会有两种心态:一是会生起这样的心——‘啊,真希望我所证悟的功德,这整个包含天界的人间也能尽快证悟到。’但在对自己证悟的状态上,他们就像得到宝藏的人一样,并不太想告诉别人。显示巴利原文
Sabbapaṭhamaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā gatatthero saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. Tato aparo tato aparoti pañcasatāpi paduminiyaṃ padumāni viya vikasiṃsu. Sabbapaṭhamaṃ arahattaṃ pattabhikkhu ‘‘bhagavato ārocessāmī’’ti pallaṅkaṃ vinibbhujitvā nisīdanaṃ papphoṭetvā uṭṭhāya dasabalābhimukho ahosi. Evaṃ aparopi aparopīti pañcasatā bhattasālaṃ pavisantā viya paṭipāṭiyāva āgamiṃsu. Paṭhamaṃ āgato vanditvā nisīdanaṃ paññāpetvā, ekamantaṃ nisīditvā, paṭividdhaguṇaṃ ārocetukāmo ‘‘atthi nu kho añño koci? Natthī’’ti nivattitvā āgatamaggaṃ olokento aparampi addasa aparampi addasayevāti sabbepi te āgantvā ekamantaṃ nisīditvā, ayaṃ imassa harāyamāno na kathesi, ayaṃ imassa harāyamāno na kathesi. Khīṇāsavānaṃ kira dve ākārā honti – ‘‘aho vata mayā paṭividdhaguṇaṃ sadevako loko khippameva paṭivijjheyyā’’ti cittaṃ uppajjati. Paṭividdhabhāvaṃ pana nidhiladdhapuriso viya na aññassa ārocetukāmā honti.
就在这圣众集会恰正圆满的这一刻,为了瞻仰那无有云、雾、烟、尘、罗睺等随烦恼所染,因佛陀出世而庄严美妙的世界,东方如同被托起的一面大银镜,又如同持于轮辋、旋转中庄严如银轮的满月,升上了空中。就在这样极短的刹那、这样极短的时分、这样一个片刻里,世尊正与约五百位比丘组成的比丘僧团,安住在释迦族迦毗罗卫城的大林中,这些比丘全部都是阿拉汉。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ osaṭamatte pana tasmiṃ ariyamaṇḍale pācīnayugandharaparikkhepato abbhā mahikā dhūmo rajo rāhūti, imehi upakkilesehi vippamuttaṃ buddhuppādapaṭimaṇḍitassa lokassa rāmaṇeyyakadassanatthaṃ pācīnadisāya ukkhittarajatamayamahāādāsamaṇḍalaṃ viya, nemivaṭṭiyaṃ gahetvā, parivattiyamānarajatacakkasassirikaṃ puṇṇacandamaṇḍalaṃ ullaṅghitvā, anilapathaṃ paṭipajjittha. Iti evarūpe khaṇe laye muhutte bhagavā sakkesu viharati kapilavatthusmiṃ mahāvane mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṃ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi sabbeheva arahantehi.
在此,世尊生在大选出世系,那五百位比丘也同生于大选出家族。世尊生于刹帝利母胎,他们也生于刹帝利母胎。世尊以国王身分出家,他们也以国王身分出家。世尊舍弃白伞盖,放下即将到手的转轮王权而出家,他们也舍弃白伞盖,放下即将到手的王权而出家。因此,世尊于清净处所,于清净的夜晚时分,自身清净,又有清净的随众围绕;离贪,又有离贪的随众围绕;离嗔,又有离嗔的随众围绕;离痴,又有离痴的随众围绕;无渴爱,又有无渴爱的随众围绕;无烦恼,又有无烦恼的随众围绕;寂静,又有寂静的随众围绕;调伏,又有调伏的随众围绕;解脱,又有解脱的随众围绕——如此,世尊显得格外光辉。这就是所谓的‘赞颂之境’,能说多少便应说多少。这也正是针对这些比丘所说:‘有大约五百位比丘,全部都是阿拉汉。’显示巴利原文
Tattha bhagavāpi mahāsammatassa vaṃse uppanno, tepi pañcasatā bhikkhū mahāsammatassa kule uppannā. Bhagavāpi khattiyagabbhe jāto, tepi khattiyagabbhe jātā. Bhagavāpi rājapabbajito, tepi rājapabbajitā. Bhagavāpi setacchattaṃ pahāya hatthagataṃ cakkavattirajjaṃ nissajjitvā pabbajito, tepi setacchattaṃ pahāya hatthagatāni rajjāni vissajjitvā pabbajitā. Iti bhagavā parisuddhe okāse, parisuddhe rattibhāge, sayaṃ parisuddho parisuddhaparivāro, vītarāgo vītarāgaparivāro, vītadoso vītadosaparivāro, vītamoho vītamohaparivāro, nittaṇho nittaṇhaparivāro, nikkileso nikkilesaparivāro, santo santaparivāro, danto dantaparivāro, mutto muttaparivāro, ativiya virocatīti. Vaṇṇabhūmi nāmesā, yattakaṃ sakkoti, tattakaṃ vattabbaṃ. Iti ime bhikkhū sandhāya vuttaṃ, ‘‘pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi sabbeheva arahantehī’’ti.
‘大部分’的意思是说,诸天大多聚集来了,只有少数未聚集——如无想有情天、无色界天,以及正入禅定的天众。此中集会的次第是这样的:据说,大林周边的天人们最先动起来,彼此传告:‘诸贤,来吧!见佛陀有大利益,听闻正法有大利益,见到比丘僧团有大利益。来吧,来吧!’他们发出巨大声响,到来之后,礼敬世尊与那时刚证得阿拉汉果的漏尽者,然后立于一旁。依此方式,从一个天界传至另一个天界,声音便这样传开:随其声之所及——半牛呼、一牛呼、半由旬、一由旬等等——传遍了宽广三千由旬的雪山,传遍了六万三千座城市,传遍了九十九万处河口港,传遍了九十六俱胝百千座口岸,传遍了五十六座宝洲,亦即遍满了整个赡部洲洲、东毗提诃洲、西牛货洲、北俱卢洲,还有两千小洲,乃至整个轮围世界。接着又传到第二、第三个轮围世界……如此,应知一万个轮围世界的天人都聚集来了。在此,‘一万个轮围世界’所指就是十方世界。因此经中说:‘从十方世界,诸天大部分都来聚集了。’显示巴利原文
Yebhuyyenāti bahutarā sannipatitā, mandā na sannipatitā asaññī arūpāvacaradevatā samāpannadevatāyo ca. Tatrāyaṃ sannipātakkamo – mahāvanassa kira sāmantā devatā caliṃsu, ‘‘āyāma bho! Buddhadassanaṃ nāma bahūpakāraṃ, dhammassavanaṃ bahūpakāraṃ, bhikkhusaṅghadassanaṃ bahūpakāraṃ. Āyāma āyāmā’’ti! Mahāsaddaṃ kurumānā āgantvā bhagavantañca taṃmuhuttaṃ arahattappattakhīṇāsave ca vanditvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhaṃsu. Eteneva upāyena tāsaṃ tāsaṃ saddaṃ sutvā saddantaraaḍḍhagāvutagāvutaaḍḍhayojanayojanādivasena tiyojanasahassavitthate himavante, tikkhattuṃ tesaṭṭhiyā nagarasahassesu, navanavutiyā doṇamukhasatasahassesu, chanavutiyā paṭṭanakoṭisatasahassesu, chapaṇṇāsāya ratanākaresūti sakalajambudīpe, pubbavidehe, aparagoyāne, uttarakurumhi, dvīsu parittadīpasahassesūti sakalacakkavāḷe, tato dutiyatatiyacakkavāḷeti evaṃ dasasahassacakkavāḷesu devatā sannipatitāti veditabbā. Dasasahassacakkavāḷañhi idha dasalokadhātuyoti adhippetaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘dasahi ca lokadhātūhi devatā yebhuyyena sannipatitā hontī’’ti.
如此聚集而来的诸天,充塞于整个轮围之内,上至梵天界,犹如针筒中紧密无间地插满的针。其中,梵天界的高度应当这样理解:据说,有一块大如七层楼阁的巨石,从梵天界立定堕下,经四个月方至大地。在如此广大的空间里,天众之间毫无间隙地站立着,正如从下往上抛撒的花朵或烟云无法升腾,从上往下投掷的芥子也无处坠落一般。然而,如同转轮王所在之处并不拥挤,来来往往、具大威势的刹帝利们皆能觅得容身之地,只是越往外围便越显拥挤;世尊所在之处亦不拥挤,来来往往、具大威势的诸天与梵天皆能觅得容身之地。乃至在世尊极近旁、仅容毛发尖端触及的区域内,便有十位、二十位天神化作微细之身站立,而在最外围,则各有六十位天神站立。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sannipatitāhi devatāhi sakalacakkavāḷagabbhaṃ yāva brahmalokā sūcighare nirantaraṃ pakkhittasūcīhi viya paripuṇṇaṃ hoti. Tattha brahmalokassa evaṃ uccattanaṃ veditabbaṃ – lohapāsāde kira sattakūṭāgārasamo pāsāṇo brahmaloke ṭhatvā adho khitto catūhi māsehi pathaviṃ pāpuṇāti. Evaṃ mahante okāse yathā heṭṭhā ṭhatvā khittāni pupphāni vā dhūmo vā upari gantuṃ, upari vā ṭhatvā khittasāsapā heṭṭhā otarituṃ antaraṃ na labhanti, evaṃ nirantarā devatā ahesuṃ. Yathā kho pana cakkavattirañño nisinnaṭṭhānaṃ asambādhaṃ hoti, āgatāgatā mahesakkhā khattiyā okāsaṃ labhantiyeva, parato parato pana atisambādhaṃ hoti. Evameva bhagavato nisinnaṭṭhānaṃ asambādhaṃ, āgatāgatā mahesakkhā devā ca brahmāno ca okāsaṃ labhantiyeva. Api sudaṃ bhagavato āsannāsannaṭṭhāne vālagganittudanamatte padese dasapi vīsatipi devā sukhume attabhāve māpetvā aṭṭhaṃsu. Sabbaparato saṭṭhi saṭṭhi devatā aṭṭhaṃsu.
“净居天众”指的是净居天的居住者。所谓净居天,乃是清净的不还者与漏尽者居住的五处梵天界。“他生起此念”是如何生起的呢?据说,那些梵天入定后,按预定的时分出定,观察梵天宫殿,见其如同饭后的食堂一般空寂,于是便思虑道:“梵天们都到哪里去了?”在得知这是大集会后,他们想:“这次集会极为盛大,而我们却落后了;对落后的人来说,很难得到位置。因此,我们前去时不应空手,应当每人造一首偈颂再去。借此偈颂,既能在大集会中让人知晓我们的到来,同时也可赞颂十力者的功德。”正因为从定中出来后有了这样的思虑,他们才生起了这个想法。显示巴利原文
Suddhāvāsakāyikānanti suddhāvāsavāsīnaṃ. Suddhāvāsā nāma suddhānaṃ anāgāmikhīṇāsavānaṃ āvāsā pañca brahmalokā. Etadahosīti kasmā ahosi? Te kira brahmāno samāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā yathā paricchedena vuṭṭhitā brahmabhavanaṃ olokentā pacchābhatte bhattagehaṃ viya suññataṃ addasaṃsu. Tato ‘‘kuhiṃ brahmāno gatā’’ti āvajjantā mahāsamāgamaṃ ñatvā – ‘‘ayaṃ samāgamo mahā, mayaṃ ohīnā, ohīnakānaṃ pana okāso dullabho hoti, tasmā gacchantā atucchahatthā hutvā ekekaṃ gāthaṃ abhisaṅkharitvā gacchāma. Tāya mahāsamāgame ca attano āgatabhāvaṃ jānāpessāma, dasabalassa ca vaṇṇaṃ bhāsissāmā’’ti. Iti tesaṃ samāpattito uṭṭhāya āvajjitattā etadahosi.
经文中说“于世尊面前出现”,乃是将他们描述为仿佛在世尊近前、当面降临一般,然而不应如此理解其义。实际上,那些梵天正是立于梵天界中造作了偈颂,而后一位降落在东方轮围界的边缘,一位降落在南方轮围界的边缘,一位降落在西方轮围界的边缘,一位降落在北方轮围界的边缘。接着,降在东方轮围界边缘的梵天,进入青遍定,放出青色光芒,令十万轮围界的天神仿佛皆披上了宝珠铠甲,由此昭示自己的到来;因为无人能超越所谓的“佛道”,他便沿着宽阔的佛道前来,顶礼世尊后,立于一旁。立于一旁后,他便诵出了自己所作的偈颂。显示巴利原文
Bhagavato purato pāturahesunti pāḷiyaṃ bhagavato santike abhimukhaṭṭhāneyeva otiṇṇā viya katvā vuttā, na kho panettha evaṃ attho veditabbo. Te pana brahmaloke ṭhitāyeva gāthā abhisaṅkharitvā eko puratthimacakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyaṃ otari, eko dakkhiṇacakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyaṃ, eko pacchimacakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyaṃ, eko uttaracakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyaṃ otari. Tato puratthimacakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyaṃ otiṇṇabrahmā nīlakasiṇaṃ samāpajjitvā nīlarasmiyo vissajjetvā dasasahassacakkavāḷadevatānaṃ maṇivammaṃ paṭimuñcanto viya attano āgatabhāvaṃ jānāpetvā buddhavīthi nāma kenaci uttarituṃ na sakkā, tasmā mahatiyā buddhavīthiyāva āgantvā bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṃ ṭhito kho attanā abhisaṅkhataṃ gāthaṃ abhāsi.
降于南方轮围界口的梵天,进入黄遍定,放出金色光芒,让十万轮围界的天神如同披上金色衣布一般,以此表明自己的到来,而后亦作同样之举。降于西方轮围界口的梵天,进入红遍定,放出红色光芒,让十万轮围界的天神如同围上上好红色毛毯一般,以此表明自己的到来,而后亦作同样之举。降于北方轮围界口的梵天,进入白遍定,放出白色光芒,让十万轮围界的天神如同披上悦意花布一般,以此表明自己的到来,而后亦作同样之举。显示巴利原文
Dakkhiṇacakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyaṃ otiṇṇabrahmā pītakasiṇaṃ samāpajjitvā suvaṇṇapabhaṃ muñcitvā dasasahassacakkavāḷadevatānaṃ suvaṇṇapaṭaṃ pārupanto viya attano āgatabhāvaṃ jānāpetvā tatheva akāsi. Pacchimacakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyaṃ otiṇṇabrahmā lohitakasiṇaṃ samāpajjitvā lohitakarasmiyo muñcitvā dasasahassacakkavāḷadevatānaṃ rattavarakambalena parikkhipanto viya attano āgatabhāvaṃ jānāpetvā tatheva akāsi. Uttaracakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyaṃ otiṇṇabrahmā odātakasiṇaṃ samāpajjitvā odātarasmiyo vissajjetvā dasasahassacakkavāḷadevatānaṃ sumanakusumapaṭaṃ pārupanto viya attano āgatabhāvaṃ jānāpetvā tatheva akāsi.
然而,经文中说:“在世尊面前出现。然后那些天神顶礼世尊后,立于一面”,如此表述,仿佛是在同一刹那于面前出现、顶礼之后立于一面。实际上,这是依上述次第发生的,经文只是将它们合在一起显示罢了。至于诵偈,经文中也是逐一分别宣说的。显示巴利原文
Pāḷiyaṃ pana bhagavato purato pāturahesuṃ. Atha kho tā devatā bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhaṃsūti evaṃ ekakkhaṇe viya purato pātubhāvo ca abhivādetvā ekamantaṃ ṭhitabhāvo ca vutto, so iminā anukkamena ahosi, ekato katvā pana dassito. Gāthābhāsanaṃ pana pāḷiyampi visuṃ visuṃyeva vuttaṃ.
其中,“mahāsamayo(大集会)”即大集合之意。“Pavana(林)”指丛林。世尊以此二词说:“今日于此丛林中,有一大集会。”接着,为了说明集会者是谁,便说“devakāyā samāgatā(诸天众已聚集)”。这里,“devakāyā”意为天群。“Āgatamha imaṃ dhammasamayaṃ(我等来此法和集会)”,意思是:见天众如此聚集,我等亦来到了此法和集会。是什么原因呢?“Dakkhitāye aparājitasaṅghaṃ(为了见不败的僧团)”,这就是为了亲眼见到那未曾被任何事物打败、今日已摧破三魔、赢得胜利的不败僧团,我等前来。那位梵天诵完此偈,顶礼世尊之后,便立于东方轮围界口之处。显示巴利原文
Tattha mahāsamayoti mahāsamūho. Pavanaṃ vuccati vanasaṇḍo. Ubhayenapi bhagavā ‘‘imasmiṃ pana vanasaṇḍe ajja mahāsamūho sannipāto’’ti āha. Tato yesaṃ so sannipāto, te dassetuṃ devakāyā samāgatāti āha. Tattha devakāyāti devaghaṭā. Āgatamha imaṃ dhammasamayanti evaṃ samāgate devakāye disvā mayampi imaṃ dhammasamūhaṃ āgatā. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Dakkhitāye aparājitasaṅghanti kenaci aparājitaṃ ajjeva tayo māre madditvā vijitasaṅgāmaṃ imaṃ aparājitasaṅghaṃ dassanatthāya āgatamhāti attho. So pana, brahmā, imaṃ gāthaṃ bhāsitvā, bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvā, puratthimacakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyaṃyeva aṭṭhāsi.
随后,第二位梵天也依照上述方式前来,诵出偈颂。其中,“tatra bhikkhavo(那里的比丘们)”指在集会处的那些比丘。“Samādahaṃsu(他们入定)”意为他们成办了定,与定相应。“Cittamattano ujukaṃ akaṃsu(令自心正直)”意为他们去除了自己心中一切弯曲、歪斜与谄曲的状态,令心变得正直。“Sārathīva nettāni gahetvā(如御者执辔)”的意思是:犹如驾驭良马的御者,在已调顺的骏马妥善套好后,持握所有缰绳安住,既不用刺棒鞭打,也不勒紧;同样,这些具足六支舍、守护根门的五百位比丘,守护着诸根,皆为智者。世尊,为了见到他们,我们来到了这里。那位梵天说后,也退回到他原来的位置站好。显示巴利原文
Atha dutiyo vuttanayeneva āgantvā abhāsi. Tattha tatra bhikkhavoti tasmiṃ sannipātaṭṭhāne bhikkhū. Samādahaṃsūti samādhinā yojesuṃ. Cittamattano ujukaṃ akaṃsūti attano citte sabbe vaṅkakuṭilajimhabhāve haritvā ujukaṃ akariṃsu. Sārathīva nettāni gahetvāti yathā samappavattesu sindhavesu odhastapatodo sārathī sabbayottāni gahetvā acodento avārento tiṭṭhati, evaṃ chaḷaṅgupekkhāya samannāgatā guttadvārā sabbepete pañcasatā bhikkhū indriyāni rakkhanti paṇḍitā, ete daṭṭhuṃ idhāgatamhā bhagavāti, sopi gantvā yathāṭhāneyeva aṭṭhāsi.
随后,第三位梵天也依照上述方式前来,诵出偈颂。其中,“chetvā khīlaṃ(断除桩)”意思是断除了贪、嗔、痴之桩。“palighaṃ(横闩)”即贪、嗔、痴的横闩。“indakhīlaṃ(门槛)”即贪、嗔、痴的门槛。“ūhacca manejā(拔出后无动)”意思是这些比丘拔除了门槛,因为对渴爱的冲动已不动摇,所以他们无碍地游行于四方。“Suddhā(清净)”指远离了随烦恼。“Vimalā(无垢)”指远离了污秽。这两个词是同义词。“Cakkhumatā(有眼者)”指具足五眼的眼者。“Sudantā(善调伏)”指眼、耳、鼻、舌、身、意这六根都已得到调伏。“Susunāgā(善妙龙象)”指年轻的龙象。这里解释词义:“nāgā(龙象)”是说他们不因欲望等而行动,不因各种道所断除的烦恼而再来,也不造作种种罪恶。这是简略的解释,详细的解释应当按照《大义释》所述的方式来理解。显示巴利原文
Atha tatiyo vuttanayeneva āgantvā abhāsi. Tattha chetvā khīlanti rāgadosamohakhīlaṃ chinditvā. Palighanti rāgadosamohapalighameva. Indakhīlanti rāgadosamohaindakhīlameva . Ūhacca manejāti ete taṇhāejāya anejā bhikkhū indakhīlaṃ ūhacca samūhanitvā catūsu disāsu appaṭihatacārikaṃ caranti. Suddhāti nirupakkilesā. Vimalāti nimmalā. Idaṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ. Cakkhumatāti pañcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumantena. Sudantāti cakkhutopi dantā sotatopi ghānatopi jivhātopi kāyatopi manatopi dantā. Susunāgāti taruṇanāgā. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – chandādīhi na gacchantīti nāgā, tena tena maggena pahīne kilese na āgacchantīti nāgā, nānappakāraṃ āguṃ na karontīti nāgā. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana mahāniddese (mahāni. 80) vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
于世间不作诸恶,
舍离一切结缚与系缚;
于一切处无著,已得解脱,
这样的龙象,才被称为‘如如者’。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Āguṃ na karoti kiñci loke, Sabbasaṃyoga visajja bandhanāni; Sabbattha na sajjatī vimutto, Nāgo tādi pavuccate tathattā’’ti. –
此处的义理应当如此理解:“Susunāgā”(幼象)即是幼象,意为已成就幼象之状态。我们正是为了拜见这些被无上调教师所调伏的幼象,才来到世尊这里。他来后,也恰好站在了适当的位置。显示巴利原文
Evamettha attho veditabbo. Susunāgāti susū nāgā, susunāgabhāvasampattiṃ pattāti attho. Te evarūpe anuttarena yoggācariyena damite taruṇanāge dassanāya āgatamha bhagavāti. Sopi gantvā yathāṭhāneyeva aṭṭhāsi.
然后,第四位象如前述之法而来,并说了话。其中,“已去”是指以毫无疑惑的皈依而往。他也去到那里后,便安立在适当之处。第七经结束。显示巴利原文
Atha catuttho vuttanayeneva āgantvā abhāsi. Tattha gatāseti nibbematikasaraṇagamanena gatā. Sopi gantvā yathāṭhāneyeva aṭṭhāsīti. Sattamaṃ.
第八、《碎石片经》注释显示巴利原文
8. Sakalikasuttavaṇṇanā
38 「按摩腹园」:指以此命名的园林。当时阿阇世尚在母胎之中,他的母亲心想:“我腹中的这个孩子未来会成为国王的敌人。我又何必留着他?”为了堕胎,她让人按摩腹部,因而此地得名为“按摩腹”。又因为此园是为了让鹿群获得无畏安稳的居所而布施的,所以又称“鹿野苑”。显示巴利原文
38. Aṭṭhame maddakucchisminti evaṃnāmake uyyāne. Tañhi ajātasattumhi kucchigate tassa mātarā – ‘‘ayaṃ mayhaṃ kucchigato gabbho rañño sattu bhavissati. Kiṃ me iminā’’ti? Gabbhapātanatthaṃ kucchi maddāpitā. Tasmā ‘‘maddakucchī’’ti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ. Migānaṃ pana abhayavāsatthāya dinnattā migadāyoti vuccati.
经文中的“那时”,其背景叙述如下:提婆达多依仗阿阇世,曾派遣弓箭手和财护去谋害如来性命,却未能得逞。于是他心想:“不如我亲手把他杀掉!”便爬上灵鹫山,举起一块大如殿阁顶尖的巨石,一边砸下一边说:“让沙门乔达摩粉身碎骨!”据说此人膂力极大,能扛起五头大象的力量。然而,诸佛绝不可能因其它的攻击而丧失性命,这是不可能的事。当那块巨石朝着如来的身体飞来时,空中另有一块石头出现,将它接住。两块石头相撞,迸裂出许多巨大的碎片,其中一片击中了世尊的脚背边缘,脚仿佛被大斧砍伤,鲜血涌出,染满了脚面,犹如涂了虫漆一般。世尊向上望去,对提婆达多说:“你这愚人,造下了极重的恶业,你以邪恶的心、杀心,令如来身上流血。”从此以后,世尊便感到不适。比丘们心想:“这处住所荒芜不平,对众多刹帝利等人以及出家众来说,都不是适宜之处。”于是他们用轿床抬着世尊,前往按摩腹园。所以经文随后说:“那时,世尊的脚被碎石片割伤了。”显示巴利原文
Tena kho pana samayenāti ettha ayaṃ anupubbikathā – devadatto hi ajātasattuṃ nissāya dhanuggahe ca dhanapālakañca payojetvāpi tathāgatassa jīvitantarāyaṃ kātuṃ asakkonto ‘‘sahattheneva māressāmī’’ti gijjhakūṭapabbataṃ abhiruhitvā mahantaṃ kūṭāgārappamāṇaṃ silaṃ ukkhipitvā, ‘‘samaṇo gotamo cuṇṇavicuṇṇo hotū’’ti pavijjhi. Mahāthāmavā kiresa pañcannaṃ hatthīnaṃ balaṃ dhāreti. Aṭṭhānaṃ kho panetaṃ, yaṃ buddhānaṃ parūpakkamena jīvitantarāyo bhaveyyāti taṃ tathāgatassa sarīrābhimukhaṃ āgacchantaṃ ākāse aññā silā uṭṭhahitvā sampaṭicchi. Dvinnaṃ silānaṃ sampahārena mahanto pāsāṇassa sakalikā uṭṭhahitvā bhagavato piṭṭhipādapariyantaṃ abhihani, pādo mahāpharasunā pahato viya samuggatalohitena lākhārasamakkhito viya ahosi. Bhagavā uddhaṃ ulloketvā devadattaṃ etadavoca – ‘‘bahu tayā moghapurisa, apuññaṃ pasutaṃ, yo tvaṃ paduṭṭhacitto vadhakacitto tathāgatassa lohitaṃ uppādesī’’ti. Tato paṭṭhāya bhagavato aphāsu jātaṃ. Bhikkhū cintayiṃsu – ‘‘ayaṃ vihāro ujjaṅgalo visamo, bahūnaṃ khattiyādīnañceva pabbajitānañca anokāso’’ti. Te tathāgataṃ mañcasivikāya ādāya maddakucchiṃ nayiṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tena kho pana samayena bhagavato pādo sakalikāya khato hotī’’ti.
「强力的」:指力量很强烈的。「而已」:仅为语气虚词,不必译出。「苦」:与快乐相反。「粗重」:指沉重、粗厚。「粗糙」:指粗涩、生硬。「锐利」:指尖利、刺人。「不甜美」:指不柔美、不愉悦。心意不倾向于这些感受,它们也不会令心意增长、欢喜,因此称为「不可意的」。「具念、正知」:指具备了安忍诸受的念与正知。「不受干扰」:指不被这些感受所逼迫,不随躺卧、翻身等所生的感受而转,不被它们牵缠。显示巴利原文
Bhusāti balavatiyo. Sudanti nipātamattaṃ. Dukkhanti sukhapaṭikkhepo. Tibbāti bahalā. Kharāti pharusā. Kaṭukāti tikhiṇā. Asātāti amadhurā. Na tāsu mano appeti, na tā manaṃ appāyanti vaḍḍhentīti amanāpā. Sato sampajānoti vedanādhivāsanasatisampajaññena samannāgato hutvā. Avihaññamānoti apīḷiyamāno, samparivattasāyitāya vedanānaṃ vasaṃ agacchanto.
「狮子卧」:此处卧姿有四种——欲乐者卧、饿鬼卧、狮子卧、如来卧。其中,“比丘们,大多享受欲乐的有情,是左侧躺卧的”,这称为欲乐者卧。而那些享受欲乐者中,极少有右侧躺卧的。“比丘们,饿鬼通常仰躺而睡”,这称为饿鬼卧。因为他们血肉寡少,身体仅由骨架支撑,无法侧卧,只能仰躺而睡。“比丘们,通常兽王狮子将拇趾放入后腿之间,右侧而卧”,这称为狮子卧。兽王狮子威势强盛,它把两只前脚并放一处,两只后脚并放一处,将拇趾放入后腿之间,留意前脚、后脚与拇趾的安放位置,然后把头枕在两只前脚顶端躺下。即便睡了一整天,醒来时也不会惊慌,只是抬起头察看前脚等肢体的安放位置。若发现某处姿势偏移,便心中不悦,想:“这不符你的种姓,也不合你英勇的本性。”于是便一直那样躺着,不外出觅食。若见姿势无有偏移,便欢喜踊跃,起身舒展狮姿,抖动鬃毛,低昂三声发出狮子吼,然后才外出觅食。而第四禅的卧,则称为如来卧。在这四种卧姿中,此处经文指的是狮子卧。显示巴利原文
Sīhaseyyanti ettha kāmabhogiseyyā, petaseyyā, sīhaseyyā, tathāgataseyyāti catasso seyyā. Tattha ‘‘yebhuyyena, bhikkhave, kāmabhogī sattā vāmena passena sentī’’ti ayaṃ kāmabhogiseyyā. Tesu hi yebhuyyena dakkhiṇapassena sayāno nāma natthi. ‘‘Yebhuyyena, bhikkhave, petā uttānā sentī’’ti ayaṃ petaseyyā. Appamaṃsalohitattā hi aṭṭhisaṅghāṭajaṭitā ekena passena sayituṃ na sakkonti, uttānāva senti. ‘‘Yebhuyyena, bhikkhave, sīho migarājā naṅguṭṭhaṃ antarasatthimhi anupakkhipitvā dakkhiṇena passena setī’’ti ayaṃ sīhaseyyā. Tejussadattā hi sīho migarājā dve purimapāde ekasmiṃ, ‘pacchimapāde ekasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhapetvā naṅguṭṭhaṃ antarasatthimhi pakkhipitvā purimapādapacchimapādanaṅguṭṭhānaṃ ṭhitokāsaṃ sallakkhetvā dvinnaṃ purimapādānaṃ matthake sīsaṃ ṭhapetvā sayati, divasampi sayitvā pabujjhamāno na utrasanto pabujjhati, sīsaṃ pana ukkhipitvā purimapādādīnaṃ ṭhitokāsaṃ sallakkheti’. Sace kiñci ṭhānaṃ vijahitvā ṭhitaṃ hoti, ‘‘nayidaṃ tuyhaṃ jātiyā, na sūrabhāvassa anurūpa’’nti anattamano hutvā tattheva sayati, na gocarāya pakkamati. Avijahitvā ṭhite pana ‘‘tuyhaṃ jātiyā ca sūrabhāvassa ca anurūpamida’’nti haṭṭhatuṭṭho uṭṭhāya sīhavijambhitaṃ vijambhitvā kesarabhāraṃ vidhunitvā tikkhattuṃ sīhanādaṃ naditvā gocarāya pakkamati. Catutthajjhānaseyyā pana ‘‘tathāgataseyyā’’ti vuccati. Tāsu idha sīhaseyyā āgatā. Ayañhi tejussadairiyāpathattā uttamaseyyā nāma.
「脚叠于脚」:指将左脚置于右脚之上。「稍相错开」:即超过一些放置,意为稍微错开而放。若脚踝与脚踝、或膝盖与膝盖相碰摩擦,便会持续产生苦受,心则不能专一,如此躺卧便不安稳。若如是错开而不相触地放置,便不会产生苦受,心得以专一,躺卧即安稳。因此,他如此躺卧下来。「具念、正知」:指具备了对躺卧姿势保持觉照的念与正知。然而,经中此处并未提到“起身想”,这是由于世尊当时正因病躺卧。显示巴利原文
Pāde pādanti dakkhiṇapāde vāmapādaṃ. Accādhāyāti atiādhāya, īsakaṃ atikkamma ṭhapetvā . Gopphakena hi gopphake jāṇunā vā jāṇumhi saṅghaṭṭiyamāne abhiṇhaṃ vedanā uppajjati, cittaṃ ekaggaṃ na hoti, seyyā aphāsukā hoti. Yathā na saṅghaṭṭeti, evaṃ atikkamma ṭhapite vedanā nuppajjati, cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, seyyā phāsu hoti. Tasmā evaṃ nipajji. Sato sampajānoti sayanapariggāhakasatisampajaññena samannāgato. ‘‘Uṭṭhānasañña’’nti panettha na vuttaṃ, gilānaseyyā hesā tathāgatassa.
「七百」:在此经中,所有这些天人都来到了世尊生病躺卧之处。「发出感叹语」:按理说,来到病人卧处的天人本应心怀忧愁。然而,这些天人见到如来如此安忍于诸受,便发出感叹:“啊,诸佛真有大威神力!在如此剧烈的感受现前时,竟连丝毫变异的表现也没有。他身体安卧于吉祥床座,纹丝不动,犹如一尊装饰妥帖、安奉好的金像。而且,面容反而更增光耀:他那散发光辉、如满月般明净、又如盛开红莲般的脸庞如此端严;他身体肤色之处,如今也像精心打磨光滑的黄金,极为纯净明澈。”因此,他们发出了这样的感叹语。显示巴利原文
Sattasatāti imasmiṃ sutte sabbāpi tā devatā gilānaseyyaṭṭhānaṃ āgatā. Udānaṃ udānesīti gilānaseyyaṃ āgatānaṃ domanassena bhavitabbaṃ siyā. Imāsaṃ pana tathāgatassa vedanādhivāsanaṃ disvā, ‘‘aho buddhānaṃ mahānubhāvatā! Evarūpāsu nāma vedanāsu vattamānāsu vikāramattampi natthi, sirīsayane alaṅkaritvā ṭhapitasuvaṇṇarūpakaṃ viya aniñjamānena kāyena nipanno, idānissa adhikataraṃ mukhavaṇṇo virocati, ābhāsampanno puṇṇacando viya sampati vikasitaṃ viya ca aravindaṃ assa mukhaṃ sobhati, kāyepi vaṇṇāyatanaṃ idāni susammaṭṭhakañcanaṃ viya vippasīdatī’’ti udānaṃ udapādi.
「尊者,他确实如同龙象」(Nāgovata bhoti)——此处「尊者」(bhoti)为一种称呼方式。「龙象」(Nāgo):因具有大力之义,故称龙象。「如同龙象」(Nāgavatā):即具有龙象之状态。在「确实如同狮子」(Sīho vatāti)等语句中,以无所畏惧之义而称为「狮子」(sīho)。以善巧纯熟、能知因果之义,称为「良骏」(Ājānīyo)。以无有等同之义,称为「牛王」(Nisabho)。在牛群中,统领百牛的首领称为usabho,统领千牛的首领称为vasabho,统领十万牛的首领才称为nisabho。然而,世尊是以无可匹敌之义,自称具足牛王之地位。因此,正是基于此义,此处称他为「nisabho」。以能承载重担之义,称为「负重者」(Dhorayho)。以已无烦恼泄漏之义,称为「已调御者」(Danto)。显示巴利原文
Nāgovata bhoti, ettha bhoti dhammālapanaṃ. Balavantaṭṭhena nāgo. Nāgavatāti nāgabhāvena. Sīho vatātiādīsu asantāsanaṭṭhena sīho. Byattaparicayaṭṭhena kāraṇākāraṇajānanena vā ājānīyo. Appaṭisamaṭṭhena nisabho. Gavasatajeṭṭhako hi usabho, gavasahassajeṭṭhako vasabho, gavasatasahassajeṭṭhako nisabhoti vuccati. Bhagavā pana appaṭisamaṭṭhena āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānāti. Tenevatthena idha ‘‘nisabho’’ti vutto. Dhuravāhaṭṭhena dhorayho. Nibbisevanaṭṭhena danto.
「你看!」(Passa):这是一个对象不确定的命令式。「定」(Samādhiṃ):指阿拉汉果的定。「善解脱」(Suvimuttaṃ):指以果的解脱而彻底解脱。随着贪欲的心称为「倾向」(abhinataṃ);随着嗔恚的心称为「背离」(apanataṃ)。否定这两者,故说「非倾向、非背离」(na cābhinataṃ na cāpanataṃ)。「不是以刻意压制而守护的状态」(Na ca sasaṅkhāraniggayhavāritagataṃ):并非以刻意的努力与精进镇伏烦恼后,所维持的那种守护状态;因为烦恼已彻底断除,此状态乃由果定而住立。这是其含义。「应被冒犯」(Atikkamitabbaṃ):指应被侵害、应被攻击。「由于不见」(Adassanā):是因为无知。因为无知之人,犹如眼盲的愚者,会对这样的导师犯下过失——天人们如此说,即是在影射攻击提婆达多。显示巴利原文
Passāti aniyamitāṇatti. Samādhinti arahattaphalasamādhiṃ. Suvimuttanti phalavimuttiyā suvimuttaṃ. Rāgānugataṃ pana cittaṃ abhinataṃ nāma hoti, dosānugataṃ apanataṃ. Tadubhayapaṭikkhepena na cābhinataṃ na cāpanatanti āha. Na ca sasaṅkhāraniggayhavāritagatanti na sasaṅkhārena sappayogena kilese niggahetvā vāritavataṃ, kilesānaṃ pana chinnattā vataṃ phalasamādhinā samāhitanti attho. Atikkamitabbanti viheṭhetabbaṃ ghaṭṭetabbaṃ. Adassanāti aññāṇā. Aññāṇī hi andhabālova evarūpe satthari aparajjheyyāti devadattaṃ ghaṭṭayamānā vadanti.
「Pañcavedāti」:指持诵包括第五吠陀(传说)在内诸吠陀的人。「Sataṃ samaṃ」:一百年。「Tapassīti」:成为以苦行为依止的修行者。「Caranti」:他们行持。「Na sammāvimuttanti」:即使这样的婆罗门行持百年,其心亦非正解脱。「Hīnattarūpā na pāraṃ gamā teti」:因本质低劣,他们不能到达涅槃彼岸。另有异读作「hīnattharūpā」,指那些目的卑劣、困穷之人。「Taṇhādhipannāti」:被爱欲所淹没。「Vatasīlabaddhāti」:被犬戒、牛戒等种种誓愿与种种禁戒所束缚。「Lūkhaṃ tapanti」:五火炙烤、卧刺床等粗糙的苦行。随后,那位天女为说明教法具有能导出之性质,说出「na mānakāmassa」等偈颂。其意义如前所述。第八。显示巴利原文
Pañcavedāti itihāsapañcamānaṃ vedānaṃ dhārakā. Sataṃ samanti vassasataṃ. Tapassīti tapanissitakā hutvā. Caranti carantā. Na sammāvimuttanti sacepi evarūpā brāhmaṇā vassasataṃ caranti, cittañca nesaṃ sammā vimuttaṃ na hoti. Hīnattarūpā na pāraṃ gamā teti hīnattasabhāvā te nibbānaṅgamā na honti. ‘‘Hīnattharūpā’’tipi pāṭho, hīnatthajātikā parihīnatthāti attho. Taṇhādhipannāti taṇhāya ajjhotthaṭā. Vatasīlabaddhāti ajavatakukkuravatādīhi ca vatehi tādiseheva ca sīlehi baddhā. Lūkhaṃ tapanti pañcātapatāpanaṃ kaṇṭakaseyyādikaṃ tapaṃ. Idāni sā devatā sāsanassa niyyānikabhāvaṃ kathentī na mānakāmassātiādimāha. Taṃ vuttatthamevāti. Aṭṭhamaṃ.
第九:《初雨云女经》注解显示巴利原文
9. Paṭhamapajjunnadhītusuttavaṇṇanā
39 第三十九经(第九品)中,“雨云之女”:她是名为雨云的降雨云天王之女,属四天王天。“Abhivandeti”即她说:“我顶礼世尊您的双足。”“Cakkhumatāti”指由具足五眼的具眼者如来。“Dhammo anubuddhoti”她说:“此法,过去我仅从他人那里听闻。”“Sāhaṃ dānīti”如今,我本人。“Sakkhi jānāmīti”我以证智亲自觉了。“Vigarahantāti”毁谤者,指以“文字、词句低劣”或“不具导出性”等理由进行毁谤的人。“Roruvanti”叫唤地狱有两种:烟叫唤与焰叫唤。其中,烟叫唤是独立的地狱,焰叫唤则是阿鼻大地狱的名称。因彼处众生在火焰恒燃时一再哀号,故名“叫唤”。“Ghoranti”极其恐怖。“Khantiyā upasamena upetāti”她以认可、宽恕的忍辱,以及贪等烦恼的寂止而具足。第九。显示巴利原文
39. Navame pajjunnassa dhītāti pajjunnassa nāma vassavalāhakadevarañño cātumahārājikassa dhītā. Abhivandeti bhagavā tumhākaṃ pāde vandāmi. Cakkhumatāti pañcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumantena tathāgatena. Dhammo anubuddhoti, ‘‘idaṃ mayā pubbe paresaṃ santike kevalaṃ sutaṃyeva āsī’’ti vadati. Sāhaṃ dānīti, sā ahaṃ idāni. Sakkhi jānāmīti, paṭivedhavasena paccakkhameva jānāmi. Vigarahantāti, ‘‘hīnakkharapadabyañjano’’ti vā ‘‘aniyyāniko’’ti vā evaṃ garahantā. Roruvanti, dve roruvā – dhūmaroruvo ca jālaroruvo ca. Tattha dhūmaroruvo visuṃ hoti, jālaroruvoti pana avīcimahānirayassevetaṃ nāmaṃ. Tattha hi sattā aggimhi jalante jalante punappunaṃ ravaṃ ravanti, tasmā so ‘‘roruvo’’ti vuccati. Ghoranti dāruṇaṃ. Khantiyā upasamena upetāti ruccitvā khamāpetvā gahaṇakhantiyā ca rāgādiupasamena ca upetāti. Navamaṃ.
第十:《第二雨云女经》注解显示巴利原文
10. Dutiyapajjunnadhītusuttavaṇṇanā
40 第十经中,“dhammañcāti”:其中“法及(ca)”一词的“ca”字也包含了僧伽,如此礼敬三宝后说“来到了这里”。“Atthavatīti”:有义理的(女神们),即具有义理者。“Bahunāpi kho tanti”:即使她所宣说的法义甚为繁多,我亦能依种种理趣分别解说此法。“Tādiso dhammoti”:这是为了说明,这样的法正是世尊之法,其体性如此安立、其相如此显现,理应以众多方式分别解说。“Lapayissāmīti”:我将宣说,即我将予以开示。“Yāvatā me manasā pariyattanti”:对于我心所领悟的义理,我不必耗费整日,而如压榨蜜房取其精粹一般,于片刻间以简略方式宣说。其余文句依文法可知。第十终。显示巴利原文
40. Dasame dhammañcāti ca saddena saṅghañca, iti tīṇi ratanāni namassamānā idhāgatāti vadati. Atthavatīti, atthavatiyo. Bahunāpi kho tanti yaṃ dhammaṃ sā abhāsi, taṃ dhammaṃ bahunāpi pariyāyena ahaṃ vibhajeyyaṃ. Tādiso dhammoti, tādiso hi ayaṃ bhagavā dhammo, taṃsaṇṭhito tappaṭibhāgo bahūhi pariyāyehi vibhajitabbayuttakoti dasseti. Lapayissāmīti, kathayissāmi. Yāvatā me manasā pariyattanti yattakaṃ mayā manasā pariyāpuṭaṃ, tassatthaṃ divasaṃ avatvā madhupaṭalaṃ pīḷentī viya muhutteneva saṃkhittena kathessāmi. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti. Dasamaṃ.
第五 燃烧品显示巴利原文
5. Ādittavaggo
第一:《燃烧经》注解显示巴利原文
1. Ādittasuttavaṇṇanā
41 在《燃烧品》第一经中,“以老、死”等是开示的要点;然而世间实则是被贪等十一种火所燃烧的。“以布施”指的是布施的思。“所施成为妥善取出者”:意为由布施福德的思,所施之物唯归施主所有,犹如屋主取出的物品一般,因此这样说。“盗贼夺去”:对于未曾布施的财物,盗贼会夺走,国王也会夺走,火会烧毁,纵使存放某处也会消亡。“终”指死亡。“身与所有物”:指身体,以及尚未被盗贼等毁坏的财富。“升天”:如同韦桑答拉大王等那样,投生于天界。第一段结束。显示巴利原文
41. Ādittavaggassa paṭhame jarāya maraṇena cāti desanāsīsametaṃ, rāgādīhi pana ekādasahi aggīhi loko ādittova. Dānenāti dānacetanāya. Dinnaṃ hoti sunīhatanti dānapuññacetanāhi dāyakasseva hoti gharasāmikassa viya nīhatabhaṇḍakaṃ, tenetaṃ vuttaṃ. Corā harantīti adinne bhoge corāpi haranti rājānopi, aggipi ḍahati, ṭhapitaṭṭhānepi nassanti. Antenāti maraṇena. Sarīraṃ sapariggahanti sarīrañceva corādīnaṃ vasena avinaṭṭhabhoge ca. Saggamupetīti vessantaramahārājādayo viya sagge nibbattatīti. Paṭhamaṃ.
第二《施何等经》注显示巴利原文
2. Kiṃdadasuttavaṇṇanā
42 在第二经中,「施食者」:因为即使极为强壮的人,若不吃两三顿饭也无法站立;而进食之后,即便原本虚弱也会变得充满力量,因此说“施食者是施力者”。「施衣者」:因为即使容貌端正,若穿着破烂衣服或没有衣服,也会变得丑陋、受人轻视、不堪入目;而被衣服遮蔽则犹如天子般庄严,因此说“施衣者是施美貌者”。「施乘具者」:指布施象车等交通工具的人。不过在此处——显示巴利原文
42. Dutiye annadoti yasmā atibalavāpi dve tīṇi bhattāni abhutvā uṭṭhātuṃ na sakkoti, bhutvā pana dubbalopi hutvā balasampanno hoti, tasmā ‘‘annado balado’’ti āha. Vatthadoti yasmā surūpopi duccoḷo vā acoḷo vā virūpo hoti ohīḷito duddasiko, vatthacchanno devaputto viya sobhati , tasmā ‘‘vatthado hoti vaṇṇado’’ti āha. Yānadoti hatthiyānādīnaṃ dāyako. Tesu pana –
“对于沙门,象车并不适宜,
不乘马车,也不乘车而行;
而这样的车乘,才适合沙门——
守护凉鞋,即是戒蕴。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Na hatthiyānaṃ samaṇassa kappati, Na assayānaṃ, na rathena yātuṃ; Idañca yānaṃ samaṇassa kappati, Upāhanā rakkhato sīlakhandha’’nti.
因此,凡是布施伞、凉鞋、手杖、床、椅的人,以及修整道路、建造阶梯、架设桥梁、备办舟船的人,这一切人都可说是布施了交通工具。“成为带来安乐者”:因为交通工具能带来安乐,所以称为“带来安乐者”。“成为给予眼者”:在黑暗中,即使有眼者也看不见色相,由于布施灯,所以称为“给予眼者”,并且如同阿那律长老那样,也能获得天眼的成就。显示巴利原文
Tasmā chattupāhanakattarayaṭṭhimañcapīṭhānaṃ dāyako, yo ca maggaṃ sodheti, nisseṇiṃ karoti, setuṃ karoti, nāvaṃ paṭiyādeti, sabbopi yānadova hoti. Sukhado hotīti yānassa sukhāvahanato sukhado nāma hoti. Cakkhudoti andhakāre cakkhumantānampi rūpadassanābhāvato dīpado cakkhudo nāma hoti, anuruddhatthero viya dibbacakkhu sampadampi labhati.
“成为一切施主”:他成了给予一切——诸如力量等——的施主。譬如一位比丘去到两三个村庄托钵乞食,一无所得而回,在清凉的池沼中沐浴之后,进入住所,在床榻上躺卧片刻,再起身坐下,此时他身体的力量就仿佛被重新注入了一般。在外游方的人,肤色会被风和热所烤灼;进入住所,关上门躺卧片刻之后,身体中不平息的部分便平息下来,调顺的部分开始运作,肤色也仿佛被重新注入,恢复了光采。在外游方的人,脚会被荆棘刺伤,被树桩撞到,还会遭遇蛇虫等的侵扰以及盗贼的恐怖;进入住所,关上门躺下之后,这一切侵扰和怖畏便都不存在了。对于诵修法义的人,会生起法所带来的喜乐;对于专注禅修业处的人,则会生起寂静的安乐。同样地,在外游方的人会出汗,眼睛会感到眩动不安,刚进入住所的那一刻,感觉就像掉入井中一般,床、椅等物都分辨不清;但坐下休息片刻之后,眼根的明净感便仿佛被重新注入,变得清晰,门扇、窗扉、床、椅等都能看得清楚了。因此,佛陀才会这样说:‘凡是施予住所的人,他即是一切施主。’显示巴利原文
Sabbadado hotīti sabbesaṃyeva balādīnaṃ dāyako hoti. Dve tayo gāme piṇḍāya caritvā kiñci aladdhā āgatassāpi sītalāya pokkharaṇiyā nhāyitvā patissayaṃ pavisitvā muhuttaṃ mañce nipajjitvā uṭṭhāya nisinnassa hi kāye balaṃ āharitvā pakkhittaṃ viya hoti. Bahi vicarantassa ca kāye vaṇṇāyatanaṃ vātātapehi jhāyati, patissayaṃ pavisitvā dvāraṃ pidhāya muhuttaṃ nipannassa ca visabhāgasantati vūpasammati, sabhāgasantati okkamati, vaṇṇāyatanaṃ āharitvā pakkhittaṃ viya hoti. Bahi vicarantassa pāde kaṇṭako vijjhati, khāṇu paharati, sarīsapādiparissayo ceva corabhayañca uppajjati, patissayaṃ pavisitvā dvāraṃ pidhāya nipannassa sabbete parissayā na honti, dhammaṃ sajjhāyantassa dhammapītisukhaṃ, kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikarontassa upasamasukhaṃ uppajjati. Tathā bahi vicarantassa ca sedā muccanti, akkhīni phandanti, senāsanaṃ pavisanakkhaṇe kūpe otiṇṇo viya hoti, mañcapīṭhādīni na paññāyanti. Muhuttaṃ nisinnassa pana akkhipasādo āharitvā pakkhitto viya hoti, dvārakavāṭavātapānamañcapīṭhādīni paññāyanti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘so ca sabbadado hoti, yo dadāti upassaya’’nti.
“他又是施予不死者”:这就好比用殊胜的食物把钵装满一样,他所施予的,是名为‘给予不死’的布施。“教导法者”:凡是教导法、讲解义注、读诵圣典、解答所问、传授业处、举办法会的人,这一切人都称为教导法。应当知道,在一切布施当中,这法施才是最上的。关于这点,佛陀也曾说过:显示巴利原文
Amataṃdado ca so hotīti paṇītabhojanassa pattaṃ pūrento viya amaraṇadānaṃ nāma deti. Yo dhammamanusāsatīti yo dhammaṃ anusāsati, aṭṭhakathaṃ katheti, pāḷiṃ vāceti, pucchitapañhaṃ vissajjeti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ ācikkhati, dhammassavanaṃ karoti, sabbopesa dhammaṃ anusāsati nāma. Sabbadānānañca idaṃ dhammadānameva agganti veditabbaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
一切布施中,法布施最胜,
一切味中,法味最胜;
一切乐中,法乐最胜,
“渴爱的灭尽,能胜一切苦。”(《法句》354)第二;
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sabbadānaṃ dhammadānaṃ jināti, Sabbarasaṃ dhammaraso jināti; Sabbaratiṃ dhammarati jināti, Taṇhakkhayo sabbadukkhaṃ jinātī’’ti. (dha. pa. 354); Dutiyaṃ;
第三 食经注释显示巴利原文
3. Annasuttavaṇṇanā
43 第三经中,「欢喜」:指渴望、希求。「追随」:指亲近、跟随,就像居士质多、尸婆罗长老那样,紧随施主不舍。「因此」:因为在现世与他世,那位施食者无论到哪里都会被追随,因此(施食者总是被人追随)。其余文句的意义已很明白。第三。显示巴利原文
43. Tatiye abhinandantīti patthenti. Bhajatīti upagacchati, cittagahapatisīvalittherādike viya pacchato anubandhati. Tasmāti yasmā idhaloke paraloke ca annadāyakameva anugacchati, tasmā. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti. Tatiyaṃ.
第四 《一根本经》注释显示巴利原文
4. Ekamūlasuttavaṇṇanā
44 第四经中,「一根本」:意思是无明是爱的根本,爱也是无明的根本,但这里特指爱。由于常见和断见两种见解,它(爱)在其中转动,因此称为「二转」。又因为有贪、嗔、痴三种污垢,所以称为「三垢」。其中,无明是以俱生缘的方式成为污垢,贪与嗔则是以亲依止缘的方式成为污垢。五种欲功德是它扩展的场所,它在其中铺展,所以称为「五扩展」。它因为永远无法被填满,所以称为「海」。它又在内在六处与外在六处的十二处中转动回旋,因此称为「十二转」。由于它没有一个可以立足的地方,所以称为「深渊」。所谓「一根本……(乃至)……深渊」,是说这位圣者已经渡过、超越、完全跨过了这些。第四经注释结束。显示巴利原文
44. Catutthe ekamūlanti avijjā taṇhāya mūlaṃ, taṇhā avijjāya. Idha pana taṇhā adhippetā. Dvīhi sassatucchedadiṭṭhīhi āvaṭṭatīti dvirāvaṭṭā. Sā ca rāgādīhi tīhi malehi timalā. Tatrāssā moho sahajātakoṭiyā malaṃ hoti, rāgadosā upanissayakoṭiyā. Pañca pana kāmaguṇā assā pattharaṇaṭṭhānā, tesu sā pattharatīti pañcapattharā. Sā ca apūraṇīyaṭṭhena samuddo. Ajjhattikabāhiresu panesā dvādasāyatanesu āvaṭṭati parivaṭṭatīti dvādasāvaṭṭā. Apatiṭṭhaṭṭhena pana pātāloti vuccatīti. Ekamūlaṃ…pe… pātālaṃ, atari isi, uttari samatikkamīti attho. Catutthaṃ.
第五 《无等比经》注释显示巴利原文
5. Anomasuttavaṇṇanā
45 第五首偈颂中,“无等比之名”:因具足一切功德,故名无缺减之名,即圆满名称之义。“见微细义者”:世尊能观见极微细之义,如蕴内部等,故称见微细义者。“给予智慧者”:为令证得随顺智慧,而以说法赐予智慧之人。“不著于欲宅”:即不粘著于五种欲功德(五欲)之所依处。“已步行”:指世尊曾于大菩提座,以圣道而行,今虽不行,然依过往状态而说。“大仙”:即寻求圣戒蕴等伟大功德蕴之人,是彻底的遍求者。第五首偈颂注释终。显示巴利原文
45. Pañcame anomanāmanti sabbaguṇasamannāgatattā avekallanāmaṃ, paripūranāmanti attho. Nipuṇatthadassinti bhagavā saṇhasukhume khandhantarādayo atthe passatīti nipuṇatthadassī. Paññādadanti anvayapaññādhigamāya paṭipadaṃ kathanavasena paññāya dāyakaṃ. Kāmālaye asattanti pañcakāmaguṇālaye alaggaṃ. Kamamānanti bhagavā mahābodhimaṇḍeyeva ariyamaggena gato, na idāni gacchati, atītaṃ pana upādāya idaṃ vuttaṃ. Mahesinti mahantānaṃ sīlakkhandhādīnaṃ esitāraṃ pariyesitāranti. Pañcamaṃ.
第六 《天女经》注释显示巴利原文
6. Accharāsuttavaṇṇanā
46 第六首偈颂中,“被天女群所喧闹的”:据说有一位天子,在导师世尊的教法中出家,履行义务、精进修行。第五个雨安居自恣之后,他精通了两种本母,学习了业处与非业处,择取自己喜爱的一个业处。他少欲少事,入于森林。世尊曾开许中夜可作睡眠时分。当中夜到来时,他心想:“我畏惧放逸。”便将卧床竖起,日夜不食,专心用功于业处之上。显示巴利原文
46. Chaṭṭhe accharāgaṇasaṅghuṭṭhanti ayaṃ kira devaputto satthusāsane pabbajitvā vattapaṭipattiṃ pūrayamāno pañcavassakāle pavāretvā dvemātikaṃ paguṇaṃ katvā kammākammaṃ uggahetvā cittarucitaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggaṇhitvā sallahukavuttiko araññaṃ pavisitvā yo bhagavatā majjhimayāmo sayanassa koṭṭhāsoti anuññāto. Tasmimpi sampatte ‘‘pamādassa bhāyāmī’’ti mañcakaṃ ukkhipitvā rattiñca divā ca nirāhāro kammaṭṭhānameva manasākāsi.
接着,他体内生起刀风(犹如刀割般的剧痛),夺去了他的性命。他正是在精勤修行之时命终。事实上,任何比丘若在经行处经行,或依支撑柱而立,或在经行道尽头将袈裟置于头上而坐或卧,或在大众中庄严法座上说法时而命终,都称为“在精勤之时命终”。这位比丘便是在经行处命终。由于亲依止力薄弱,尚未证得漏尽,他即于三十三天的大天宫门口,如从睡梦中醒来般取得了结生。就在那一刹那,他生起一个犹如金拱门、高广三牛呼之身。显示巴利原文
Athassa abbhantare satthakavātā uppajjitvā jīvitaṃ pariyādiyiṃsu. So dhurasmiṃyeva kālamakāsi. Yo hi koci bhikkhu caṅkame caṅkamamāno vā ālambanatthambhaṃ nissāya ṭhito vā caṅkamakoṭiyaṃ cīvaraṃ sīse ṭhapetvā nisinno vā nipanno vā parisamajjhe alaṅkatadhammāsane dhammaṃ desento vā kālaṃ karoti, sabbo so dhurasmiṃ kālaṃ karoti nāma. Iti ayaṃ caṅkamane kālaṃ katvā upanissayamandatāya āsavakkhayaṃ appatto tāvatiṃsabhavane mahāvimānadvāre niddāyitvā pabujjhanto viya paṭisandhiṃ aggahesi. Tāvadevassa suvaṇṇatoraṇaṃ viya tigāvuto attabhāvo nibbatti.
天宫内有上千位天女,见他到来,心想:“天宫的主人——天子来了,我们当好好侍奉!”便手持种种乐器,簇拥围绕上来。这位天子却还不知道自己已死,仍保持着出家者的认知。他望见天女们时,如同见到来寺院游行的妇人一般,心生羞惭,便像穿粪扫衣的比丘那样,将身上那件厚软的天衣偏袒一肩,覆盖肩头,收摄诸根,低垂着头站在那里。仅凭他的威仪形相,天女们便认出“这是一位沙门天子”,于是这样说道:“尊者,天子啊,这里是天界,不是修习沙门法的地方,而是享受福报成就之处啊。”但他仍那样站着。天女们心想:“他还没有意识到这里是什么地方”,便弹奏起乐器。他依然不看不顾,照旧站在那里。显示巴利原文
Antovimāne sahassamattā accharā taṃ disvā, ‘‘vimānasāmiko devaputto āgato, ramayissāma na’’nti tūriyāni gahetvā parivārayiṃsu. Devaputto na tāva cutabhāvaṃ jānāti, pabbajitasaññīyeva accharā oloketvā vihāracārikaṃ āgataṃ mātugāmaṃ disvā lajjī. Paṃsukūliko viya upari ṭhitaṃ ghanadukūlaṃ ekaṃsaṃ karonto aṃsakūṭaṃ paṭicchādetvā indriyāni okkhipitvā adhomukho aṭṭhāsi. Tassa kāyavikāreneva tā devatā ‘‘samaṇadevaputto aya’’nti ñatvā evamāhaṃsu – ‘‘ayya, devaputta, devaloko nāmāyaṃ, na samaṇadhammassa karaṇokāso, sampattiṃ anubhavanokāso’’ti. So tatheva aṭṭhāsi. Devatā ‘‘na tāvāyaṃ sallakkhetī’’ti tūriyāni paggaṇhiṃsu. So tathāpi anolokentova aṭṭhāsi.
接着,她们把一面全身镜放在他面前。他看见自己的映像,才知已死,心想:‘我修习沙门法,并非为了希求这般境地,而是为了希求那最上义——阿拉汉果啊!’因此对那殊胜成就生起了懊悔,就像一位期待获得金带而踏入角斗场的力士,最终却只得到基础的拳式一样。他思惟:‘名为天界的这成就容易获得,而佛陀出现于世间则极为难遇。’于是,他不进入天宫,就凭那未破损的戒行,在天女们的围绕中,来到世尊面前,顶礼后站在一边,说出了这首偈颂。显示巴利原文
Athassa sabbakāyikaṃ ādāsaṃ purato ṭhapayiṃsu. So chāyaṃ disvā cutabhāvaṃ ñatvā, ‘‘na mayā imaṃ ṭhānaṃ patthetvā samaṇadhammo kato, uttamatthaṃ arahattaṃ patthetvā kato’’ti sampattiyā vippaṭisārī ahosi, ‘‘suvaṇṇapaṭaṃ paṭilabhissāmī’’ti takkayitvā yuddhaṭṭhānaṃ otiṇṇamallo mūlakamuṭṭhiṃ labhitvā viya. So – ‘‘ayaṃ saggasampatti nāma sulabhā, buddhānaṃ pātubhāvo dullabho’’ti cintetvā vimānaṃ apavisitvāva asambhinneneva sīlena accharāsaṅghaparivuto dasabalassa santikaṃ āgamma abhivādetvā ekamantaṃ ṭhito imaṃ gāthaṃ abhāsi.
其中,‘被天女群所喧闹的’:是被天女群用歌唱与乐器的声音所喧闹的。‘为毗舍遮群所依止的’:他是将那天女群说成了毗舍遮群。‘林’:指欢喜林。因为他心意决定的习性,且自恃崇高,所以不愿称天神群为‘天神群’,而说‘毗舍遮群’。他也不称‘欢喜林’,而说‘迷林’。‘如何能度脱?’:即如何能出离、如何能超越?请世尊为我开示作为阿拉汉果近因的观。显示巴利原文
Tattha accharāgaṇasaṅghuṭṭhanti accharāgaṇena gītavāditasaddehi saṅghositaṃ. Pisācagaṇasevitanti tameva accharāgaṇaṃ pisācagaṇaṃ katvā vadati. Vananti nandanavanaṃ sandhāya vadati. Ayañhi niyāmacittatāya attano garubhāvena devagaṇaṃ ‘‘devagaṇo’’ti vattuṃ na roceti. ‘‘Pisācagaṇo’’ti vadati. Nandanavanañca ‘‘nandana’’nti avatvā ‘‘mohana’’nti vadati . Kathaṃ yātrā bhavissatīti kathaṃ niggamanaṃ bhavissati, kathaṃ atikkamo bhavissati, arahattassa me padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ vipassanaṃ ācikkhatha bhagavāti vadati.
那时,世尊心想:‘这位天子过度精进,究竟是怎么回事?’他转而观察后,了知这位天子曾于自己的教法中出家,心想:‘他因过度精进而命终,生于天界,至今仍以未破损的戒行而来。’对尚未确立修行的初学者,佛陀们犹如画师在墙上作画前先要整治墙面一般,先教导预备的修行:‘先清净你的戒,修习定,使了知业为自作的智慧正直。’对于已经具足条件的修行者,则教导作为阿拉汉道近因的微细空观。而这位天子正是具足条件的修行者,戒行无瑕,他具备未来的道,于是世尊为了教导空观,便从‘名为正直’等开始说法。显示巴利原文
Atha bhagavā ‘‘atisallikhateva ayaṃ devaputto, kiṃ nu kho ida’’nti? Āvajjento attano sāsane pabbajitabhāvaṃ ñatvā – ‘‘ayaṃ accāraddhavīriyatāya kālaṃ katvā devaloke nibbatto, ajjāpissa caṅkamanasmiṃyeva attabhāvo asambhinnena sīlena āgato’’ti cintesi. Buddhā ca akatābhinivesassa ādikammikassa akataparikammassa antevāsino cittakāro bhittiparikammaṃ viya – ‘‘sīlaṃ tāva sodhehi, samādhiṃ bhāvehi, kammassakatapaññaṃ ujuṃ karohī’’ti paṭhamaṃ pubbabhāgappaṭipadaṃ ācikkhanti, kārakassa pana yuttapayuttassa arahattamaggapadaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ saṇhasukhumaṃ suññatāvipassanaṃyeva ācikkhanti, ayañca devaputto kārako abhinnasīlo, eko maggo assa anāgatoti suññatāvipassanaṃ ācikkhanto ujuko nāmātiādimāha.
在此,‘正直’:因为远离了身体等的弯曲,所以八支圣道名为正直。‘名为无怖畏的方向’:是指涅槃而说。因为在涅槃中没有任何恐惧,或者说,达到涅槃者即无恐惧,所以说‘名为无怖畏的方向’。‘车无嘈杂声’:是指八支圣道。就像普通的车,当车轴未经润滑,或过多的人乘坐时,便会嘎吱作响,发出嘈杂声;圣道则不然。即使有八万四千众生同时登上,它也不作响,不嘈杂。因此称为‘无嘈杂声’。‘以法轮相连’:以称为身精进和心精进的法轮相连。显示巴利原文
Tattha ujukoti kāyavaṅkādīnaṃ abhāvato aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo ujuko nāma. Abhayā nāma sā disāti nibbānaṃ sandhāyāha. Tasmiṃ hi kiñci bhayaṃ natthi, taṃ vā pattassa bhayaṃ natthīti ‘‘abhayā nāma sā disā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ratho akūjanoti aṭṭhaṅgiko maggova adhippeto. Yathā hi pākatikaratho akkhe vā anabbhañjite atirekesu vā manussesu abhiruḷhesu kūjati viravati, na evaṃ ariyamaggo. So hi ekappahārena caturāsītiyāpi pāṇasahassesu abhiruhantesu na kūjati na viravati. Tasmā ‘‘akūjano’’ti vutto. Dhammacakkehi saṃyutoti kāyikacetasikavīriyasaṅkhātehi dhammacakkehi saṃyutto.
‘惭’:在这里,说到惭时,愧也就被一同包含在内了。它的‘栏楯’:如同外道战车上安立木制栏楯,是为了防止车上战士掉落;此道车的栏楯,便是内在与外在生起的惭与愧。‘念为围绕’:如同战车以狮皮等围绕,此道车则以相应的念为围绕。‘法’:指出世间道。‘以正见为先导’:以观正见为先导,它走在前面,因此称为‘正见为先导’,亦即那以正见为先导的道。如同国王的侍从们先清除盲人、跛子等,把道路清扫干净之后,国王才出行;同样地,观以无常等正见清净了诸蕴之后,当如实了知地轮时,道正见方才生起。因此说:‘我说法为御者,正见为先导。’显示巴利原文
Hirīti ettha hiriggahaṇena ottappampi gahitameva hoti. Tassa apālamboti yathā bāhirakarathassa rathe ṭhitānaṃ yodhānaṃ apatanatthāya dārumayaṃ apālambanaṃ hoti, evaṃ imassa maggarathassa ajjhattabahiddhāsamuṭṭhānaṃ hirottappaṃ apālambanaṃ. Satyassaparivāraṇanti rathassa sīhacammādiparivāro viya imassāpi maggarathassa sampayuttā sati parivāraṇaṃ. Dhammanti lokuttaramaggaṃ . Sammādiṭṭhipurejavanti vipassanāsammādiṭṭhipurejavā assa pubbayāyikāti sammādiṭṭhipurejavo, taṃ sammādiṭṭhipurejavaṃ. Yathā hi paṭhamataraṃ rājapurisehi kāṇakuṇiādīnaṃnīharaṇena magge sodhite pacchā rājā nikkhamati, evamevaṃ vipassanā sammādiṭṭhiyā aniccādivasena khandhādīsu sodhitesu pacchā bhūmiladdhavaṭṭaṃ parijānamānā maggasammādiṭṭhi uppajjati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dhammāhaṃ sārathiṃ brūmi, sammādiṭṭhipurejava’’nti.
如是,世尊结束开示,最后阐明四圣谛。开示结束时,那位天子安立于入流果。正如国王用膳时,坐在膝上的王子按自己嘴的大小捏取一口食物,同样地,当世尊以阿拉汉道为顶峰进行开示时,众生也随各自的亲依止缘证得入流果等。这位天子证得入流果后,以香等供养世尊,然后离去。第六。显示巴利原文
Iti bhagavā desanaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā avasāne cattāri saccāni dīpesi. Desanāpariyosāne devaputto sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāsi. Yathā hi rañño bhojanakāle attano mukhappamāṇe kabaḷe ukkhitte aṅke nisinno putto attano mukhappamāṇeneva tato kabaḷaṃ karoti, evamevaṃ bhagavati arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ desentepi sattā attano upanissayānurūpena sotāpattiphalādīni pāpuṇanti. Ayampi devaputto sotāpattiphalaṃ patvā bhagavantaṃ gandhādīhi pūjetvā pakkāmīti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.
第七 植林经注疏显示巴利原文
7. Vanaropasuttavaṇṇanā
47 第七经中问:“哪些是住于法者,哪些是具戒者?”世尊以“植园者……”等喻阐明此问。其中,“植园者”指种植花园、果园的人。“植林者”指在自然生长的树林中围起地界,建造塔庙、菩提树、经行处、讲堂、石窟、夜居处、昼居处,并种植荫树而行布施的人,这也名为植林者。“造桥者”指在险要处造桥、在水上备办船只的人。“饮水处”指施水亭。“井”指池塘、蓄水池等各类水井。“住所”指房舍。另有异读作“Upāsaya”。显示巴利原文
47. Sattame dhammaṭṭhā sīlasampannāti ke dhammaṭṭhā, ke sīlasampannāti pucchati. Bhagavā imaṃ pañhaṃ thāvaravatthunā dīpento ārāmaropātiādimāha. Tattha ārāmaropāti pupphārāmaphalārāmaropakā. Vanaropāti sayaṃjāte aropimavane sīmaṃ parikkhipitvā cetiyabodhicaṅkamanamaṇḍapakuṭileṇarattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānānaṃ kārakā chāyūpage rukkhe ropetvā dadamānāpi vanaropāyeva nāma. Setukārakāti visame setuṃ karonti, udake nāvaṃ paṭiyādenti . Papanti pānīyadānasālaṃ. Udapānanti yaṃkiñci pokkharaṇītaḷākādiṃ. Upassayanti vāsāgāraṃ. ‘‘Upāsaya’’ntipi pāṭho.
“常增长福”:并非在思惟不善寻或睡眠时增长,而是每当忆念时,其福即增长。正是针对此意,才说“常增长福”。“住于法、戒具足”:因安住于彼法,且具备彼戒,故称住于法、戒具足。或可解释为:行如此福德者圆满十善法,因安住于这些法,故为“住于法”;又因以此戒而具足,故为“戒具足”。第七。显示巴利原文
Sadā puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatīti na akusalavitakkaṃ vā vitakkentassa niddāyantassa vā pavaḍḍhati. Yadā yadā pana anussarati, tadā tadā tassa vaḍḍhati. Imamatthaṃ sandhāya ‘‘sadā puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Dhammaṭṭhā sīlasampannāti tasmiṃ dhamme ṭhitattā tenapi sīlena sampannattā dhammaṭṭhā sīlasampannā. Atha vā evarūpāni puññāni karontānaṃ dasa kusalā dhammā pūrenti, tesu ṭhitattā dhammaṭṭhā. Teneva ca sīlena sampannattā sīlasampannāti. Sattamaṃ.
8. 祇园经注疏显示巴利原文
8. Jetavanasuttavaṇṇanā
48 给孤独天子为赞叹祇园与佛陀等而来,因此说“此即彼祇园”。“仙人僧所住”意为比丘僧团所住。显示巴利原文
48. Aṭṭhame idaṃ hi taṃ jetavananti anāthapiṇḍiko devaputto jetavanassa ceva buddhādīnañca vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ āgato evamāha. Isisaṅghanisevitanti bhikkhusaṅghanisevitaṃ.
如此以第一偈赞叹了祇园之后,现在为赞叹圣道,而说“业、明”等语。其中,“业”指道思;“明”指道慧;“法”指与定俱行的诸法;“戒为最上活命”,是显示安住于戒之人的活命最为殊胜。或者,“明”指正见与正思惟;“法”指正精进、正念与正定;“戒”指正语、正业与正命;“活命为最上”,是指安住于此戒的活命称为最上。“依此诸人清净”,是说众生依此八支圣道而得清净。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ paṭhamagāthāya jetavanassa vaṇṇaṃ kathetvā idāni ariyamaggassa kathento kammaṃ vijjātiādimāha. Tattha kammanti maggacetanā. Vijjāti maggapaññā. Dhammoti samādhipakkhikā dhammā. Sīlaṃ jīvitamuttamanti sīle patiṭṭhitassa jīvitaṃ uttamanti dasseti. Atha vā vijjāti diṭṭhisaṅkappā. Dhammoti vāyāmasatisamādhayo. Sīlanti vācākammantājīvā. Jīvitamuttamanti etasmiṃ sīle ṭhitassa jīvitaṃ nāma uttamaṃ. Etena maccā sujjhantīti etena aṭṭhaṅgikamaggena sattā visujjhanti.
“因此”,意谓由于是通过圣道而得清净,并非通过种姓或财富,故说“因此”。“以如理作意择法”,即应以恰当的方法,去抉择与定俱行的诸法。“如此在彼处清净”,意谓如此便在那圣道中得以清净。或者,“以如理作意择法”,即应以恰当的方法,去抉择五蕴诸法。“如此在彼处清净”,意谓如此便在那四圣谛中得以清净。显示巴利原文
Tasmāti yasmā maggena sujjhanti, na gottadhanehi, tasmā. Yoniso vicine dhammanti upāyena samādhipakkhiyadhammaṃ vicineyya. Evaṃ tattha visujjhatīti evaṃ tasmiṃ ariyamagge visujjhati. Atha vā yoniso vicine dhammanti upāyena pañcakkhandhadhammaṃ vicineyya. Evaṃ tattha visujjhatīti evaṃ tesu catūsu saccesu visujjhati.
现在,为讲说舍利弗长老的功德,而说“舍利弗即是”等语。其中,“舍利弗即是”是表决定之词,意谓在智慧等方面,唯舍利弗最为殊胜。“以寂止”:即以烦恼的寂止。“达彼岸者”:已证得涅槃。凡任何证得涅槃的比丘,皆以此为其极致,并无较长老更超越者——此是所说之义。显示巴利原文
Idāni sāriputtattherassa vaṇṇaṃ kathento sāriputtovātiādimāha. Tattha sāriputtovāti avadhāraṇavacanaṃ, etehi paññādīhi sāriputtova seyyoti vadati. Upasamenāti kilesaupasamena . Pāraṃ gatoti nibbānaṃ gato. Yo koci nibbānaṃ patto bhikkhu, so etāvaparamo siyā, na therena uttaritaro nāma atthīti vadati. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti. Aṭṭhamaṃ.
9. 悭吝经注疏显示巴利原文
9. Maccharisuttavaṇṇanā
49 49. 第九项中,“悭吝者”:具有悭吝之人。有些人,在自己的住处,比丘伸出手来亦不礼敬;然而到了别处,进入寺院,却恭敬礼拜并作亲切的款待,说:“诸位尊者,请来我们所住之处,那地方条件完备,我等有能力以粥、饭等饮食供养诸位尊者。”比丘们心想“这位优婆塞有净信”,便接受他的粥、饭等供养。之后,有一位长老来到他的村庄托钵。他见到长老,便从别处走开,或躲进屋里。若不得不迎面相遇,便合掌作礼后说:“请给尊者食物吧,我有事要去办。”随即离去。长老走遍全村,只得空钵而出。此名为“软悭吝”,具此悭吝者,虽不给予,却看似施主。然而此处所说为“硬悭吝”:具此悭吝者,当比丘们入村托钵时,一听说“有长老们站在那里”,便说“我的脚痛吗?”之类的话语,随后如石柱、木桩般僵立,连适当的礼节也不作。“吝啬者”:此仅是与“悭吝者”同义之词。因为软悭吝亦称为“悭吝”,而硬悭吝则名为“吝啬”。“驱赶者”:见到比丘站在家门口,便说:“你们是耕了田来的?种了田来的?收割了来的吗?我们自己都得……”显示巴利原文
49. Navame maccharinoti maccherena samannāgatā. Ekacco hi attano vasanaṭṭhāne bhikkhuṃ hatthaṃ pasāretvāpi na vandati, aññattha gato vihāraṃ pavisitvā sakkaccaṃ vanditvā madhurapaṭisanthāraṃ karoti – ‘‘bhante, amhākaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ nāgacchatha, sampanno padeso, paṭibalā mayaṃ ayyānaṃ yāgubhattādīhi upaṭṭhānaṃ kātu’’nti. Bhikkhū ‘‘saddho ayaṃ upāsako’’ti yāgubhattādīhi saṅgaṇhanti. Atheko thero tassa gāmaṃ gantvā piṇḍāya carati. So taṃ disvā aññena vā gacchati, gharaṃ vā pavisati. Sacepi sammukhībhāvaṃ āgacchati, hatthena vanditvā – ‘‘ayyassa bhikkhaṃ detha, ahaṃ ekena kammena gacchāmī’’ti pakkamati. Thero sakalagāmaṃ caritvā tucchapattova nikkhamati. Idaṃ tāva mudumacchariyaṃ nāma, yena samannāgato adāyakopi dāyako viya paññāyati. Idha pana thaddhamacchariyaṃ adhippetaṃ, yena samannāgato bhikkhūsu piṇḍāya paviṭṭhesu, ‘‘therā ṭhitā’’ti vutte, ‘‘kiṃ mayhaṃ pādā rujjantī’’tiādīni vatvā silāthambho viya khāṇuko viya ca thaddho hutvā tiṭṭhati, sāmīcimpi na karoti. Kadariyāti idaṃ maccharinoti padasseva vevacanaṃ. Mudukampi hi macchariyaṃ ‘‘macchariya’’nteva vuccati, thaddhaṃ pana kadariyaṃ nāma. Paribhāsakāti bhikkhū gharadvāre ṭhite disvā, ‘‘kiṃ tumhe kasitvā āgatā, vapitvā, lāyitvā? Mayaṃ attanopi na labhāma, kuto tumhākaṃ, sīghaṃ nikkhamathā’’tiādīhi saṃtajjakā. Antarāyakarāti dāyakassa saggantarāyo, paṭiggāhakānaṃ lābhantarāyo, attano upaghātoti imesaṃ antarāyānaṃ kārakā.
“来世”:即他世。“乐”:指五种欲乐。“嬉戏”:指以身体游戏等三种嬉戏。“现法中此是果报”:在那投生的世间中,于现世即见此果报。“来世恶趣”:如经中所说“生于阎魔王界”,来世即是恶趣。显示巴利原文
Samparāyoti paraloko. Ratīti pañcakāmaguṇarati. Khiḍḍāti kāyikakhiḍḍādikā tividhā khiḍḍā. Diṭṭhe dhammesa vipākoti tasmiṃ nibbattabhavane diṭṭhe dhamme esa vipāko. Samparāye ca duggatīti ‘‘yamalokaṃ upapajjare’’ti vutte samparāye ca duggati.
“知音者”(vadaññū):比丘们虽默然立于门前,就义理而言,其实是在说“请给食物”。那些人有此念:“我们在烹煮,他们却不烹煮;若值遇施食之人却不得食,他们还能去哪里得呢?”于是便将应施之物分发出去,这样的人便称为知音者。“照耀”(pakāsanti):以天宫的光辉而照耀。“于他人所积之物”(parasambhatesu):指享受他人收集、积攒的财物。“后世善趣”(samparāye ca suggati):即所谓“此为天界”,后世即是善趣。或就二者而言,从彼处死后,再次到来世时,亦同属恶趣或善趣。第九段。显示巴利原文
Vadaññūti bhikkhū gharadvāre ṭhitā kiñcāpi tuṇhīva honti, atthato pana – ‘‘bhikkhaṃ dethā’’ti vadanti nāma. Tatra ye ‘‘mayaṃ pacāma, ime pana na pacanti, pacamāne patvā alabhantā kuhiṃ labhissantī’’ti? Deyyadhammaṃ saṃvibhajanti, te vadaññū nāma. Pakāsantīti vimānappabhāya jotanti. Parasambhatesūti parehi sampiṇḍitesu. Samparāye ca suggatīti, ‘‘ete saggā’’ti evaṃ vuttasamparāye sugati. Ubhinnampi vā etesaṃ tato cavitvā puna samparāyepi duggatisugatiyeva hotīti. Navamaṃ.
10. 陶师经注(Ghaṭīkārasuttavaṇṇanā)显示巴利原文
10. Ghaṭīkārasuttavaṇṇanā
50 50. 第十项:“再生者”(upapannā):以再生而到达。“解脱者”(vimuttā):在无热天梵世界中,刚再生便证得阿拉汉果的解脱而解脱。“人身”(mānusaṃ dehaṃ):此处即指五下分结。“天结”(dibbayogaṃ):指五上分结。“已超越”(upaccagunti):即超越了。Upaka等:这些是长老们的名字。“你善说他们”(kusalī bhāsasī tesaṃ):因具有“善”(kusala)所表达的特质,故称善说者,意思是:你善说、称赞、赞扬那些长老的无过失法,你是有智慧的天子。“于此了知此法后”(taṃ te dhammaṃ idhaññāya):指那些长老在你们的教法中了知此法后。“甚深”(gambhīraṃ):显示巴利原文
50. Dasame upapannāseti nibbattivasena upagatā. Vimuttāti avihābrahmalokasmiṃ upapattisamanantarameva arahattaphalavimuttiyā vimuttā. Mānusaṃ dehanti idha pañcorambhāgiyasaṃyojanāni eva vuttāni. Dibbayoganti pañca uddhambhāgiyasaṃyojanāni. Upaccagunti atikkamiṃsu. Upakotiādīni tesaṃ therānaṃ nāmāni. Kusalī bhāsasī tesanti, ‘‘kusala’’nti idaṃ vacanaṃ imassa atthīti kusalī, tesaṃ therānaṃ tvaṃ kusalaṃ anavajjaṃ bhāsasi, thomesi pasaṃsasi , paṇḍitosi devaputtāti vadati. Taṃ te dhammaṃ idhaññāyāti te therā taṃ dhammaṃ idha tumhākaṃ sāsane jānitvā. Gambhīranti gambhīratthaṃ. Brahmacārī nirāmisoti nirāmisabrahmacārī nāma anāgāmī, anāgāmī ahosinti attho. Ahuvāti ahosi. Sagāmeyyoti ekagāmavāsī. Pariyosānagāthā saṅgītikārehi ṭhapitāti. Dasamaṃ.
老品(Jarā)第六。显示巴利原文
6. Jarāvaggo
1. 《衰老经》注显示巴利原文
1. Jarāsuttavaṇṇanā
51 《老品》第一:“善”(sādhu)——即所获得的美好事物。“戒乃至衰老”这句话旨在说明:犹如珍珠、宝石、红布等装饰品仅在青春年少时美丽,若已老迈衰朽时仍佩戴,便会招致“此人至今犹贪幼稚之态,恐是癫狂”的讥嫌;戒却并非如此。因为戒于一切时皆为庄严。年少时守护戒,无人会问:“持此戒有何用?”中年亦然,乃至老年亦复如是。显示巴利原文
51. Jarāvaggassa paṭhame sādhūti laddhakaṃ bhaddakaṃ. Sīlaṃ yāva jarāti iminā idaṃ dasseti – yathā muttāmaṇirattavatthādīni ābharaṇāni taruṇakāleyeva sobhanti, jarājiṇṇakāle tāni dhārento ‘‘ayaṃ ajjāpi bālabhāvaṃ pattheti, ummattako maññe’’ti vattabbataṃ āpajjati , na evaṃ sīlaṃ. Sīlañhi niccakālaṃ sobhati. Bālakālepi hi sīlaṃ rakkhantaṃ ‘‘kiṃ imassa sīlenā’’ti? Vattāro natthi. Majjhimakālepi mahallakakālepīti.
“信已安立,是为善”:如同手旷野的质多居士等人,其信由圣道而来、已得稳固安立,这样的信才堪称善。“慧是人之宝”:此处之“宝”,应依被恭敬等义来理解。如以下所说:显示巴利原文
Saddhāsādhu patiṭṭhitāti hatthāḷavakacittagahapatiādīnaṃ viya maggena āgatā patiṭṭhitasaddhā nāma sādhu. Paññā narānaṃ ratananti ettha cittīkataṭṭhādīhi ratanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –
若以“被恭敬”为义,即名为宝,然则世尊——人中之狮——岂非受到恭敬?世间一切受恭敬者中,世尊最为恭敬。若以“令人喜悦”为义,即名为宝,然则世尊——人中之狮——岂非令人喜悦?依其教法而行者,于禅那之乐中喜悦安住。若以“无与伦比”为义,即名为宝,然则世尊——人中之狮——岂非无与伦比?他已至功德彼岸,任何功德皆无法衡量。若以“难遭遇”为义,即名为宝,然则世尊——人中之狮——岂非难遇?若以“最胜者所受用”为义,即名为宝,然则世尊于戒、定、慧、解脱、解脱知见皆最胜——岂非如此?显示巴利原文
‘‘Yadi cittīkatanti ratanaṃ, nanu bhagavā cittīkato purisasīho, ye ca loke cittīkatā, tesaṃ cittīkato bhagavā. Yadi ratikaranti ratanaṃ, nanu bhagavā ratikaro purisasīho, tassa vacanena carantā jhānaratisukhena abhiramanti. Yadi atulyanti ratanaṃ, nanu bhagavā atulo purisasīho. Na hi sakkā tuletuṃ guṇehi guṇapāramiṃ gato. Yadi dullabhanti ratanaṃ, nanu bhagavā dullabho purisasīho. Yadi anomasattaparibhoganti ratanaṃ, nanu bhagavā anomo sīlena samādhinā paññāya vimuttiyā vimuttiñāṇadassanenā’’ti.
于此,‘慧’因难可显现之义而被称为‘宝’。‘福’是指福思,因其无形而无法携带。第一经结束。显示巴利原文
Idha pana dullabhapātubhāvaṭṭhena paññā ‘‘ratana’’nti vuttaṃ. Puññanti puññacetanā, sā hi arūpattā pariharituṃ na sakkāti. Paṭhamaṃ.
2. 《不老经》注显示巴利原文
2. Ajarasāsuttavaṇṇanā
52 第二经:‘不老’即不败坏、不退失。戒唯在无损时方为善;若坏戒者,亲教师与老师等亦不摄受,于所到之处皆当被摈出。第二经结束。显示巴利原文
52. Dutiye ajarasāti ajīraṇena, avipattiyāti attho. Sīlañhi avipannameva sādhu hoti, vipannasīlaṃ ācariyupajjhāyādayopi na saṅgaṇhanti, gatagataṭṭhāne niddhamitabbova hotīti. Dutiyaṃ.
3. 《友经》注显示巴利原文
3. Mittasuttavaṇṇanā
53 第三经:‘商队’指一同赶路的旅人,可为步行商队,亦可为车辆组成的商队。‘友’:当生病时,用担架或其他交通工具将病人运送至安稳处的人,即称为友。‘在自家’:指在自己的家中。当那样的重病生起时,儿女、妻子等都会厌弃,而母亲却将不净物也视若栴檀。因此,她才是自家中的友。‘于事起时有助的同伴’:当事起时,能承担并完成其事者,因于此事中共行,故为同伴中之友;如共饮酒之类则非真实之友。‘关于来世’:指有助于来世之利益。第三经结束。显示巴利原文
53. Tatiye satthoti saddhiṃcaro, jaṅghasattho vā sakaṭasattho vā. Mittanti roge uppanne pāṭaṅkiyā vā aññena vā yānena haritvā khemantasampāpanena mittaṃ. Sake ghareti attano gehe . Tathārūpe roge jāte puttabhariyādayo jigucchanti, mātā pana asucimpi candanaṃ viya maññati. Tasmā sā sake ghare mittaṃ. Sahāyo atthajātassāti uppannakiccassa yo taṃ kiccaṃ vahati nittharati, so kiccesu saha ayanabhāvena sahāyo mittaṃ, surāpānādisahāyā pana na mittā. Samparāyikanti samparāyahitaṃ. Tatiyaṃ.
4. 《事经》注显示巴利原文
4. Vatthusuttavaṇṇanā
54 第四则:‘儿子是依怙’:指到了老年,因儿子能照料,故儿子是依靠。‘最胜’:由于妻子适合分享连对他人都不宜说的秘密,因此妻子被称为最胜的密友。第四则。显示巴利原文
54. Catutthe puttā vatthūti mahallakakāle paṭijagganaṭṭhena puttā patiṭṭhā. Paramoti aññesaṃ akathetabbassapi guyhassa kathetabbayuttatāya bhariyā paramo sakhā nāma. Catutthaṃ.
5-7. 《第一人经》等的注解显示巴利原文
5-7. Paṭhamajanasuttādivaṇṇanā
55 第五句:‘流转’:指为前往他方大海等地而四处奔走流转。第五句。显示巴利原文
55. Pañcame vidhāvatīti parasamuddādigamanavasena ito cito ca vidhāvati. Pañcamaṃ.
56 第六句:‘苦’:指轮回之苦。第六句。显示巴利原文
56. Chaṭṭhe dukkhāti vaṭṭadukkhato. Chaṭṭhaṃ.
57 第七句中,“归宿”:指成就、依靠处。第七句。显示巴利原文
57. Sattame parāyaṇanti nipphatti avassayo. Sattamaṃ.
8. 《邪道经》注解显示巴利原文
8. Uppathasuttavaṇṇanā
58 第八句中,“贪是邪道”:对于要前往善趣和涅槃的人而言,这并非正道。“一日一夜的灭尽”:意为因日夜而灭尽,或在日夜之中逐渐灭尽。“女人是垢秽”:其他外在的污垢,可用灰、碱等洗净;但被女人的垢秽所染污者,却无法变得清净,因此说女人是“垢秽”。“于此处”:指在此处,即在女人身上,众生会生起执著。“苦行”:是根律仪、头陀支功德、精进及种种难行的总称;然而在此处,除难行之外,一切能烧尽烦恼的修行皆属苦行。“梵行”:指远离淫欲。第八句。显示巴利原文
58. Aṭṭhame rāgo uppathoti sugatiñca nibbānañca gacchantassa amaggo. Rattindivakkhayoti rattidivehi, rattidivesu vā khīyati. Itthī malanti sesaṃ bāhiramalaṃ bhasmakhārādīhi dhovitvā sakkā sodhetuṃ, mātugāmamalena duṭṭho pana na sakkā suddho nāma kātunti itthī ‘‘mala’’nti vuttā. Etthāti ettha itthiyaṃ pajā sajjati. Tapoti indriyasaṃvaradhutaṅgaguṇavīriyadukkarakārikānaṃ nāmaṃ, idha pana ṭhapetvā dukkarakārikaṃ sabbāpi kilesasantāpikā paṭipadā vaṭṭati. Brahmacariyanti methunavirati. Aṭṭhamaṃ.
9. 《第二经》注解显示巴利原文
9. Dutiyasuttavaṇṇanā
59 第九句中,“于何者得喜乐”:即对何者感到喜乐。“第二者”:对于走向善趣和涅槃的人,她是伴侣。“慧教导他”:智慧这样教导这位男子:“此事应做,此事不应做。”第九句。显示巴利原文
59. Navame kissa cābhiratoti kismiṃ abhirato. Dutiyāti sugatiñceva nibbānañca gacchantassa dutiyikā. Paññā cenaṃ pasāsatīti paññā etaṃ purisaṃ ‘‘idaṃ karohi, idaṃ mākarī’’ti anusāsati. Navamaṃ.
10. 《诗人经》注疏显示巴利原文
10. Kavisuttavaṇṇanā
60 第十经:“韵文为起因”——伽耶特利等韵文是偈颂的起因。因为在最初建立偈颂时,他以“应是何种韵文?”而开始。“文”指能生:因为字母生词,词生偈颂,偈颂阐明义理。“依于名”:即依于大海等假名。因为开始偈颂时,必定依于大海或大地等某一名称而开始。“住处”指所依处:偈颂正是从诗人那里流布而出,诗人是它们的所依处。第十经。显示巴利原文
60. Dasame chando nidānanti gāyattiādiko chando gāthānaṃ nidānaṃ. Pubbapaṭṭhāpanagāthā ārabhanto hi ‘‘kataracchandena hotū’’ti ārabhati . Viyañjananti jananaṃ. Akkharaṃ hi padaṃ janeti, padaṃ gāthaṃ janeti, gāthā atthaṃ pakāsetīti. Nāmasannissitāti samuddādipaṇṇattinissitā. Gāthā ārabhanto hi samuddaṃ vā pathaviṃ vā yaṃ kiñci nāmaṃ nissayitvāva ārabhati. Āsayoti patiṭṭhā. Kavito hi gāthā pavattanti. So tāsaṃ patiṭṭhā hotīti. Dasamaṃ.
7. 时节品显示巴利原文
7. Addhavaggo
《名经》注释显示巴利原文
1. Nāmasuttavaṇṇanā
61 时节品第一经:“名征服一切”——名征服一切,遍及一切。因为无论是化生者,还是依假名而立名者,没有任何众生或行能脱离“名”。即使是一棵树或一块石头,若众人不知“此为何名”,那么它便以“无名”为其名。第一经。显示巴利原文
61. Addhavaggassa paṭhame nāmaṃ sabbaṃ addhabhavīti nāmaṃ sabbaṃ abhibhavati anupatati. Opapātikena vā hi kittimena vā nāmena mutto satto vā saṅkhāro vā natthi. Yassapi hi rukkhassa vā pāsāṇassa vā ‘‘idaṃ nāma nāma’’nti na jānanti, anāmakotveva tassa nāmaṃ hoti. Paṭhamaṃ.
《心经》等注释显示巴利原文
2-3. Cittasuttādivaṇṇanā
62 在第二经中,“一切随心而转”:指所有那些随心而转的人,这是对他们毫无遗漏、总摄一切的称呼。第二经。显示巴利原文
62. Dutiye sabbeva vasamanvagūti ye cittassa vasaṃ gacchanti, tesaṃyeva anavasesapariyādānametaṃ. Dutiyaṃ.
63 在第三经中,解释方式相同。第三经。显示巴利原文
63. Tatiyepi eseva nayo. Tatiyaṃ.
关于《结经》等的注释。显示巴利原文
4-5. Saṃyojanasuttādivaṇṇanā
64 在第四经中,“何为结?”:这是问“什么是结缚”。“伺察”:指诸游走者,即脚。此处复数形式用作单数。“对于寻的伺察”:意思是寻为彼之脚。第四经。显示巴利原文
64. Catutthe kiṃ su saṃyojanoti kiṃ saṃyojano kiṃ bandhano? Vicāraṇanti vicaraṇā pādāni. Bahuvacane ekavacanaṃ kataṃ. Vitakkassa vicāraṇanti vitakko tassa pādā. Catutthaṃ.
65 第五项亦同此理。第五项。显示巴利原文
65. Pañcamepi eseva nayo. Pañcamaṃ.
关于《Attahatasutta》的注释。显示巴利原文
6. Attahatasuttavaṇṇanā
66 第六句:‘kenassubbhāhato’意为‘被什么所击毁’。‘su’只是一个无意义的虚词。‘Icchādhūpāyito’意为‘被欲求所燃烧’。第六句。显示巴利原文
66. Chaṭṭhe kenassubbhāhatoti kena abbhāhato. Su-kāro nipātamattaṃ. Icchādhūpāyitoti icchāya āditto. Chaṭṭhaṃ.
关于《Uḍḍitasutta》等的注释。显示巴利原文
7-9. Uḍḍitasuttādivaṇṇanā
67 第七句:‘为渴爱所套’意为被渴爱所超越。因为先用渴爱的绳子穿过眼根,再把它套在色如象牙桩上,耳等诸根便被套在声等诸尘上,所以世间称为为渴爱所套。‘为死神所蔽’是说:在紧接的下一生中所造的业,其实并不遥远,只隔着一个心识刹那。然而,强烈的临死之苦像山一般压覆过来,将众生遮蔽,使其不能了知,所以说世间为死神所遮蔽。第七句。显示巴利原文
67. Sattame taṇhāya uḍḍitoti taṇhāya ullaṅghito. Cakkhuñhi taṇhārajjunā āvunitvā rūpanāgadante uḍḍitaṃ, sotādīni saddādīsūti taṇhāya uḍḍito loko. Maccunā pihitoti anantare attabhāve kataṃ kammaṃ na dūraṃ ekacittantaraṃ, balavatiyā pana māraṇantikavedanāya pabbatena viya otthaṭattā sattā taṃ na bujjhantīti ‘‘maccunā pihito loko’’ti vuttaṃ. Sattamaṃ.
68 第八句(aṭṭhama):同样的问题(sveva pañho)被天神(devatāya)用下面和上面互相套换的方式(heṭṭhupariyāyavasena)再提问了一遍。第八句。显示巴利原文
68. Aṭṭhame sveva pañho devatāya heṭṭhupariyāyavasena pucchito. Aṭṭhamaṃ.
69 第九句(navama):一切(sabbaṃ)都已经是浅显明白的(uttānameva)。第九句。显示巴利原文
69. Navame sabbaṃ uttānameva. Navamaṃ.
《世间经》(Lokasutta)注疏(vaṇṇanā)显示巴利原文
10. Lokasuttavaṇṇanā
70 第十句(dasama):「世间(loko)在什么当中(kismiṃ)生起(samuppanno)?」这是在问:当什么生起时(kismiṃ uppanne),世间被称为「生起(uppanno)」?回答是:「在六者当中(chasūti)」。当六内处(ajjhattikesu āyatanesu)生起时,世间就被称为「生起」。「在六者上造作(chasu kubbati)」:就是在那些六内处里面造作(karoti)亲昵(santhavaṃ)。「依止(upādāya)」:就是依止(upādāya)、归因于(āgamma)、依赖于(paṭicca)那些内处而流转(pavattati)。「受苦(vihaññatīti)」:就是在那些六处当中受苦(vihaññati),受折磨(pīḷiyati)。如此,这个问题是依内处(ajjhattikāyatanavasena)而来的,但也可以依内外的诸处(ajjhattikabāhirānaṃ)来解说。因为当六内处生起时,这个世间就被称为「生起」;在六外处(chasu bāhiresu)中造作亲昵;依止于六内处(channaṃ ajjhattikānaṃ),在六外处中受苦。第十句。显示巴利原文
70. Dasame kismiṃ loko samuppannoti kismiṃ uppanne loko uppannoti pucchati. Chasūti chasu ajjhattikesu āyatanesu uppannesu uppannoti vuccati. Chasu kubbatīti tesuyeva chasu santhavaṃ karoti. Upādāyāti tāniyeva ca upādāya āgamma paṭicca pavattati. Vihaññatīti tesuyeva chasu vihaññati pīḷiyati. Iti ajjhattikāyatanavasena ayaṃ pañho āgato, ajjhattikabāhirānaṃ pana vasena āharituṃ vaṭṭati. Chasu hi ajjhattikāyatanesu uppannesu ayaṃ uppanno nāma hoti, chasu bāhiresu santhavaṃ karoti, channaṃ ajjhattikānaṃ upādāya chasu bāhiresu vihaññatīti. Dasamaṃ.
第七品《无间品》(Addhavaggo sattamo)显示巴利原文
Addhavaggo sattamo.
第八品《断除品》(Chetvāvaggo)显示巴利原文
8. Chetvāvaggo
《断除经》(Chetvāsutta)注疏(vaṇṇanā)显示巴利原文
1. Chetvāsuttavaṇṇanā
71 《断除品》第一经中,「chetvā」(已断除)意为已断灭。「Sukhaṃ seti」(安乐而卧)是说因不被忿怒之火所烧,故安乐而眠。「Na socati」(他不忧愁)是说因已灭除忿怒,忧恼便灭,故无有忧愁。「Visamūlassā」(毒根者)指有苦果者。「Madhuraggassa」(甘甜顶者)是说:对忿怒者还以忿怒,对责骂者还以责骂,对打人者还以打,由此便有快乐生起;依此义而说“甘甜顶”。此处的“顶”确实是指最终。「Ariyā」(圣者)指佛陀等圣者。这是第一经。显示巴利原文
71. Chetvāvaggassa paṭhame chetvāti vadhitvā. Sukhaṃ setīti kodhapariḷāhena aparidayhamānattā sukhaṃ sayati. Na socatīti kodhavināsena vinaṭṭhadomanassattā na socati. Visamūlassāti dukkhavipākassa . Madhuraggassāti kuddhassa paṭikujjhitvā, akkuṭṭhassa paccakkositvā, pahaṭassa ca paṭipaharitvā sukhaṃ uppajjati, taṃ sandhāya madhuraggoti vutto. Imasmiṃ hi ṭhāne pariyosānaṃ agganti vuttaṃ. Ariyāti buddhādayo. Paṭhamaṃ.
2. 车经注释显示巴利原文
2. Rathasuttavaṇṇanā
72 第二经中,「paññāyati etenāti」(由此而得以了知),故称为「paññāṇaṃ」(了知相)。「Dhajo rathassāti」(幢是车的了知相):在大阵前,从远处看见幢,便知“这是某王的车”,车因此彰显。故说“幢是车的了知相”。火亦因远处之烟而得以了知。如“乔罗国、般度罗国”,国土亦因国王而得以了知。又,转轮王的女儿身为女子,因获得夫主,才被了知为“某人之妻”。因此经中说“烟是火的了知相”等语。这是第二经。显示巴利原文
72. Dutiye paññāyati etenāti paññāṇaṃ. Dhajo rathassāti mahantasmiṃ hi saṅgāmasīse dūratova dhajaṃ disvā ‘‘asukarañño nāma ayaṃ ratho’’ti ratho pākaṭo hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dhajo rathassa paññāṇa’’nti. Aggipi dūratova dhūmena paññāyati. Coḷaraṭṭhaṃ paṇḍuraṭṭhanti evaṃ raṭṭhampi raññā paññāyati. Cakkavattirañño dhītāpi pana itthī ‘‘asukassa nāma bhariyā’’ti bhattāraṃ patvāva paññāyati. Tasmā dhūmo paññāṇamagginotiādi vuttaṃ. Dutiyaṃ.
3. 财富经注释显示巴利原文
3. Vittasuttavaṇṇanā
73 第三经中,说“信是此世的财富”:因为具信者依于信,能获得珍珠、摩尼宝等种种财富,能获得三种家世圆满、六欲天、九梵天界,最终还能得见不死的大涅槃,所以在珍珠、摩尼宝等种种财富中,信财最为殊胜。“法”指十善业道。“带来安乐”指带来一切有漏与无漏的、无杂染的安乐。“更甘甜”:在世间,于咸、酸等一切味道中,真实最为甘甜。因为安住于真实的人,能令速疾的河流倒流,能摧破毒药,能抵御烈火,能令天降雨,所以说真实是一切味道中最甘甜的。“诸圣贤说,以慧为活命者,其生命最胜”:若是在家人,以慧活命,安住五戒,施设筹食等,依智慧而活;或是出家人,如法获得资具,在受用时如理省思“这是有利益的”,执取业处,修观,依证得圣果的智慧而活。这就称为:那位以慧为活命的人,过着最殊胜的生命。这是第三经。显示巴利原文
73. Tatiye saddhīdha vittanti yasmā saddho saddhāya muttamaṇiādīnipi vittāni labhati, tissopi kulasampadā, cha kāmasaggāni, nava brahmaloke patvā pariyosāne amatamahānibbānadassanampi labhati, tasmā maṇimuttādīhi vittehi saddhāvittameva seṭṭhaṃ. Dhammoti dasakusalakammapatho. Sukhamāvahatīti sabbampi sāsavānāsavaṃ asaṃkiliṭṭhasukhaṃ āvahati. Sādutaranti lokasmiṃ loṇambilādīnaṃ sabbarasānaṃ saccameva madhurataraṃ. Saccasmiṃ hi ṭhitā sīghavegaṃ nadimpi nivattenti, visampi nimmaddenti, aggimpi paṭibāhanti, devampi vassāpenti, tasmā taṃ sabbarasānaṃ madhurataranti vuttaṃ. Paññājīviṃ jīvitamāhu seṭṭhanti yo paññājīvī gahaṭṭho samāno pañcasu sīlesu patiṭṭhāya salākabhattādīni paṭṭhapetvā paññāya jīvati, pabbajito vā pana dhammena uppanne paccaye ‘‘idamattha’’nti paccavekkhitvā paribhuñjanto kammaṭṭhānaṃ ādāya vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā ariyaphalādhigamavasena paññāya jīvati, taṃ paññājīviṃ puggalaṃ seṭṭhaṃ jīvitaṃ jīvatīti āhu. Tatiyaṃ.
4. 雨经注释显示巴利原文
4. Vuṭṭhisuttavaṇṇanā
74 第四经中:“种子中”:在生长的物种中,七种谷物的种子最为殊胜。因为它们生长起来时,国土便安稳,食物充足。“降下中”:在降下的事物中,云雨最为殊胜。因为有云雨时,种种庄稼得以生长,国土繁荣,安稳且食物充足。“前进中”:在以脚行走的众生中,牛最为殊胜。因为众生依靠牛,受用五种牛乳制品,安乐地生活。“宣说中”:在王宫等处,能说话的人中,儿子最为优秀,因为他不会说对父母不利的话。显示巴利原文
74. Catutthe bījanti uppatantānaṃ sattavidhaṃ dhaññabījaṃ seṭṭhaṃ. Tasmiñhi uggate janapado khemo hoti subhikkho. Nipatatanti nipatantānaṃ meghavuṭṭhi seṭṭhā. Meghavuṭṭhiyañhi sati vividhāni sassāni uppajjanti, janapadā phītā honti khemā subhikkhā. Pavajamānānanti jaṅgamānaṃ padasā caramānānaṃ gāvo seṭṭhā. Tā nissāya hi sattā pañca gorase paribhuñjamānā sukhaṃ viharanti. Pavadatanti rājakulamajjhādīsu vadantānaṃ putto varo. So hi mātāpitūnaṃ anatthāvahaṃ na vadati.
“明为生起中之最上”等语:据传,先前一位天神站在近处,听到那个问题后,心想:“这位天神,你何必去问十力这个问题?我来为你解说吧。”于是她依着自己的见解来解说那个问题。那时,另一位天神对她说:“天神,你真是放肆,如此鲁莽、多嘴!是我在请问佛陀世尊,你为何替我解说?”她制止了那位天神后,便前去向十力提出同样的问题。导师为她解答时,便说了“明为生起中之最上”等语。其中,“明”指四种道智。当它生起时,能断除一切不善法,故称“生起中之最上”。“无明”指作为轮回根本的大无明。对于沉没、陷落的人来说,它却是最上的。“在游行者中”:指以脚步游走、到处行化的人,也就是成为无上福田的僧团,这是最上的。因为在各处见到僧团而心生净信的众生,能获得安稳。“佛陀”:无论是儿子还是其他任何人,在一切能说法的群体中,佛陀是最上的。因为依靠他的说法,无数百千……显示巴利原文
Vijjāuppatataṃ seṭṭhāti purimapañhe kira sutvā samīpe ṭhitā ekā devatā ‘‘devate, kasmā tvaṃ etaṃ pañhaṃ dasabalaṃ pucchasi? Ahaṃ te kathessāmī’’ti attano khantiyā laddhiyā pañhaṃ kathesi. Atha naṃ itarā devatā āha – ‘‘yāva padhaṃsī vadesi devate yāva pagabbhā mukharā, ahaṃ buddhaṃ bhagavantaṃ pucchāmi. Tvaṃ mayhaṃ kasmā kathesī’’ti? Nivattetvā tadeva pañhaṃ dasabalaṃ pucchi. Athassā satthā vissajjento vijjā uppatatantiādimāha. Tattha vijjāti catumaggavijjā. Sā hi uppatamānā sabbākusaladhamme samugghāteti. Tasmā ‘‘uppatataṃ seṭṭhā’’ti vuttā. Avijjāti vaṭṭamūlakamahāavijjā. Sā hi nipatantānaṃ osīdantānaṃ varā. Pavajamānānanti padasā caramānānaṃ jaṅgamānaṃ anomapuññakkhettabhūto saṅgho varo. Tañhi tattha tattha disvā pasannacittā sattā sotthiṃ pāpuṇanti. Buddhoti yādiso putto vā hotu añño vā, yesaṃ kesañci vadamānānaṃ buddho varo. Tassa hi dhammadesanaṃ āgamma anekasatasahassānaṃ pāṇānaṃ bandhanamokkho hotīti. Catutthaṃ.
第五《怖畏经》注疏显示巴利原文
5. Bhītāsuttavaṇṇanā
75 七十五、第五经中,“在此为何怖畏?”意为:因何而怖畏?“道被以众多因缘宣说”,即依三十八所缘,由众多因缘而说。既然如此,为何这世间之人怀着恐惧,执取了六十二种邪见?“广慧”,指具足广大智慧、智慧丰厚。“不畏惧他世”,即从此世间往他世间时,不生恐惧。“安置已”,即放置好之后。“居于多食多饮的家中”,如给孤独长者等,安住于饮食丰足的家中。“分与者”,说的是这样的习性:即使以指尖取得的事物,也会用指甲分成两半,先施与他人,而后自己才食用。“知恩者”,即如前文所释之义。显示巴利原文
75. Pañcame kiṃsūdha bhītāti kiṃ bhītā? Maggo canekāyatanappavuttoti aṭṭhatiṃsārammaṇavasena anekehi kāraṇehi kathito. Evaṃ sante kissa bhītā hutvā ayaṃ janatā dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo aggahesīti vadati. Bhūripaññāti bahupañña ussannapañña. Paralokaṃ na bhāyeti imasmā lokā paraṃ lokaṃ gacchanto na bhāyeyya. Paṇidhāyāti ṭhapetvā. Bahvannapānaṃ gharamāvasantoti anāthapiṇḍikādayo viya bahvannapāne ghare vasanto. Saṃvibhāgīti accharāya gahitampi nakhena phāletvā parassa datvāva bhuñjanasīlo. Vadaññūti vuttatthameva.
现在,当将偈颂的各个支分抽出说明:“语”这一词摄四种语善行;“意”这一词摄三种意善行;“身”这一词摄三种身善行。如此,这十善业道便称为“前清净支”。“居于多食多饮的家中”一句,摄祭祀所需资具。信为一支,柔和为一支,分与为一支,知恩为一支。正是针对这四支,而说“住于这些四法之中”。显示巴利原文
Idāni gāthāya aṅgāni uddharitvā dassetabbāni – ‘‘vāca’’nti hi iminā cattāri vacīsucaritāni gahitāni, ‘‘manenā’’tipadena tīṇi manosucaritāni, ‘‘kāyenā’’ti padena tīṇi kāyasucaritāni. Iti ime dasa kusalakammapathā pubbasuddhiaṅgaṃ nāma. Bahvannapānaṃ gharamāvasantoti iminā yaññaupakkharo gahito. Saddhoti ekamaṅgaṃ, mudūti ekaṃ, saṃvibhāgīti ekaṃ, vadaññūti ekaṃ. Iti imāni cattāri aṅgāni sandhāya ‘‘etesu dhammesu ṭhito catūsū’’ti āha.
又有一类解说:“语”等为三支;“居于多食多饮的家中”一句唯摄祭祀资具;信、柔和、分与、知恩合为一支。另有一种名为“二法分类”的方式:“语与意”合为一支;“身不行恶,居于多食多饮的家中”合为一支;“信、柔和”合为一支;“分与、知恩”合为一支。安住于此四法中的人,即称为住于法者。他从此世往他世时,无所怖畏。第五终。显示巴利原文
Aparopi pariyāyo – vācantiādīni tīṇi aṅgāni, bahvannapānanti iminā yaññaupakkharova gahito, saddho mudū saṃvibhāgī vadaññūti ekaṃ aṅgaṃ. Aparo dukanayo nāma hoti. ‘‘Vācaṃ manañcā’’ti idamekaṃ aṅgaṃ, ‘‘kāyena pāpāni akubbamāno, bahvannapānaṃ gharamāvasanto’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘saddho mudū’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘saṃvibhāgī vadaññū’’ti ekaṃ. Etesu catūsu dhammesu ṭhito dhamme ṭhito nāma hoti. So ito paralokaṃ gacchanto na bhāyati. Pañcamaṃ.
第六《不衰老经》注疏显示巴利原文
6. Najīratisuttavaṇṇanā
76 在第六经中,“名姓不衰”:过去诸佛的名号与姓氏,至今仍被传称,因此说不衰。然而,古德说:“随着岁月迁流,它虽将不再为人所知,但确实没有衰败的本质。”“懈怠”就是懒惰,因为懈怠,人便站着只是站着,坐着只是坐着,纵然油在流失也不采取行动。“放逸”是由睡眠或随烦恼所带来的散漫。“不勤”是指在应当做事之时,却缺乏为善的精进。“不调”是指缺乏以戒调伏,行为放逸。“贪睡”指嗜睡成性。因为嗜睡,即使在行走、站立、坐着时也会打瞌睡,更不必说躺卧之时了。“迟钝”是因过饱等原因而生起的懒怠。“这些漏”就是指这六种漏、这六种缺口。“完全”意思是以一切方式。而“ti”仅是虚词。“应回避”就是应避免、应舍离。第六经义释结束。显示巴利原文
76. Chaṭṭhe nāmagottaṃ na jīratīti atītabuddhānaṃ yāvajjadivasā nāmagottaṃ kathiyati, tasmā na jīratīti vuccati. Porāṇā pana ‘‘addhāne gacchante na paññāyissati, jīraṇasabhāvo pana na hotiyevā’’ti vadanti. Ālasyanti ālasiyaṃ, yena ṭhitaṭṭhāne ṭhitova, nisinnaṭṭhāne nisinnova hoti, telepi uttarante ṭhitiṃ na karoti. Pamādoti niddāya vā kilesavasena vā pamādo. Anuṭṭhānanti kammasamaye kammakaraṇavīriyābhāvo. Asaṃyamoti sīlasaññamābhāvo vissaṭṭhācāratā. Niddāti soppabahulatā. Tāya gacchantopi ṭhitopi nisinnopi niddāyati, pageva nipanno. Tandīti aticchātādivasena āgantukālasiyaṃ. Te chiddeti tāni cha chiddāni vivarāni. Sabbasoti sabbākārena. Tanti nipātamattaṃ. Vivajjayeti vajjeyya jaheyya. Chaṭṭhaṃ.
第七《自在经》注疏显示巴利原文
7. Issariyasuttavaṇṇanā
77 在第七经中,“持刀者”是指沾上了垢秽的刀剑。“他们阻止拿着什么的人?”问的是:正在阻止谁拿走什么?“自在”指行使命令。“女人”:由于她是不可施与的物品,所以说“女人是物品中最胜的,是殊胜的物品”。或者说,因为一切菩萨及转轮圣王都只于母胎中入胎,所以说“女人是物品中最胜的”。“忿怒”是持刀者的垢秽,意思是忿怒犹如沾了污垢的刀剑,或者说,它是智慧之剑上的污垢,故称为“持刀者的垢秽”。“阿浮陀”指毁灭的原因,意思是世间的盗贼就是毁灭者。“拿着离去”是指拿着筹食等离去的人。因为筹食等在被分发的那一刻,便已为人们所施舍。对于这些物品,取走的沙门受人敬爱;若不取走,人们便会因损失福报而生起追悔。第七经义释结束。显示巴利原文
77. Sattame satthamalanti malaggahitasatthaṃ. Kiṃ su harantaṃ vārentīti kaṃ harantaṃ nisedhenti. Vasoti āṇāpavattanaṃ. Itthīti avissajjanīyabhaṇḍattā ‘‘itthī bhaṇḍānamuttamaṃ, varabhaṇḍa’’nti āha. Atha vā sabbepi bodhisattā ca cakkavattino ca mātukucchiyaṃyeva nibbattantīti ‘‘itthī bhaṇḍānamuttama’’nti āha. Kodho satthamalanti kodho malaggahitasatthasadiso, paññāsatthassa vā malanti satthamalaṃ. Abbudanti vināsakāraṇaṃ, corā lokasmiṃ vināsakāti attho. Harantoti salākabhattādīni gahetvā gacchanto. Salākabhattādīni hi paṭṭhapitakāleyeva manussehi pariccattāni. Tesaṃ tāni haranto samaṇo piyo hoti, anāharante puññahāniṃ nissāya vippaṭisārino honti. Sattamaṃ.
第八 欲经注显示巴利原文
8. Kāmasuttavaṇṇanā
78 在第八经中,“不施自身”是指:除了所有菩萨之外,不应将自身送给他人为奴。“不舍弃”是指:除了所有菩萨之外,不应将自身舍给狮子、虎狼等。“善妙”是指柔和、柔软的语言。“丑恶”是指粗恶的言语。第八经义释结束。显示巴利原文
78. Aṭṭhame attānaṃ na dadeti parassa dāsaṃ katvā attānaṃ na dadeyya ṭhapetvā sabbabodhisatteti vuttaṃ. Na pariccajeti sīhabyagghādīnaṃ na pariccajeyya sabbabodhisatte ṭhapetvāyevāti vuttaṃ. Kalyāṇanti saṇhaṃ mudukaṃ. Pāpikanti pharusaṃ vācaṃ. Aṭṭhamaṃ.
第九 道粮经注显示巴利原文
9. Pātheyyasuttavaṇṇanā
79 第九颂注:「信结为道粮」——即生起信心后,行布施、持守戒律、行布萨羯磨,因此这样说。「吉祥」即自在。「住处」即居住之处。因为当获得自在时,无论在陆地还是水中,财富都会自然涌来,因此这样说。「牵引」即拖曳。第九颂注结束。显示巴利原文
79. Navame saddhā bandhati pātheyyanti saddhaṃ uppādetvā dānaṃ deti, sīlaṃ rakkhati, uposathakammaṃ karoti, tenetaṃ vuttaṃ. Sirīti issariyaṃ. Āsayoti vasanaṭṭhānaṃ. Issariye hi abhimukhībhūte thalatopi jalatopi bhogā āgacchantiyeva. Tenetaṃ vuttaṃ. Parikassatīti parikaḍḍhati. Navamaṃ.
第十 灯光经注显示巴利原文
10. Pajjotasuttavaṇṇanā
80 第十颂注:「灯光」指犹如灯。「醒觉」指犹如觉醒的婆罗门。「牛以业为命」指那些以劳作维生的牛,在劳作中成为同伴与助手。与牛群一起,耕作等业才能完成。「寒者」即犁。‘寒者的威仪’:此处‘寒’指犁,其威仪便是活命的方式。他这样说:‘对于那些用犁在田地里连一小块木头也得不到的人,他将如何存活呢?’第十颂注结束。显示巴利原文
80. Dasame pajjototi padīpo viya hoti. Jāgaroti jāgarabrāhmaṇo viya hoti. Gāvo kamme sajīvānanti kammena saha jīvantānaṃ gāvova kamme kammasahāyā kammadutiyakā nāma honti. Gomaṇḍalehi saddhiṃ kasikammādīni nipphajjanti. Sītassa iriyāpathoti sītaṃ assa sattakāyassa iriyāpatho jīvitavutti. Sītanti naṅgalaṃ. Yassa hi naṅgalehi khettaṃ appamattakampi kaṭṭhaṃ na hoti, so kathaṃ jīvissatīti vadati. Dasamaṃ.
第十一 无诤经注显示巴利原文
11. Araṇasuttavaṇṇanā
81 第十一颂注:「无诤」即无烦恼。「已圆满」即已圆满梵行。「自由人」指非奴仆的身份。「沙门」指诸漏尽者沙门,因为他们才是真正意义上的无诤。「已圆满者不亡失」是指他们的圣道住处不会亡失。「遍知」:从凡夫善士开始,有学通过世间遍知与出世间遍知而遍知。「自由人」唯有诸漏尽者沙门才永远具有自由人的身份。「礼敬」指从出家那天开始便行礼敬。「安立」即安立于戒中。「沙门在此」即沙门在此。「种姓下贱」指甚至连从旃陀罗家族出家的人。「刹帝利」指不仅是刹帝利,就连天人也礼敬戒具足的沙门。第十一颂注结束。显示巴利原文
81. Ekādasame araṇāti nikkilesā. Vusitanti vusitavāso. Bhojissiyanti adāsabhāvo. Samaṇāti khīṇāsavasamaṇā. Te hi ekantena araṇā nāma. Vusitaṃ na nassatīti tesaṃ ariyamaggavāso na nassati. Parijānantīti puthujjanakalyāṇakato paṭṭhāya sekhā lokiyalokuttarāya pariññāya parijānanti. Bhojissiyanti khīṇāsavasamaṇānaṃyeva niccaṃ bhujissabhāvo nāma. Vandantīti pabbajitadivasato paṭṭhāya vandanti. Patiṭṭhitanti sīle patiṭṭhitaṃ . Samaṇīdhāti samaṇaṃ idha. Jātihīnanti api caṇḍālakulā pabbajitaṃ. Khattiyāti na kevalaṃ khattiyāva, devāpi sīlasampannaṃ samaṇaṃ vandantiyevāti. Ekādasamaṃ.
《相应部》的注疏显示巴利原文
Saṃyuttanikāya-aṭṭhakathāya